RF Planning Guide PDF

MOTOROLA CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY
Copyright Motorola, Inc. 1993 -1998

12/18/98
CDMA RF Planning
Guide
Version 2.1
December 18, 1998
Motorola, Inc.
Cellular Infrastructure Group
1501 W. Shure Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
This document and the information contained in it is CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION of Motorola,
and shall not be used, or published, or disclosed, or disseminated outside of Motorola
in whole or in part without Motorolas consent. This document contains trade secrets of
Motorola. Reverse engineering of any or all of the information in this document
is prohibited. The copyright notice does not imply publication of this document.

CDMA RF Planning Guide
Version 2.1
12/18/98
ii
AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS
Benton, Phelman Bouska, Mary Butrym, Tony Clapp, Scott
Critchett, Cliff Critchley, John DeCamp, Joe Fernandez, Sam
Fleming, Phil Glaza, Steve Goedken, Doug Gold, Martin
Goodman, Igor Goodspeed, Jeff Hall, Scott Harrington, John
Hassid, Mony Herman, Richard Ivory, Gert Kaul, Ashish
Kay, John Kells, Anne Kulp, Joel Kuntz, Bob
Leffel, Michael Leonard, Terry Love, Bob Lui, Joey
MacKenzie, Rebecca Menich, Barry Meszko, Bill Mezera, John
Nagpal, Sanjay Osborn, Chris Pushparaj, John Ray Dale
Reed, Doug Reisman, Charles Rohani, Kamyar Rozanski, Walt
Ruppel, John Rydberg, Jim Schaeffer, Dennis Schomas, Brad
Seibert, Jim Smith, Mark Stedman, Robert Sweeney, Ted
Toone, John Vo, Cuoc Waldner, Timothy Walsh, William
Wilkinson, Steve Winger, Darren Zaccone, Kim
REVISION HISTORY
DATE VERSION DESCRIPTION
24 OCT 94 0.3 First preliminary version for internal review.
10 MAY 94 1.3 Reorganized all chapters, added new information and
corrections from the review of the first version.
29 JUL 94 1.4 Section 5.2 was added.
28 OCT 94 1.5 Revisions to Sections 2, 6, and 7.
Section 2: Provided sample calculation in 2.2.8.
Section 6: Deleted Fig. 6.2 and Table 6-1, replaced Fig. 6-8,
and revised Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.1.4, 6.2.4, 6.2.4.3.
Section 7: Revised Sections 7.2.3, 7.2.5 and Appx. A.7.1
14 FEB 95 1.6 Section 3: Expanded Section 3.6.3 - PN Offset Planning.
Section 6: Revised to incorporate SC
TM
9600-D
and SC
TM
2400.
16 FEB 96 1.7 Section 2: Incorporated 1.9 GHz channels designations.
Section 3: PN Offset section was expanded.
Section 4: Revised.
Section 5: Significant revision.
Section 6: Removed Fig. 6-4, modified Fig. 6-12, and
combined Sections 6 and 7 for 800 MHz.
Section 7: Added for 1.9 GHz.
Section 10: ISI section was added and the ISI white paper
was removed.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
iii
Section 11: Previously Section 10.
29 May 98 2.0 MAJOR REVISION
With the exception of Sections 8 and 9, all sections were revised
to include up-to-date material. Some sections were combined.
Some sections were added. The appendices were moved to
the back of the document. A glossary, Erlang B Table, and
a Watts to dBm conversion table was added. For all intents and
purposes, this may be considered a New RF Planning Guide.
18 Dec. 98 2.1 Section 2: Minor corrections.
Section 3: Minor corrections.
Section 5: Minor corrections, added to section 5.4.1.1, and
added new section 5.5.
Section 6: Replaced section 6.2.1.1.4, added to section
6.2.1.2.1, and added new section 6.3.
Section 7: Minor corrections.
Section 8: Replaced section 8.4.3, added new sections 8.6.1.4
and 8.6.2.
Section 10: Significant revision.
Appendix X:New appendix.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
iv
TOC - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Copyright Motorola 1993 - 1998
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Section 1: How to Use This Guide
1.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 SC
TM
Architecture Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Quick Guide to Contents of Each Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Section 2: Basic CDMA Spectrum Planning
2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Domestic and International Frequency Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.1 Motorolas Current BTS Product Portfolio for CDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 CDMA Channel Spacing - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.1 Minimum Spacing Between CDMA Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.2 1st CDMA Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.3 2nd CDMA Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.4 Greater Than Two CDMA Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Channel Spacing and Designation - 800 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4.1 Segregated Spectrum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.5 1,900 MHz Channel Spacing and Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.6 Dual-Mode vs Dual-Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.7 Spectrum Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.8 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.9 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Section
TOC
Table of Contents
Section TOC: Table of Contents
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Section 3: CDMA Capacity
3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Reverse Link Pole Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Vocoding Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.2.2 Median E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.2.3 Voice Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.4 Cell Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.5 Sectorization Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.2.6 Power Control Inaccuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3 Conventional Blocking Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.1 Assumptions of the Erlang B Model:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4 CDMA Soft Blocking Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4.1 Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4.2 Theoretical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.4.2.1 Single Cell Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.4.2.2 Multiple Cell System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.4.2.2.1 Path Loss Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.4.2.2.2 Interference from Other Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.5 Forward Link Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5.1 Forward Link First Order Capacity Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.2 Another Downlink Capacity Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.6 Simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.7 EIA/TIA Specifications and RF Air Interface Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.7.1 Forward Channel Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.7.2 Reverse Channel Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.8 Handoffs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.1 CDMA to CDMA Hard Handoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.2 CDMA to Analog Hard Handoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.3 Soft Handoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.4 Softer Handoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.8.5 Overhead Erlang Capacity for Soft Handoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.9 Determining Number of Sites to Support Required Capacity . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.9.1 Required Parameters for Initial System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.9.1.1 Busy Hour Call Attempts and Completions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.9.1.2 Average Holding Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.9.1.3 Erlangs per Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.10 Physical Traffic Channel Hardware Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.10.1 Traffic Channel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.10.1.1 Effective Traffic Channels (ETCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.10.1.2 Actual Traffic Channels (ATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.10.1.3 Physical Traffic Channels (PTCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.10.2 Erlangs to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.10.2.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.11 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.12 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Section 4: PN Offset Planning and Search Windows
4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Number of Pilot Offsets per CDMA Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 PN Offset Planning - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3.1 Consequences and Sources of Offset Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3.2 PN Offset Planning - Parameters and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3.3 Converting Between Chips and Time or Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3.4 Search Windows and Geography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.5 Search Windows and Scan Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.4 PN Offset Planning - Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.1 Mitigating Adjacent Offset Interference - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.1.1 Adjacent Offset Interference Protection Based on Timing . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.1.2 Adjacent Offset Interference Protection Based on Signal Strength . . . . 4-12
4.4.2 Protection Against Co-Offset Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4.2.1 Co-Offset Interference Protection Based on Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4.3 Incorrect Identification of an Offset by the Base Station . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.4.4 PILOT_INC and the Scan Rate of Remaining Set Pilots . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.4.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
4.4.6 Guidelines for Assigning Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.4.7 Guidelines for Changing PILOT_INC at Inter-CBSC Boundaries. . 4-24
4.5 Implementing PN Offset Plan Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.6 Re-Use Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.7 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Section 5: Coverage of CDMA Cells and Link Budget
5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Radio Frequency Link Budget. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Propagation Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1.1 Building Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1.2 Vehicle Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.1.3 Body Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.1.4 Noise Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.1.5 RF Feeder Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.1.6 Antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.1.6.1 Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.1.6.2 Subscriber Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.2 CDMA Specific Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.2.1 Interference Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.2.2 Soft Handoff Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2.2.3 E
b
/N
o
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.3 Product Specific Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.3.1 Product Transmit Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.3.1.1 Subscriber Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.3.1.2 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.3.2 Product Receiver Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.3.2.1 Subscriber Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.3.2.2 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.3.2.3 Noise Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.4 Reliability (Shadow Fade Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.2.5 Example Reverse (Uplink - Mobile to Base) Link Budget . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.2.6 RF Link Budget Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.3 Propagation Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.3.1 Free Space Propagation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.3.2 Hata Propagation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.3.3 COST-231-Hata Propagation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.3.4 Additional Propagation Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.4 Forward Link Coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.4.1 Power Amplifier Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.1.1 Equipment Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.1.2 CDMA Signal Power Distribution Characteristics and PA Sizing. . . . . 5-36
5.4.1.3 General Power Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.4.1.4 Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.4.1.4.1 Comparison to Average Rated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.4.1.4.2 Comparison to High Power Alarm Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.4.1.4.3 Comparison to Walsh Code Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.4.1.5 General Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.4.1.5.1 Minimum ARP Based on LT-AVG Estimate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.4.1.5.2 Minimum HPA Based on VST-AVG Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.4.1.5.3 Exceeding the High Power Alarm Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.4.1.6 Government Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.5 CDMA Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.5.1 CDMA Repeaters Used for Range Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.5.2 Potential Issues with Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.6 Theoretical vs. Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.7 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Section 6: RF Antenna Systems - Part 1
6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Co-Located AMPS & CDMA Cell Sites (800 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1 SC
TM
BTS/HDII Shared Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1.1 Common Transmit Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.1.1.1 Combining Configuration for the SC
TM
9600 LPA (Used by HDII Carriers) . 6-2
6.2.1.1.2 Combining Configuration for the HDII LPA (Used by SC
TM
BTS CDMA Carri-
er(s) ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.1.1.3 Unapproved Combining Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.1.1.3.1 Ring Combiners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
6.2.1.1.3.2 Pseudo-Omni Cell Using Splitters/Combiners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.1.4 Power Allocation in Mixed Mode Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.1.1.4.1 CDMA Forward Channel Carrier Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6.2.1.1.4.2 Linear Power Amplifier Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6.2.1.1.4.3 Example of a Mixed-Mode Site with Rate Set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
6.2.1.2 Common Receive Antenna(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.1.2.1 HDII Multicoupler (Receive Outputs Serving SC
TM
CDMA BTS) . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.1.2.2 SC
TM
9600 SIF (Receive Outputs Serving HDII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.2.1.3 Duplexed Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.2.1.4 Proper Installation and Maintenance of Duplexed Antennas. . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.2.1.4.1 Equipment Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.1.4.2 Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.2.1.4.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.3 Multiple Frame Antenna Sharing Config. with SC
TM
BTS Products . . 6-24
6.3.1 Multiple Frame Antenna Sharing w/800 MHz SC
TM
BTS Products 6-24
6.4 CDMA Cell Site Antenna Parameters (800 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.4.1 Selecting Antenna Location and Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.1.1 CDMA Antenna Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.1.2 CDMA Antenna Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5 Antenna Isolation Considerations (800/1900 MHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.5.1 CDMA/AMPS Transmit/Receive Antenna Isolation Requirements . 6-30
6.5.1.1 Measuring Port-to-Port Antenna Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.5.1.2 Reducing the Required Antenna Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.5.2 Typical Antenna Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.5.2.1 CDMA Antenna Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.5.2.2 Antenna Placement Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.6 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 The RF Elements of PCS Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2.1 SC
TM
4850/E Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3 Duplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3.1 SC
TM
604 Duplexer and Directional Coupler (DDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3.2 Pre-Engineered Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.3.3 Duplexers and Intermodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.4 Multiple Carrier Cavity Combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4.1 Output Power Without Combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4.2 Type of Combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.4.3 Multiple Carrier Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.5 Directional Couplers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.6 RF Diagnostic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.7 Surge (Lightning) Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.8 Transmission Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.8.1 RF Performance of Transmission Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.8.2 Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.8.3 Choice of Transmission Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.9 Transition Feeder Cables (Jumper Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.10 Antenna Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.10.1 Antenna Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.10.2 Antenna Beamwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.10.3 Voltage Standing Wave Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.10.4 Return Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.10.5 Power Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.10.6 Front to Back Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.10.7 Side Lobes & Back Lobes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.10.8 Antenna Downtilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.11 Antenna Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.12 Antenna Diversity (Spacial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.12.1 Horizontal Antenna Diversity and Recommended Separation . . . . 7-17
7.12.2 Vertical Antenna Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.13 GPS Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.14 Equipment Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.14.1 Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.14.2 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.15 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Section 8: Synchronization of the CDMA System
8.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3 Cell-Site Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3.1 Applicable EIA/TIA Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3.1.1 CDMA System Time: 1.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3.1.2 Frequency Tolerance: 7.1.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3.1.3 Timing Reference Source: 7.1.5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3.1.4 Base Station Transmission Time: 7.1.5.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3.2 Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.4 Synchronization Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4.1 Global Positioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4.2 Low Frequency Radio Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4.3 High Stability Oscillator (HSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4.4 Span Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.5 Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.5.1 GPS Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5.2 GPS Network Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.6 Synchronization Source Antenna Planning and Installation . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.6.1 GPS Antenna/Pre-Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.6.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.6.1.2 Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.6.1.3 Calculations of the GPS Cable Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.6.1.4 Multiple Frame GPS Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.6.2 Remote GPS Antenna/Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.6.2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.6.2.2 Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.6.2.3 Multiple Frame RGPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.6.3 LFR Antenna / Pre-Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.6.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
8.6.3.2 Cabling Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.7 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Section 9: Background Noise Measurements
9.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Suggested Measurement Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2.1 Test System Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2.2 Test System Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.3 Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.4 Data Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.5 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Section 10: Inter-System Interference (ISI)
10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Cellular/PCS Inter-System Interference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2.1 Intra-Band Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2.1.1 AMPS Cells to CDMA Mobiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.2.1.2 AMPS Mobiles to CDMA Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.1.3 CDMA Cells to AMPS Mobiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.1.4 CDMA Mobiles to AMPS Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.2 Inter-Band Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.2.1 Preventative Measures: BS-to-BS Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.2.1.1 BS-to-BS Interference Analysis Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.2.1.2 Equipment Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.2.2.2 Preventative Measures: MS-to-MS Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.3 PCS and Microwave Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.3.1 PCS to Microwave Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.3.1.1 Coordination Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.3.1.2 Propagation Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.3.1.2.1 Basic Propagation Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.3.1.2.2 PCS Base Station Correction Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.3.1.2.3 PCS Subscriber Unit Correction Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.3.1.3 Power Aggregation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.3.1.4 Microwave Receiver Interference Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.3.1.4.1 Carrier to Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.3.1.4.2 Threshold Degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.3.1.4.3 Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.3.1.5 PCS to Microwave Interference Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.3.2 Microwave to PCS Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.3.2.1 General Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.3.2.2 Calculation of Nominal Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.3.2.3 Calculation of Effective Interference Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.3.2.4 Calculation of Effective Noise Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.3.2.5 Microwave to PCS Interference Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Appendices
Appendix I: References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.-1
Appendix II: Terms and Acronyms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II.-1
Appendix III: Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III.-1
Appendix IV: Erlang B Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV.-1
Appendix V: Watts to dBm Conversion Table . . . . . . . . V.-1
Appendix VI: Section 3 - Further Reference . . . . . . . . . VI.-1
Appendix VII: Section 5 - Further Reference . . . . . . . VII.-1
Appendix VIII: Section 6 - Further Reference. . . . . . . VIII.-1
Appendix IX: Section 7 - Further Reference . . . . . . . . . IX.-1
Appendix X: Section 10 - Further Reference . . . . . . . . . X.-1
TOC
Version 2.1
12/18/98
1 - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this document is to provide CDMA systems engineers/planners with a basic set of
guidelines required to properly design a high quality CDMA RF System. The demarcation point(s)
for this guide are the antenna connector(s) of the Base Station equipment. The CDMA RF
Planning Guide (RFPG) commences at the antenna connectors and incorporates the RF antenna
system as well as the RF link.
General RF considerations for CDMA system design are addressed as well as 800 MHz and 1,900
MHz specific considerations. Channel assignments/designations for both 800 MHz and 1,900
MHz are located in Section 2. Separate sections have been dedicated to the RF antenna systems
for each frequency range. 800 MHz RF Antenna Systems are addressed in Section 6. 1,900 MHz
RF Antenna Systems are addressed in Section 7. Throughout this document the terms 800 MHz
and cellular may be used interchangeably; 1,900 MHz and PCS may also be used interchangeably.
Motorola has a complete line of base station products, the SC
TM
product is used throughout this
guide for illustration purposes.
Terms and acronyms are located in Appendix II. Appendix III is a glossary of terms which are
referred to in Section 4. It is advised that you familiarize yourself with these terms and acronyms
prior to reading this document.
1.2 SC
TM
Architecture Overview
A cellular Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) is but one part of a cellular infrastructure system.
The basic functions of cellular infrastructure equipment, shown in Figure 1-1 Wireless Network,
are to provide the fixed end of the radio interface to subscriber cellular phones and to route voice
and data traffic to and from the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
A Mobile Switching Center (MSC) provides the direct link to the PSTN. A Centralized Base
Station Controller (CBSC) and an Operations and Maintenance Center for Radio equipment
(OMC-R) provide all call control, O&M/diagnostics and transcoding capabilities.
Digital traffic and control information are routed from the MSC to the remote BTS utilizing T1 or
E1 span lines. The BTS provides the RF interface between the subscriber units and the Mobile
Switching Network (MSN). The function of the BTS is to create the network interface with the
CBSC for the transmission and reception of traffic and control information and to report the results
of alarms and self-diagnostic routines for system fault management.
Section
1
How to Use This Guide
1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 1-1: Wireless Network
1.3 Quick Guide to Contents of Each Section
The guide is a collection of fairly independent sections covering various aspects of CDMA system
design and implementation.
Cell Site
Controller
OMC-R
Mobility
Manager
Transcoder
Control Sub-System
Communications
Switching Center
Radio Sub-System
PSTN
BTS
CDMA Air
Interface
Fixed Portable
Mobile
1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The table below outlines key features of each section.
Section
Number
Section title Use it to
1 How to Use this Guide
2 Basic CDMA Spectrum
Planning
Learn how to allocate spectrum for CDMA carriers, which
bands are used for different technologies (word-wide), and
the importance of following Federal Rules and Regulations.
3 CDMA Capacity Determine the maximum capacity of a CDMA carrier per
sector as a function of system parameters, go through the
example of calculating the number of CDMA cells required
to support given traffic.
4 PN Offset Planning and
Search Windows
Understand the current methodology Motorola uses to
estimate the number of physical channels for each CDMA
site. PA sizing and traffic engineering has been incorporated
into this section.
5 Coverage of CDMA
Cells and Link Budget
Discussion of the parameters that comprise the CDMA RF
Link Budget. Discussion of some basic propagation models.
6 RF Antenna Systems -
Part I
How to co-locate Motorola AMPS and CDMA sites and
methods for sharing site equipment between two
technologies. Establish guidelines for installation of 800
MHz CDMA systems Antennas.
7 RF Antenna Systems -
Part II
Establish guidelines for 1,900 MHz installation of CDMA
antenna systems.
8 Synchronization of the
CDMA System
Determine the requirements to provide adequate signals to
synchronize the CDMA system, learn about strength and
weakness of each synchronization strategy.
9 Background Noise
Measurements
Understand the methodology Motorola proposes to measure
the background noise at each cell site, understand how
background noise impacts CDMA system performance.
10 Inter-System
Interference
Study issues with co-location of CDMA with other
technologies.
Appx. Appendices I-X Acronyms, Glossary, Erlang B Table, Watts to dBm
Conversion Table, detail referencing specific sections, and a
list of references and white papers.
1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.1 Introduction
This section provides a set of general guidelines required to properly allocate spectrum for the
CDMA system, including issues relating to the co-location of CDMA and AMPS systems. The
information is specific to spectrum allocation based on U.S. and International Standards. Issues
regarding technological impacts to capacity will be addressed in Section 3. In this section,
"channels" refer to frequency allocation and not conversation channels.
Common world-wide frequency bands for cellular and PCS introduces the section along with
Motorolas current BTS product portfolio for CDMA. Next follows a general discussion on
CDMA channel spacing. Specifics are given on CMDA channel designations (domestic) for 800
MHz and how to segregate the spectrum with existing 800 MHz technologies. PCS (domestic)
channel designations are listed, followed by a short discussion of dual-mode and dual-band. The
topic of spectrum clearing appears last, however it is perhaps one of the most important and
challenging aspects to the CDMA System Design Engineer. References include standards and
FCC web page locations.
2.2 Domestic and International Frequency Blocks
The manner in which the frequency spectrum is allocated in some countries imposes some
limitations on where CDMA may be implemented. It is difficult to predict the amount of available
spectrum or the frequency band which international operators might be considering for their
CDMA systems. With this in mind, prior to designing a CDMA system, the CDMA system design
engineers should obtain the frequency spectrum information from the operator and then determine
the appropriate BTS product to use based on the desired application and the operating frequency.
The table below highlights some of the more common frequency bands which are currently being
utilized for cellular, PCS and technologies in adjacent spectrum throughout the world.
Table 2-1: Some Common World-Wide Frequency Bands for Cellular and PCS
Block Designator
Transmit Frequency Band (MHz)
Personal Station Base Station
AMPS/EAMPS 824-849 869-894
TACS/ETACS 872-915 917-960
DCS 1800 1710-1785 1805-1880
GSM 890-915 935-960
Basic CDMA Spectrum
Planning
Section
2
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.2.1 Motorolas Current BTS Product Portfolio for CDMA
To assist CMDA system design engineers with selection of the proper SuperCell BTS for their
markets frequency band, Table 2-2 represents Motorolas current BTS product portfolio for
CDMA. For further detail, refer to your products documentation outlining its specifications.
PCS (Korea) 1750-1780 1840-1870
ARDIS (Pan America) 806-824 851-869
RAM Mobitex (Pan
America)
896-901 935-940
PCS (U.S. and Pan
America)
1850-1910 1930-1990
FPLMTS 1885-2025 2110-2200
FPLMTS (satellite) 1980-2010 2170-2200
PDC 900 940-956 810-826
PDC 1500 (Malaysia,
Moscow)
1477-1501 1429-1453
Japan Marinet 887-889 832-834
Japan Analog 898-901, 915-925 843-846, 860-870
DECT (TDD Systems) 1880-1900 1880-1900
PHS (TDD Systems) 1895-1918 1895-1918
Table 2-1: Some Common World-Wide Frequency Bands for Cellular and PCS
Block Designator
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 2-2: Motorolas Current BTS Product Portfolio for CDMA
Frequency Range (MHz)
Product Sectors Transmit Receive
Mode
MHz
SC 601 Replaced by SC 611
SC 604 Replaced by SC 614T
SC 611 1 (micro) 1930 - 1990 1850 - 1910 CDMA
1900
SC 611 1
(micro)
1840 - 1870 1750 - 1780 CDMA
1700
SC 611 1
(micro)
869 - 894 824 - 849 CDMA
800
SC 614 2 or 3
(macro)
869 - 894 824 - 849 CDMA
800
SC 614T 2 or 3
(macro)
1930 - 1990 1850 - 1910 CDMA
1900
SC 2400 3
(macro)
869 - 894 824 - 849 AMPS
800
NAMPS
800
CDMA
800
SC 2420 3
(macro)
930 - 949 885 - 904 CDMA
900
SC 2440 6
(macro)
832 - 834 887- 889 JCDMA
800
(Marinet)
SC 2450 3
(macro)
869 - 894 824 - 849 CDMA
800
SC 4812 6
(macro)
869 - 894 824 - 849 CDMA
800
SC 4820
SC 4820E*
(*exterior)
1, 2 or 3
(macro)
1840 - 1870 1750 - 1780 CDMA
1700
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.3 CDMA Channel Spacing - General
CDMA is a broadband technology which utilizes 1.2288 MHz bandwidth per CDMA Channel (this
is often rounded off to 1.23 MHz). There exists a 1.25 MHz minimum separation between CDMA
channels and guard bands of 0.27 MHz are added to each side.
In Section 2, "channel" is defined as each 1.2288 MHz carrier and not as a conversation path. For
AMPS, each frequency (carrier) corresponds to one conversation path therefore a channel could be
used to discuss conversational paths or the number of carriers. For CDMA, each carrier can
support many conversation paths and therefore the term "channel" can take on different meanings
based upon the context in which it is used.
SC 4840 6
(macro)
843 - 846 898 - 901 JCDMA
800
(Lo TACS)
SC 4850
SC 4850E*
(*exterior)
1, 2, or 3
(macro)
1930 - 1990 1850 -1910 CDMA
1900
SC 4852
SC 4852R
SC 4852E*
(*exterior)
1, 2 or 3
(macro)
1930 - 1990 1850 -1910 CDMA
1900
SC 9600 1, 2 or 3
(marco)
869 - 894 824 - 849 CDMA
800
CDMA
800 and/or
NAMPS/
AMPS
800
PDC 800,
1.5 GHz
SC 9640 6
(macro)
860 - 870 915 - 925 JCDMA
800
(Hi TACS)
Table 2-2: Motorolas Current BTS Product Portfolio for CDMA
Frequency Range (MHz)
Product Sectors Transmit Receive
Mode
MHz
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.3.1 Minimum Spacing Between CDMA Carriers
As the number of the CDMA subscribers increases, there may be a need to add additional CDMA
carriers to the system. If the first and second carriers are to be adjacent to one another then the
minimum spacing between CDMA carriers (center to center) should be 1.25 MHz. This places the
broadband carriers adjacent to one another and allows the sidebands of each to intrude into the band
of the other. If system noise, non-linearities or other imperfections increase the energy in the skirts
of the carriers, then a capacity reduction may be experienced.

2.3.2 1st CDMA Carrier
The initial introduction of CDMA will require a band segment of 1.77 MHz. The band segment
consists of the 1.23 MHz required for the CDMA carrier bandwidth plus 0.27 MHz of guard band
on both sides of the CDMA carrier. The minimum frequency separation required between any
CDMA carrier and the nearest AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center to center).
The CDMA carrier width (1.23 MHz) is the result of the chip rate chosen for the Pseudorandom
Noise (PN) spreading sequence. The guard band between CDMA and analog systems is defined
as the minimum frequency separation required such that the level of interference caused by one FM
mobile is less than a predetermined threshold. The threshold is taken to be the thermal noise level
in each receiver.
Figure 2-1: Minimum Spacing Between CDMA Channels
Figure 2-2: Calculation of Spectrum Required for a CDMA Carrier
CDMA Channel = 1.23 MHz = 1.23MHz

/ 30kHz
a
= 41 AMPS Channels
CDMA Guard = 0.27 MHz/side = 0.54MHz / 30kHz
a
= 18 AMPS Channels
Totals 1.77 MHz 59 AMPS Channels
a. One AMPS Channel = 30 kHz
1.25 MHz
1
st
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
2
nd
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.3.3 2nd CDMA Carrier
The following figure summarizes the additional and total number of AMPS channels removed for
the second CDMA channel.
The difference between the 1
st
CDMA carrier and the 2
nd
CDMA carrier is equal to the channel
spacing. Minimal channel spacing is 1.25 MHz (41.667 AMPS channels). The following figure
represents the frequency requirements for 2
nd
carrier implementation.
Figure 2-4: 2
nd
CDMA Carrier
2.3.4 Greater Than Two CDMA Carriers
Additional carriers can be added as outlined in 2.3.2 and 2.3.3. See Figure 2-5 for a 3-carrier
example. CDMA carriers must be at least 1.25 MHz apart with guard bands. The governing body
controlling the frequency allocations will dictate the amount of spectrum available for each
operator. This spectrum will limit the number of carriers allowed per block.
Figure 2-3: Calculation of Minimum Spectrum Required Two CDMA Channels
CDMA Spacing= 1.25 MHz = 1.25MHz

/ 30kHz
a
= 42 AMPS Channels
CDMA Channel = 1.23 MHz = 1.23MHz

/ 30kHz
a
= 41 AMPS Channels
CDMA Guard = 0.27 MHz/side = 0.54MHz / 30kHz
a
= 18 AMPS Channels
Totals 3.02 MHz 101 AMPS Channels
a. One AMPS Channel = 30 kHz
1.25 MHz
1
st
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
2
nd
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
Guard Guard
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 2-5: 3
rd
CDMA Carrier
2.4 Channel Spacing and Designation - 800 MHz
The Primary and Secondary CDMA Channel shall be assigned as indicated in Table 2-3 CDMA
Channel Spacing and Designation. Table 2-4 is taken directly from the IS-95A and outlines the
channel allocations shared by CDMA and AMPS technologies.
Table 2-3: CDMA Channel Spacing and Designation
A Band B Band.
Primary 283 384
Secondary 691 777
a
a. In the United States due to proximity of 800 MHz Air-Ground Radiotelephone
Service, channel 777 has interference considerations associated with it. Use of
this channel should require determination of sufficient isolation to the nearest
AirFone base receiver prior to implementation.
Table 2-4: Channel Number and Frequencies
System
Valid CDMA
Frequency
Assignments
Analog
Channel
Count
CDMA
Channel
Number
Transmitter Frequency
Assignment (MHz)
Mobile Base
A"
(1 MHz)
////////// 22 991
1012
824.040
824.670
869.040
869.670
CDMA 11 1013
1023
824.700
825.000
869.700
870.000
1.25 MHz
1
st
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
2
nd
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
Guard Guard
1.25 MHz
3
rd
CDMA Channel
1.23 MHz
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
A
(10 MHz)
CDMA 311 1
311
825.030
834.330
870.030
879.330
////////// 22 312
333
834.360
834.990
879.360
879.990
B
(10 MHz)
////////// 22 334
355
835.020
835.650
880.020
880.650
CDMA 289 356
644
835.680
844.320
880.680
889.320
////////// 22 645
666
844.350
844.980
889.350
889.980
A
(1.5 MHz)
////////// 22 667
688
845.010
845.640
890.010
890.640
CDMA 6 689
694
845.670
845.820
890.670
890.820
////////// 22 695
716
845.850
846.480
890.850
891.480
B
(2.5 MHz)
////////// 22 717
738
846.510
847.140
891.510
892.140
CDMA 39 739
777
847.170
848.310
892.170
893.310
////////// 22 778
799
848.340
848.970
893.340
893.970
Frequencies in shaded (//////////) regions are not valid for CDMA frequency assignments.
Table 2-4: Channel Number and Frequencies
System
Valid CDMA
Frequency
Assignments
Analog
Channel
Count
CDMA
Channel
Number
Transmitter Frequency
Assignment (MHz)
Mobile Base
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
In Table 2-4 Channel Number and Frequencies, the center frequency in MHz corresponding to the
channel number (expressed as N) is calculated as follows in Table 2-5 CDMA Channel Number to
CDMA Frequency Assignment Correspondence.
A visual depiction of the CDMA frequencies is identified in Fig 2-6: AMPS Frequency Allocation.
Figure 2-6: AMPS Frequency Allocation
2.4.1 Segregated Spectrum
When the CDMA carrier is deployed where other technology already exists, the system spectrum
must be split into two frequency bands. One band is for the existing technology and the other band
is for digital frequency bands. This concept is shown in the following B band frequency chart
figure. Note that the digital band includes a single primary CDMA carrier.
Table 2-5: CDMA Channel Number to CDMA Frequency Assignment Correspondence
Transmitter CDMA Channel Number Center Frequency (MHz)
Mobile Station 1 <= N <= 777 0.030 * N + 825.000
1013 <= N <= 1023 0.030 * (N-1023) + 825.000
Base Station 1 <= N <= 777 0.030 * N + 870.000
1013 <= N <= 1023 0.030 * (N-1023) + 870.000
A
A
Wireline
Non-Wireline
AMPS
A
EAMPS
B
EAMPS
691
777
384
283
1
st
A Band CDMA
B
AMPS
2
nd
ary A Band CDMA
1
st
B Band CDMA
2
nd
ary B Band CDMA
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
1
6
7
1
7
3
3
3
3
3
4
9
9
1
1
0
2
3
1
7
9
9
EAMPS
1
st
refers to the primary channel.
2
nd
ary refers to the secondary channel. Not to be confused with a second carrier.
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Page Intentionally Left Blank
2
C
D
M
A

R
F

P
l
a
n
n
i
n
g

G
u
i
d
e
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

2
:

B
a
s
i
c

C
D
M
A

S
p
e
c
t
r
u
m

P
l
a
n
n
i
n
g
2

-

1
1
M
o
t
o
r
o
l
a

C
o
n
f
i
d
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
o
p
r
i
e
t
a
r
y
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

M
o
t
o
r
o
l
a

1
9
9
3

-

1
9
9
8
V
e
r
s
i
o
n

2
.
1
1
2
/
1
8
/
9
8
7 Cell (120), 21 Channel Spacing, B Band
A1E B1E C1E D1E E1E F1E G1E A2E B2E C2E D2E E2E F2E G2E A3E B3E C3E D3E E3E F3E G3E
334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354
355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375
376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396
397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417
418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438
439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459
460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480
481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501
502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522
523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543
544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564
565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585
586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606
607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 61 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 626
628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648
649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 - - -
- - - - - 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732
733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753
754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774
775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795
796 797 798 799
CDMA Channel (364-404)
CDMA Guard (355-363 / 405-413)
Group
SIG
B
B
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
All advanced technology (NAMPS, TDMA or CDMA) that must co-exist with AMPS/EAMPS in
the available spectrum requires implementation of segregated spectrum. Transition from AMPS
to CDMA consists of effectively replacing AMPS channels with CDMA channels. In such a mixed
system, co-channel interference is minimized by dividing the available cellular spectrum into two
parts as depicted above. The segregated spectrum approach also requires the system to be
partitioned into three distinct geographic areas. This technique ensures the physical separation
needed to permit reuse of AMPS channels from the CDMA band.
There are two benefits to segregated spectrum planning. First, spectrum division reduces concern
over introducing interference as each CDMA carrier is implemented. Second, it will allow for
independent AMPS and CDMA planning.
The three distinct geographic areas created are identified as follows:
Core Zone - The region in which CDMA carriers are deployed. The core will operate CDMA
channels in the CDMA band and AMPS channels in the AMPS band. The existing AMPS
frequency plan is modified to delete AMPS channels in the CDMA band.
Perimeter Zone - The outermost area contains those cells that are located an adequate distance
from the CDMA core such that it is acceptable to assign AMPS channels that are in the CDMA
band. This physical separation serves to maintain acceptable interference levels.
Transition Zone - The transition zone (also known as the guard zone) is located between the core
and the perimeter. AMPS channels in the CDMA band should not be assigned in the transition
zone. This zone should not be confused with the transition cell hand-down capability.
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 2-7: Segregated Spectrum
The grade-of-service (blocking) should be checked for all cells to make sure it is acceptable,
particularly in the transition zone. In the event that the grade of service is unacceptable and all
channels have been assigned, certain design options can be exercised to resolve this problem. The
first option that may be considered is to replace the AMPS channels with CDMA channels. The
cell would then become a core cell. A second option would be to sectorize or cell split the AMPS
cell. A third option would be to reduce the size of the CDMA core to the point that this cell would
then be considered a perimeter zone cell.
Segregated spectrum may be implemented in various configurations: uniform, non-uniform and
homogenous. Uniform deployment consists of a single core area surrounded by a single transition
and perimeter zone. Non-uniform implementation may establish multiple CDMA core and
transition zones. A homogeneous implementation occurs when the entire system consists of
CDMA and there are no transitions or perimeter zones. Homogeneous system composition may
be considered by isolated systems or systems adjacent to another CDMA system.
Perimeter Zone
Core
Transition
Core
CORE
CORE
Option # 3 - Homogeneous
Option # 1 - Uniform
Option # 2 - Non-Uniform
Requires Isolated system or
adjacent CDMA systems
Zone
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.5 1,900 MHz Channel Spacing and Designation
The block designators for the personal and base station frequencies are as specified in
Table 2-6.
The channel spacing, CDMA channel designations and transmit center frequencies are specified in
Table 2-7.
Transmission on conditionally valid channels is permissible if the adjacent block is allocated to the
licensee or if other valid authorization has been obtained. Valid CDMA Channels Numbers are
identified in Table 2-8.
Table 2-6: Band Class 1 System Frequency Correspondence
Block Designator
A 1850-1865 1930-1945
D 1865-1870 1945-1950
B 1870-1885 1950-1965
E 1885-1890 1965-1970
F 1890-1895 1970-1975
C 1895-1910 1975-1990
Table 2-7: CDMA Channel Number to CDMA Frequency Assignment
Transmitter CDMA Channel Number Center Frequency (MHz)
Personal Station 0 <= N <= 1199 1850.000 + 0.050 * N
Base Station 0 <= N <= 1199 1930.000 + 0.050 * N
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 2-8: CDMA Channel Numbers and Corresponding Frequencies for Band Class 1
Block
Designator
Valid CDMA
Frequency
Assignments
CDMA
Channel
Number
A
(15 MHz)
Not Valid
Valid
Cond. Valid
0 - 24
25 - 275
276 - 299
1850.000 - 1851.200
1851.250 - 1863.750
1863.800 - 1864.950
1930.000 - 1931.200
1931.250 - 1943.750
1943.800 - 1944.950
D
(5 MHz)
Cond. Valid
Valid
Cond. Valid
300 - 324
325 - 375
376 - 399
1865.000 - 1866.200
1866.250 - 1868.750
1868.800 - 1869.950
1945.000 - 1946.200
1946.250 - 1948.750
1948.800 - 1949.950
B
(15 MHz)
Cond. Valid
Valid
Cond. Valid
400 - 424
425 - 675
676 - 699
1870.000 - 1871.200
1871.250 - 1883.750
1883.800 - 1884.950
1950.000 - 1951.200
1951.250 - 1963.750
1963.800 - 1964.950
E
(5 MHz)
Cond. Valid
Valid
Cond. Valid
700 - 724
725 - 775
776 - 799
1885.000 - 1886.200
1886.250 - 1888.750
1888.800 - 1889.950
1965.000 - 1966.200
1966.250 - 1968.750
1968.800 - 1969.950
F
(5 MHz)
Cond. Valid
Valid
Not Valid
800 - 824
825 - 875
876 - 899
1890.000 - 1891.200
1891.250 - 1893.750
1893.800 - 1894.950
1970.000 - 1971.200
1971.250 - 1973.750
1973.800 - 1974.950
C
(15 MHz)
Cond. Valid
Valid
Not Valid
900 - 924
925 - 1175
1176 - 1199
1895.000 - 1896.200
1896.250 - 1908.750
1908.800 - 1909.950
1975.000 - 1976.200
1976.250 - 1988.750
1988.800 - 1989.950
Table 2-9: CDMA Preferred Set of Frequency Assignments for Band Class 1
Block
Designator
Preferred Set Channel Numbers
A 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275
D 325, 350, 375
B 425, 450, 475, 500, 525, 550, 575, 600, 625, 650, 675
E 725, 750, 775
F 825, 850, 875
C 925, 950, 975, 1000, 1025, 1050, 1075, 1100, 1125, 1150, 1175
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.6 Dual-Mode vs. Dual-Band
Dual-mode subscriber units can support two air-interfaces using a common frequency band (i.e.
800 MHz). In a mixed digital and analog system, normally the registration request will be
attempted first to the digital service then to the analog service. Dual-mode allows the digital
service provider the option to re-direct traffic to a different air-interface where resources are
available, for capacity control or emergency hand down. Dual-mode phones also allow the
subscriber unit to roam outside of its home network (assuming service is provided).
Dual-band subscriber units are designed to allow a subscriber to utilize two frequency spectrums,
such as PCS frequency spectrum and the cellular bands. Handoffs are supported between CDMA
providers of different bands (much like dual-mode) and also supported between CDMA, NAMPS
and AMPS. With dual-mode phones, the service provider has the option to re-direct the subscriber
unit to a different air interface, however dual-band providers re-direct the subscriber unit to a
different part of the frequency spectrum. An example for dual-mode would be a subscriber unit
that is capable of operating on a CDMA 800 MHz system or could be re-directed to an AMPS 800
MHz system, assuming resources are available. An example for dual-band operation would be a
subscriber unit that is capable of operating on a CDMA PCS (1900 MHz) system and also being
able to operate on an AMPS 800 MHz system.
The goal in developing dual-mode and dual-band subscriber units is to ease transition from one
technology to a second (such as 800 MHz AMPS to 800 MHz CDMA), allow a single subscriber
unit to roam outside of the providers service area, and eventually to have a subscriber unit which
will work everywhere (domestic and international) thus providing "seamless" coverage.
"Seamless" coverage does not necessarily imply a single service provider.
2.7 Spectrum Clearing
Spectrum clearing is a topic which is especially important to CDMA systems. The CDMA
technology bases its capacity on a signal to noise balance (uplink and downlink). Adequate
spectrum must be cleared to optimize a system to its greatest capacity. Although there are many
approaches to testing the airways for clearance, it is advised that drive tests are performed (i.e. with
a spectrum analyzer) to verify that the spectrum is clear, and/or locate possible spectrum violators.
In the cellular bands, CDMA bandwidth is created by removing the appropriate number of AMPS
channels. This should be done in cells within the core and transition zones. For the 1
st
CDMA
carrier, 59 AMPS (30 kHz) channels would need to be cleared.
Cells for the transition (or guard) zone can be identified either by predictive RF propagation or
actual noise floor measurements. The coverage area needing spectrum clearing will vary
depending upon transmission signal strength, base station height, terrain variation, foliage, and
reflection from buildings, hills or the atmosphere. The zone or area of cells to be cleared is related
to the re-use distance needed to achieve acceptable C/I levels. The area needing clearing for
CDMA may be reduced by controlling interference. Examples of how to control interference
include: utilizing directional antennas, increasing or decreasing antenna heights and downtilts,
careful adjustment of power applied to pilot and voice channels, or by using geographic elements
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
for isolation.
Because all transmission equipment has the capacity to block or disrupt signalling, each country
has laws governing transmission of signals. Many countries have adopted the United States
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) standards. However, do NOT assume these
standards are international. In the United States, Codes of Federal Regulations must be strictly
adhered to. The U.S. government divides these codes into what are called "Titles". Each Title
covers a specific topic. For instance, Title 7 covers Agriculture codes, Title 15 covers Commerce
and Foreign Trade. The Telecommunication Code of Federal Regulations is listed in Title 47.
Title 47 is subdivided into "Volumes" which contain "Parts" or chapters explicitly defining each
code. The FCC World-Wide Web Page contains a search engine which can assist you in locating
specific regulations. For example, regulations governing licensing and use of frequencies in the
806-824, 851-869, 896-901, and 935-940 MHz bands are located under CFR 47, Part 90, Subpart
S. Specific codes for PCS exist under CFR 47, Part 24. The following list is what is contained
in subparts A thru I.
Subpart A: General Information
Subpart B: Applications and Licenses
Subpart C: Technical Standards
Subpart D: Narrowband PCS
Subpart E: Broadband PCS
Subpart F: Competitive Bidding Procedures for Narrowband PCS
Subpart G: Interim Application, Licensing and Processing Rules for Narrowband PCS
Subpart H: Competitive Bidding Procedures for Broadband PCS
Subpart I: Interim Application, Licensing and Processing Rules for Broadband PCS
Within these subparts great detail is given to rules and restrictions. One rule for example, under
Subpart E paragraph 24.236 gives the field strength limits: "The predicted or measured median
field strength at any location on the border of the PCS service area shall not exceed 47 dBuV/m
unless the parties agree to a higher field strength."
Rules can very specific. For instance regulations are given for items such as antenna mast heights,
antenna location, what maximum radiated power is allowed at each frequency, how to divide
spectrum, who is responsible for clearing spectrum and what is the allotted time frame. It is
important to understand clearly the regulations of the government for which you are designing the
system. Large fines can be assessed to the customer and/or Motorola.
Although Federal Regulations take priority, each state and town/city may have additional codes or
zoning regulations.
For non-U.S. regulations, please contact the governing agency of that country.
2.8 Conclusion
To design a system adequately, the RF System Engineer will need to work closely with the
customer and carefully follow government codes. To optimize CDMA, the signal to noise ratio
must be balanced. The goal is to minimize the noise and maximize the capacity.
2
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.9 References
1. EIA/TIA/IS-95-A, Mobile Station - Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode
Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular Systems, 1995, Sections 2.1.1.1, 2.2.1.1, 3.1.1.1,
3.2.1.1, 6.1.1.1, 6.2.1.1, 7.1.1.1, Tables 2.1.1.1-1, 6.1.1.1-1, 6.1.1.1-2.
2. ANSI J-STD-008, Personal Station-Base Station Compatibility Requirements for 1.8 to
2.0 GHz Code Division Multiple Access Personal Communications, March 24, 1995,
Section 2.1.1.1, Tables 2.1.1.1-1, 2.1.1.1-2, 2.1.1.1-3 and 2.1.1.1-4.
3. CFR 47 (Telecommunications), Office of the Federal Register National Archives and
Records Administration, October 1, 1997.
4. FCC Web Page (Wireless Telecommunications Bureau): http://www.fcc.gov/wtb/
National Archives and Records Administration (CFR Search Engine): http://
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/index.html
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.1 Introduction
Capacity of a wireless network (for mobile or fixed subscribers) is defined as the number of users
that a given cell can support. The amount of RF spectrum available has a direct relationship on the
amount of capacity that can be provided. The air interfaces which make efficient use of the
allocated spectrum will offer greater capacity. In AMPS or TDMA systems, blocking occurs when
all voice frequencies or time slots are fully occupied by other users in the system. In Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA) systems, all users in the system share a common wideband spectrum
over the time they are active. Hence, new users can be accepted as long as traffic channels at the
base site are available. Additional users accessing the system will increase the system interference
level and hence impact the Erlang capacity to some degree. In other words, the traffic capacity is
not only limited by the number of physical traffic channels available at the cell but also limited by
the amount of interference power in the spectrum.
Capacity of a CDMA system depends upon the amount of interference in the system. In order to
maximize the capacity, steps need to be taken to minimize the total power transmitted so as to
reduce the total interference in the system. By controlling this power, one is able to adjust the
capacity. Blocking in CDMA is defined to occur when the total interference density reaches a
predetermined level above the background noise density. This is a soft blocking condition. The
blocking probability can be relaxed by allowing the maximum tolerable interference level to
increase. In this section, a method to derive the maximum Erlang capacity per CDMA sector for
single-cell and multiple-cell systems will be presented.
This section will demonstrate that there is no simple formula that can calculate the actual capacity
that a CDMA cell site will be able to support. Though some equations will be provided to allow
one to approximate the number of users that could be supported, these equations will demonstrate
that the capacity of a CDMA carrier varies with many factors.
3.2 Reverse Link Pole Capacity
In digital systems the energy per bit needs to be a certain level above the total interference density
in order to detect the transmitted bit. This is referred to as E
b
/I
o
. Energy is equivalent to power
times time or to power divided by the rate. Therefore, the energy per bit can be expressed as the
received power divided by the maximum bit rate:
[EQ 3-1]
Assuming:
E
b
P
R
--- =
Section
CDMA Capacity
3
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
P denotes the received power from each subscriber at the base station antenna
R denotes the data rate (9600 bps for rate set 1, 14400 bps for rate set 2)
Power control is perfect
Subscribers are transmitting just enough power to be received
Uniform subscriber distribution
The total interference power density assuming N users, can be expressed as
[EQ 3-2]
Where:
Bandwidth of the channel
Using Equation 3-1 and Equation 3-2, the energy per bit to the total interference density can be
determined.
[EQ 3-3]
Solving for N yields:
[EQ 3-4]
It should be pointed out that some papers may approximate N-1 with N.
The above equation is an ideal case or can be referred to as a first order capacity estimate. The
capacity (N) can additionally be impacted by interference from other cell sites, the voice activity
associated with the users, and the effect of thermal noise. Including these other factors into
Equation 3-2 will yield:
[EQ 3-5]
where:
Interference power density impacted by other cells, and the number of users
with an average voice activity rate
I
0
N 1 ( )P
W
--------------------- =
W
E
b
I
0
------
P R
N 1 ( )P
W
---------------------
----------------------
W R
N 1
------------- = =
N 1
W R
E
b
I
0
--------------
N =
I
0
N
0
+
N 1 ( )P 1 f + ( )
W
----------------------------------------- N
0
+ =
I
0
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Ratio of out of cell (inter-cell) interference power to in cell (intra-cell)
interference power. This factor is used to adjust the capacity of a single
cell to account for the interference generated by other users in a multiple
cell system.
Average voice activity factor
Thermal noise
Using this new value of I
0
, Equation 3-3 can be rewritten as follows:
[EQ 3-6]
The pole capacity is defined as the maximum capacity that can be achieved under a given set of
conditions. At pole capacity, the rise over the thermal noise will approach infinity. This can be
calculated from the power rise over thermal rise.
[EQ 3-7]
[EQ 3-8]
As the denominator in Equation 3-8 approaches zero, the power rise over thermal rise will
approach infinity. Solving the denominator to be equal to zero will result in the maximum pole
capacity.
[EQ 3-9]
Solving for the number of users (N) yields:
[EQ 3-10]
As mentioned previously, sometimes N-1 is approximated to be only N.
f
N
0
E
b
N (
0
I
0
) +
-----------------------
P R
N 1 ( )P 1 f + ( )
W
----------------------------------------- N
0
+
------------------------------------------------------
W
R
-----
,
_
P
N
0
W
-----------
N 1 ( ) 1 f + ( )P
N
0
W
----------------------------------------- 1 +
---------------------------------------------------
= =
P
N
0
W
-----------
E
b
N (
0
I
0
) +
-----------------------
,
_
R
W
-----
,
_
N 1 ( ) 1 f + ( )P
N
0
W
----------------------------------------- 1 + =
P
N
0
W
-----------
E
b
N (
0
I
0
) +
-----------------------
,
_
R
W
-----
,
_
1
E
b
N (
0
I
0
) +
-----------------------
,
_
R
W
-----
,
_
N 1 ( ) 1 f + ( )
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
E
b
N (
0
I
0
) +
-----------------------
,
_
R
W
-----
,
_
N 1 ( ) 1 f + ( ) 1 =
N 1
W R
1 f + ( )
E
b
N (
0
I
0
) +
-----------------------
,
_
------------------------------------------------ N =
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Two additional items can be taken into account to further refine the number of users that can be
supported. They are a reduction factor due to imperfect power control and a factor to account for
sectorization. In Equation 3-10, the f factor accounts for interference coming from other cell sites.
The sectorization factor will account for the impact of interference leakage between sectors.
To approximate the reverse pole capacity point for CDMA, the following equation can be used.
[EQ 3-11]
Where:
Total received signal and noise power spectral density
Thermal noise power spectral density
Energy per bit
Ratio of Signal energy per bit to the sum of interference and noise
adjusted for imperfect power control.
Bandwidth of the channel
Data rate
Processing gain
Ratio of out of cell (inter-cell) interference power to in cell
(intra-cell) interference power. This factor is used to adjust
the capacity of a single cell to account for the interference
generated by other users in a multiple cell system.
Average voice activity factor
Sectorization gain
The adjusted E
b
/(I
0
+N
0
) requirement to account for imperfect power control (power control
deviation) can be determined by:
ReversePoleCapacity N
W R
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
adjust
-----------------------------------
1
1 f +
-----------
,
_
1
---
,
_
G
s
= =
I
0
N
0
E
b
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
adjust
W
R
W R
f
G
s
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
[EQ 3-12]
Where:
Signal / (Interference plus noise) ratio requirement under
perfect power control
Standard deviation in imperfect power control
Constant value equal to ln(10)/10
Some reverse link pole equations may use the term F, where F is defined as the ratio of in cell
(intra-cell) interference power to the sum of out of cell (inter-cell) interference power and in cell
(intra-cell) interference power. F is related to f by the following equation.
[EQ 3-13]
Substituting F into Equation 3-11 results in the following equation.
[EQ 3-14]
As an example, if one was to assume the following values for the various parameters, the reverse
link pole capacity for a rate set 2 site would be 19 users or roughly 12.3 Erlangs per sector
(assuming an Erlang B model with 2% grade of service) for a three sector site (57 users per site).
This value represents the pole capacity or the point at which no more users can be added without
seriously degrading the quality of the system.
Bandwidth of the channel (only one CDMA Channel) 1228800 Hz
Data rate 14400 bps
Ratio of out of cell (inter-cell) interference power to in cell 0.7
Average voice activity factor 0.4
Sectorization gain per sector for a three sector site 2.4/3
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
adjust
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
----------------- e

e
( )
2
2
=
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
F
InCell
InCell OutCell +
--------------------------------------------
1
1
OutCell
InCell
--------------------- +
------------------------------
1
1 f +
----------- = = =
W R
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
adjust
----------------------------------- F
1
---
,
_
G
s
= =
W
R
f
G
s
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Signal / (Interference plus noise) ratio requirement under
perfect power control 6.5 dB
Standard deviation in imperfect power control 2.5
Constant value ln(10)/10
[EQ 3-15]
[EQ 3-16]
One may come across various other sources showing a reverse link capacity equation. The equation
may not be exactly the same as Equation 3-10 or Equation 3-11 but one will notice many, if not all,
of the items will be represented: processing gain, E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) (may also include a factor to account
for imperfect power control or power control impact may be its own term), other cell interference,
voice activity factor, and impact of sectorization. When discussing capacity, be sure to mention
all of the factors which are being considered. For instance, 19 users shown above can easily turn
into 32 users if one does not account for any inter-cell interference (f=0). Various sources have
their opinion on the values to use in reverse capacity equation. Some values are more optimistic,
thus leading to more users. The moral is that the equations may be similar but the values used may
differ thus leading to different capacity claims from different sources.
Another point to be made is that these equations are for pole capacity. In designing a CDMA
system, one should not assume the system pole capacity will be achieved. The system designer
should plan so that the reverse link capacity will not exceed 75% of the pole capacity. From the
above example, this would correspond to about 14 users or 8.2 Erlangs. Note that this is for the
reverse link, the forward link may actually not allow this amount of Erlangs to be provided.
In analyzing Equation 3-11, one is able to draw out the following relationships:
The reverse pole capacity value is greater for the lower data rate vocoder (i.e. rate set 1
will provide greater reverse link capacity than rate set 2).
The reverse pole capacity value is increased if the E
b
/(N
o
+I
o
) requirement is reduced.
The reverse pole capacity value is increased if the average voice activity is reduced.
The reverse pole capacity value is increased if the inter-cell to intra-cell interference
ratio is reduced.
The reverse pole capacity value is increased if the sectorization gain can be increased
(i.e. choosing antennas with better front to back ratios and also antennas that have a
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
E
b
N
0
I
0
+
-----------------
adjust
10
6.5 10 ( )
e
0.23 2.5 ( )
2
2
5.27 7.22dB = = =
1228800 ( ) 14400
10
7.22 10 ( )
--------------------------------------------
1
1 0.7 +
----------------
,
_
1
0.4
-------
,
_
2.4
3
-------
,
_
19 = =
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
quick rolloff from their half power point to the back of the antenna).
The reverse pole capacity value is increased if the power control standard deviation is
reduced.
The following set of graphs demonstrates the six points just made. Only one of the parameter
values was varied for each graph with the other parameter values being left to the values given in
Equation 3-16. The intent of the graphs is to demonstrate the sensitivity a parameter value has on
the capacity of site or system.
3.2.1 Vocoding Rates
The capacity of a CDMA carrier is dependent upon the data rate of the vocoder being used.
Referring to Equation 3-11, one can see that R (the vocoders data rate) has an inverse relationship
to the reverse pole capacity. Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-5 will show curves for both rate set 1
(9600 bps which is commonly referred to as the 8 kb vocoder) and rate set 2 (14400 bps, commonly
referred to as the 13 kb vocoder).
3.2.2 Median E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
)
The following figure shows that lower values for E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) result in more users being supported.
BTS infrastructure enhancements that decrease the required E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) value is one area Motorola
is researching to improve the capacity of the reverse link.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-1: Impact of E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) on the Number of Users
It is perceived that for a mobile environment a 7 to 7.5 dB E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) value is desired. For a fixed
system, the E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) requirement can be as low as 3 to 4 dB for some situations (fixed units
installed indoors with a whip antenna will require E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) values similar to the mobile
environment, whereas fixed units installed with outdoors directional antennas will require lower
E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) values). From the graph above, a 3 dB advantage of a fixed system over a mobile
system will yield a pole capacity of approximately twice the number of users (when only the impact
of E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) is considered).
3.2.3 Voice Activity
As a means to minimize interference, the transmission rate and power can be reduced when the
voice activity is absent or lessened. This reduction in transmission rate or power reduces the aver-
age signal power of all users and thereby reduces the interference seen by each user. This follow-
ing figure depicts that as the voice activity increases, fewer users can be supported.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-2: Impact of Voice Activity on the Number of Users
3.2.4 Cell Interference
The capacity of a cell depends on the total interference it receives from other cells. The level of
power that is received at the base station from different sources is dependent upon the laws of
propagation. The following figure shows that when the out of cell interference is increased with
respect to the in cell interference that the capacity will degrade.
[EQ 3-17] f
OutCell
InCell
--------------------- =
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-3: Impact of Other Cell Interference on the Number of Users
The following table shows several f values that were obtained from simulations assuming a spe-
cific propagation model (pathloss slope, standard deviation, and correlation).
Table 3-1: Samples of Various f Factors
Note: path loss slope converts to path loss dB/decade by
multiplying the slope by a factor of 10
The terms of the propagation model correspond to the pathloss slope, the shadowing standard
deviation and the site to site correlation value. As shown by the above table, higher propagation
exponents (the pathloss slope) will reduce the f factor and lower exponents will increase the value
of f.
For a system that is only comprised of a single cell (for example a fixed system in a remote area),
there will be no out of cell interference and therefore the pole capacity will be higher. One could
also deduce that sites positioned along a highway to provide only highway coverage will not see
Path loss
slope
Standard
Deviation Correlation f Factor
4.0 6.5 0.9 0.43
4.0 8.0 0.5 0.55
3.5 6.5 0.5 0.69
3.5 8.0 0.5 0.76
3.5 10 0.1 1.68
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
much interference from other sites and therefore the f value will be lower for these sites than for a
site in the middle of a cluster of sites. In addition the f value will be lower for systems that are only
comprised of several sites than for a system with many sites. As the number of sites increases there
is a greater occurrence of interference from other cells which will increase the f value as shown by
Equation 3-17.
3.2.5 Sectorization Gain
Sectorization gain can be somewhat of a misleading term. One could think of the sectorization gain
as more of a reduction factor. For an omni site, the sectorization gain is one. With a sector site,
one could initially try to multiply the resulting capacity of an omni site (or single sector) by the
number of sectors for the sector site (i.e. a three sector site would support three times the number
of users at an omni site and a six sector site would support six times the number of users at an omni
site). This is not the case though. One can think of the additional sectors as being other locations
generating interference to the desired sector. The other cell interference factor accounts for just
that, interference generated by other sites. The sectorization gain is the adjustment for the other
sectors at the local site causing increased levels of interference. The reason it is referred to as a
sectorization gain is that for a given physical site location, this site location is able to support many
more users when it is sectorized than if it stayed omni.
The sectorization gain can be improved by selecting antennas which have a good front to back ratio
and which also exhibit a quick rolloff past the half power points (3 dB down from main lobe). For
instance, using a 90 degree antenna in place of a 120 degree antenna for a three sector site would
decrease the amount of energy (interference) going into adjacent sectors, thus increasing the
sectorization gain and thereby improving upon the number of users which could be supported.
Though one can not decrease the horizontal beamwidth too far so as coverage (signal strength) is
not sufficient. As the sectorization gain increases, one can see from the following graph that the
number of users will increases.
The sectorization gain value which is commonly used is 0.8 per sector or 2.4 for a three sector site
(0.8 time 3). This 0.8 sectorization gain can be thought of as a 1 dB impact to the capacity of the
site due to other sectors interference.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-4: Impact of Sectorization Gain on the Number of Users (3 Sector)
The above figure would apply only to a three sector site. The sectorization gain shown is for an
entire site. For instance, a sectorization gain of 2.4 corresponds to 0.8 per each sector (= 2.4/3). For
an omni site the sectorization gain would be 1. If one considered the sectorization per sector for a
six sector site to be similar to a three sector site then the sectorization gain for the site would be 6
times the per sector value (for instance, 6 * 0.8 = 4.8).
3.2.6 Power Control Inaccuracy
Traffic capacity of CDMA systems is increased by implementing an appropriate power control
scheme to equalize the performance of all subscribers in the system. The appropriate power control
scheme reduces the interference to the other adjacent cells. The less interference generated in the
spectrum, the more users the CDMA system can support. As previously mentioned, the inaccuracy
in power control is roughly a log-normal distributed function. Under different path loss situations,
the average required E
b
/(N
0
+I
0
) tends to fluctuate around the mean to maintain a desirable Frame
Error Rate. The power control standard deviation varies according to the extent of fluctuations.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-5: Impact of Imperfect Power Control on the Number of Users
This graph shows that improving the accuracy of power control can provide some increase to the
number of users.
At relatively slow speeds or in static conditions (fixed), power control is effective in counteracting
slow fades whereas at high speeds power control is not as effective in counteracting fast fading. At
higher speed, the effects of interleaving become increasingly beneficial.
3.3 Conventional Blocking Analysis
In AMPS and TDMA systems, voice/traffic channels are assigned to users as long as they are
available. Given the required offered traffic, the Erlang B model is used to determine the number
of traffic channels required to provide a predetermined grade of service. The Erlang B model is
based upon a model of serving without queuing. In other words, all blocked calls are cleared.
Traffic load is the product of call rate and call holding time. It is a dimensionless quantity
measured in Erlangs. One Erlang is the traffic intensity of a traffic channel which is continuously
occupied. Grade of service is a term used to quantify the extent to which congestion occurs in any
trunking system and is typically expressed as the probability of finding blocking. Blocking in
AMPS and TDMA is defined to occur when all voice frequencies (for AMPS) or time slots (for
TDMA) have been assigned to other subscriber stations.
The values quoted for traffic load and grade of service for cellular systems are usually taken during
the busy hour. Busy hour is defined as the continuous one-hour period in the day during which the
highest average traffic density is experienced by the system. The Erlang B formula is given by:
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
[EQ 3-18]
where
A is the offered traffic
C is the number of available servers
3.3.1 Assumptions of the Erlang B Model:
1. The number of potential users is infinite
2. Intervals between originations are random
3. Call holding times are random
4. Call set up time is negligible
3.4 CDMA Soft Blocking Analysis
Unlike the traditional analog design, balanced uplink and downlink cannot be achieved in CDMA
because of the differences in waveform design on both links. Originally it was considered that the
reverse link (subscriber to base) would usually be the capacity limiting path. However with the rate
set 2 vocoder and other real world situations, the forward link (base to subscriber) may be the
limiting path. Soft blocking in CDMA systems is defined to occur when the total collection of
users both within the serving cell/sector and in other neighbor cells introduce an amount of
interference density so great that it exceeds the background noise spectral density by a predefined
amount. Under the assumption that the system is not hardware limited, the following analysis
applies this soft blocking concept to calculate the Erlang capacity of a CDMA system. The concept
of soft blocking will be explained in details in the following paragraphs.
3.4.1 Assumptions
1. The number of active calls is a Poisson random variable with mean ( )
2. Each user is active with probability and inactive with (1- )
3. Each users required energy per bit-to-interference density ratio (E
b
/I
o
) is varied
according to propagation conditions to achieve the specified Frame Error Rate (FER).
The FER is usually taken as 1% (0.01) to provide satisfactory transmission.
4. All the sectors have the same number of users.
5. The users are uniformly distributed over each sector.
P
Blocking
A
C
C!
------
A
K
K!
------
K 0
C
------------------ =
---

3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.4.2 Theoretical Analysis
In mathematical form, the definition of blocking can be restated as follows:
Interference from the + Interference from + Thermal Noise = Total Interference
serving cell other cells
Blocking occurs when
[EQ 3-19]
where
k is the number of simultaneous users per sector. By assumption [1], k is a Poisson random
variable with mean which is the offered traffic
W is the spread spectrum bandwidth allocated to CDMA
R is the data rate
E
b
is energy per bit
N
o
is the background thermal noise density
I
o
is the total allowable interference density
The voice activity ( ) is a binomial random variable with = Pr ( =1), which is the gate on
probability.
The voice activity factor ( ) is defined as:
= Probability ( =1) [EQ 3-20]
Defining = E
b
/I
o
, which is known as the Bit Energy to Interference Density Ratio, and dividing
by I
0
R, the Inequality [Equation 3-19] can be written as follows:
[EQ 3-21]
where
W/R is known as the processing gain
i
i 1 =
k
E
bi
R v
i
j ( )E
bi
j ( )R N
0
W I
0
W > +
i 1 =
k
j
othercells
---
i
i 1 =
k

i
v
i
j ( )
i
j ( )
i 1 =
k
j
othercells
+ 1 ( ) >
W
R
-----
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
is the predefined threshold
Hence, the probability of blocking for CDMA is defined as the probability that the above condition
holds true.
P
blocking
= Probability { Z = } [EQ 3-22]
It can be easily noticed that the blocking probability for CDMA is determined by the system
E
b
/I
o
performance, voice activity factor, the spread spectrum bandwidth, the baud rate, and the
maximum allowable interference level. The probability of blocking can be relaxed by allowing the
maximum tolerable interference level (I
0
/N
0
) to increase. In this case, the system is forced to
accommodate more simultaneous users by degrading its service quality. This phenomenon is called
soft blocking. The threshold value for the maximum allowable interference shall be defined in
the call processing software by the operator.
To evaluate the blocking probability, the distribution of Z has to be determined which, in turn,
depends on the following random variables: voice activity ( ), bit energy to interference ratio ( ),
the total number of users in the sector (N
s
), and the number of active users per sector (k).
The voice activity ( ), is a binomial random variable with = Pr ( =1), which is the gate on
probability. The distribution is given by:
P( =k) = [EQ 3-23]
The distribution of k is Poisson and is given by:
P
k
= [EQ 3-24]
where and are the arrival and service rates and is the offered traffic.
The distribution of E
b
/N
o
depends on the power control mechanism in the system. Power control
allows the system to equalize the transmit power of all subscribers within the system. In a trial test,
the E
b
/N
o
performance was measured with a fixed system Frame Error Rate (FER) for a fully
loaded CDMA cell. The data showed the overall E
b
/N
o
was a log-normal distribution. Hence the
distribution of can be written as:
N
o
I
o
------ =
i
i 1 =
k

i
v
i
j ( )
i
j ( )
i 1 =
k
j
othercells
+ 1 ( ) >
W
R
-----

N
s
1
k
,
_

k
1 ( )
Ns k 1

---
,
_
k
k!
----------- exp

------
,
_
---
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
[EQ 3-25]
where
x is a Gaussian Random Variable with mean m and standard deviation .
The first and second moment of are given by:
E( ) = E[ ] = [EQ 3-26]
E( ) = E[ ] = [EQ 3-27]
where =
3.4.2.1 Single Cell Case
For the single cell case, the second summation term in Equation 3-22 is zero (i.e. no interference
for other cells). Since Z is the sum of k random variables, where k is the number of simultaneous
users in the system, we can apply the Central Limit Theorem approximation for Z. The central limit
theorem states that the probability density function for the sum of a number of independent random
variables with arbitrary one-dimensional probability density function approaches a Gaussian
Distribution. Hence the probability of blocking can be re-written as:
Probability of Blocking = [EQ 3-28]
where E( ) is the expected value and STD( ) is the standard deviation
A = and Q(x) =
By computing the expected value and standard deviation of , the probability of blocking for a
CDMA single cell system can be formulated as in Equation 3-29. The detailed derivation is shown
in Section VI.1 of Appendix VI.
10
x 10
=
exp x ( ) exp
( )
2
2
-------------- exp m ( )
2
exp 2x ( ) exp 2 ( )
2
[ ] exp 2m ( )
ln 10 ( )
10
----------------
Q
A E Z ( )
STD Z ( )
----------------------
Z
Z
exp m ( )
---------------------- =
W R
exp m ( )
----------------------
1 ( )
1
2
----------
e
x
xp

2
2
--------
,
_
d
Z
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.4.2.2 Multiple Cell System
In a multiple-cell system we need to consider the interference created by users in the serving cell
and cells other than the serving cell. The path loss characteristics and the overhead capacity for
soft handoffs need to be taken into account.
3.4.2.2.1 Path Loss Characteristics
Power control is crucial to CDMA system performance. Assuming that the path loss depends only
on the subscriber-to-base distance, the subscribers will be power controlled by the nearest cell. The
generally accepted theoretical path loss model is to introduce an attenuation which is the product
of, the subscriber-to-base distance to the power , and, a log-normal random variable with zero
mean and dB standard deviation.
When plotting the signal strengths at a given radio path distance, the deviation from the local mean
values is approximately 8 dB. This standard deviation of 8 dB is roughly true in many different
areas. The path loss curves can be obtained by collecting data from different drive runs in different
environments. As long as the subscriber-to-base distance for each run is the same, the signal
strength data measured at that particular subscriber-to-base distance can be used for determining
the local mean values for the path loss at that distance.
A detailed discussion of this theoretical path loss model and the measurement results obtained in
Downtown Chicago are presented in Appendix VI. Measurements have also been made in several
other major cities. Some of the typical values are tabulated as follows
Table 3-2: Propagation Pathloss in Different Areas
1
Propagation Area
1 Mile Intercept Point (P
o
)
in dBm
Path Loss Slope ()
dB/decade
Free Space -45.0 20.0
Open Area -49.0 43.5
Suburban -61.7 38.4
Philadelphia -70.0 36.8
Newark -64.0 43.1
New York City -77.0 48.0
Tokyo, Japan -84.0 30.5
Q
W R
exp m ( )
---------------------- 1 ( )

---
,
_
exp
( )
2
2
--------------
,
_

,
_
---
,
_
exp 2 ( )
2
[ ]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
,

_
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Since one is usually concerned about propagation at far distances for coverage purposes, path loss
measurements typically use a 1 mile (or 1 km) intercept point as a starting point for path loss
curves. This also tends to eliminate some of the near-field effects of near-by surroundings and
vertical beam width shadowing. Although different areas may have different path loss slopes,
Table 3-2 also shows that an area-to-area prediction is represented by two parameters, the 1 mile
intercept point (P
o
, the power received at a distance of 1 mile from the transmitter) and the path loss
slope (). Differences in area-to-area prediction curves are primarily due to the differences in man-
made structures. When the base station is located in a city environment, then the 1 mile intercept
signal level could be very low, but the slope is flattened out, as shown by the Tokyo data. When
the base station is located outside the city, the intercept signal level could be much higher, but the
slope is larger, as shown by the Newark data. Due to differences in structure density (average
separation between buildings), the 1 mile intercept could be high or low, with the path loss slope
still at a typical level of about 40 dB/dec (i.e. compare data of open area to Newark).
3.4.2.2.2 Interference from Other Cells
The normalized interference density from other cells can be written as:
J
o
= I
oc
/ I
o
= Total Interference from other cells / I
o
W
= [EQ 3-30]
where
r
m
= distance from any subscriber to its own cell not power controlled by the serving cell
r
0
= distance from any subscriber to the serving cell not power controlled by the serving cell
= path loss exponent
= voice activity
I
oc
= Other cells interference density
I
0
= Total allowable interference density
W = spread bandwidth
1. William C. Y. Lee, "Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Systems", McGraw-Hill Book Company, Sec-
ond Edition 1995, figure 4.3, p. 110.
r
m
r
0
-----
,
_
10
10
------

r
0
r
m
----- ,
,
_
E
b
R
I
0
W
-----------------
,

_
dA
allcells

3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
E
b
*R = Bit energy * data rate, which is the received power at the base station for any user,
assuming power control is applied.
defines the path loss characteristics and is Gaussian random variables with zero means
and standard deviation of
= user density = 2 * users per sector / *sectorization gain
= 1, if
= 0, otherwise
By calculating the expected value and standard deviation J
o
and , the probability of blocking for
a CDMA multiple cell system is formulated in Equation 3-31. The detailed derivations are shown
in Section VI.3 of Appendix VI. Values for and are plotted in Figure VI.3-2,
Section VI.3 of Appendix VI.
Using Equation 3-29 and Equation 3-31, the probability of blocking is plotted against the Erlang
capacity per CDMA sector in different situations. A list of parameters is included at the bottom of
each plot.
3

r
0
r
m
----- ,
,
_
r
m
r
0
-----
,
_
10
10
------
1
z
I r , , ( ) I 2 r , , ( )
Q
W R
exp m ( )
---------------------- 1 ( )

---
,
_
exp
( )
2
2
--------------
,
_
1 I r , , ( ) + [ ]
,
_
---
,
_
exp 2 ( )
2
[ ] 1 I 2 r , , ( ) + [ ]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
,

_
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-6: Probability of Blocking vs Erlangs per CDMA Sector with Various Path Loss
Slope Values with Rate Set 1 Vocoder
Parameters:
Mean E
b
/N
o
= 7 dB
Pwr Ctrl Std Dev = 2.5 dB
Voice Activity Factor = 0.4
Spread Bandwidth = 1.23 MHz
Data Rate = 9600 bps (rate set 1)
Total Interference Density to Background Noise Level (I
0
/N
0
) = 10
Shadowing Standard Dev = 8 dB
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-7: Probability of Blocking vs Erlangs per CDMA Sector with Various Power Control
Standard Deviations with Rate Set 1 Vocoder
Parameters:
Mean E
b
/N
o
= 7 dB
0
/N
0
) = 10
Path Loss Slope = 40 dB/dec
Shadowing Std Dev = 8 dB
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-8: Probability of Blocking vs Erlangs per CDMA Sector with Various Path Loss
Slope Values with Rate Set 2 Vocoder
Parameters:
Mean E
b
/N
o
= 7 dB
Pwr Ctrl Std Dev = 2.5 dB
0
/N
0
) = 10
Shadowing Standard Dev = 8 dB
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-9: Probability of Blocking vs Erlangs per CDMA Sector with Various Power Control\
Standard Deviations with Rate Set 2 Vocoder
Parameters:
Mean E
b
/N
o
= 7 dB
0
/N
0
) = 10
Path Loss Slope = 40 dB/dec
Shadowing Std Dev = 8 dB
3.5 Forward Link Capacity
Forward link capacity calculations are similar to the reverse link calculations in that the ratio of
energy per bit over the interference density for each subscriber needs to be calculated. The nature
of the interference is slightly different in that the pilot, page and synchronizing channels need to
be considered as interference. Therefore the capacity of the forward link is dependent upon the
strength of these channels.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The forward link (downlink) capacity can vary significantly with multipath and subscriber unit
speed. The E
b
/I
o
can vary from a couple dB to more than 20 dB.
3.5.1 Forward Link First Order Capacity Approximation
A first order approximation for the forward link capacity can be given by the following equation:
[EQ 3-32]
[EQ 3-33]
[EQ 3-34]
Where:
Number of Erlangs supported
Effective Voice Activity
Fraction of total cell power for pilot, page, and sync
Fraction of users in i-way handoff
Fraction of allocated cell power for each i-way link
Total normalized interference seen by i-way user
Other cell (not including adjacent carrier) normalized interference
Fraction of recovered power by i-way connection
N
1
pps
( )
V
eff
3S
3way
3way
( 2S
2way
2way
S
1way
1way
) + +
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<
i way
I (
on i ) (

i ( )
) 10
E
b
Nt
iway
--------------
FPC
error
) 10 +
i
i ( )
W
R
-----
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =
I
on i ) (
i I
ocn i ) (
+ =
N
V
eff
pps
S
iway
iway
I
on i ) (
I
ocn i ) (
i ( )
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 3-3: Example of Parameter Values
As an example, if the values from the above table are entered into Equation 3-32, Equation 3-33,
and Equation 3-34, the forward link capacity is approximately 14.7 Erlangs for rate set 1 and
approximately 7.5 Erlangs for rate set 2.
3.5.2 Another Downlink Capacity Equation
[EQ 3-35]
[EQ 3-36]
[EQ 3-37]
Where:
Cell or sector capacity in users
Parameter 1-way 2-way 3-way
0.4 0.35 0.25
0.134 0.3 0.3
0.92 0.92 0.8
for 13 kb
15.5 dB 9 dB 7 dB
for 8 kb
13 dB 7 dB 5 dB
1.2 dB (13 kb)
1.5 dB (8 kb)
0.37
85.33 (13 kb)
128 (8 kb)
0.48 (13 kb)
0.56 (8 kb)
S
iway
I
ocn i ) (
i ( )
E
b
Nt
iway
E
b
Nt
iway
FPC
error
pps
W R
V
eff
avg F
i
V
i
i 1 =
C 1 g + ( )
1 =
C
1
v
1
h F
avg
---------------------------- =
h P
1c 1s ,
2P
1c 2s ,
+ ( ) 2P
2c 2s ,
3P
2c 3s ,
+ ( )
v
2
v
1
-----
,
_
3P
3c 3s ,
v
3
v
1
-----
,
_
+ + =
C
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Soft plus softer handoff overhead
Fraction of power allocated to the i-th subscriber
Instantaneous voice activity of the i-th subscriber
Fraction of power allocated to the overhead channels (pilot, page, sync)
Handoff reduction factor (accounts for additional power in power-control
sub-channel)
Probability of i-cell, j-sector handoff
Average (effective) voice activity in i-way handoff
[EQ 3-38]
Where , ,
Gain of power control symbols in i-way handoff relative to traffic channel
Average voice activity
3.6 Simulations
The three system characteristics of Coverage, Quality and Capacity must be balanced off of each
other to arrive at the desired level of system performance. In a CDMA system, these three
characteristics are tightly intertwined. If high capacity is desired, there will be some degree of
degradation in coverage and/or quality. The important point to get across is that since these
parameters are all intertwined, one can not have the best of all worlds: large RF coverage footprint,
high capacity, and high quality voice.
It is up to the system designer to determine how to balance these parameters to best serve a
particular area. The best balance point will change from cell site to cell site. Sites in dense
downtown areas will trade off coverage for capacity. Conversely, at the edges of a system capacity
could be sacrificed for coverage area.
The reverse pole capacity equation and the probability of blocking equation can only be used as an
approximation of capacity of the system. They do not take into account the size of the cell nor the
spacing between the sites. These equations do not totally account for the benefits of soft handoff,
in that the probability that all sites serving a given mobile will experience peak rises at the same
g
F
i
V
i
h
P
ic js ,
v
i
v
i
23
24
------
,
_
1
24
------
,
_
i
2
+ =
v
1
0.43 = v
2
0.48 = v
3
0.51 =
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
time is very small. In addition, the subscriber distribution will not be uniform. One sector may need
to support many users, whereas the near by sectors may be lighter loaded and therefore result in a
lower f value which improves capacity. A more accurate estimation can be performed with
simulations.
The NetPlan Simulator incorporates most of the IS-95 parameters such as T_ADD and T_DROP,
overhead channel power requirements as well as generic parameters such as antenna bearing,
downtilt, gain, horizontal and vertical patterns. The diversity benefit for each forward and reverse
link due to SHO or delay spread is accounted for as well as a mitigation of the benefit due to link
imbalances. Each subscriber is accounted for by the forward and reverse power control when trying
to achieve either a given Frame Erasure Rate or Eb/No target. Subscriber classes can also be
assigned with corresponding antenna gains and minimum and maximum power levels.
In essence, the NetPlan Simulator is a tool to layout a DS-CDMA system resulting in information
on predicted capacity, required system parameter values, system quality and hardware loading
information. It permits investigations into real cellular system concerns such as edge effects,
propagation anomalies, antenna types, subscriber distribution, call quality, receiver sensitivity
impact on capacity, interference mitigation, power control and handoffs.
Different path loss sources (statistical, deterministic, real world) may be used by the simulator to
aid in defining the CDMA coverage area. Each path loss type has its benefits and disadvantages.
While Hata, Power Law and Micro Cell models do not consider terrain variation, they do allow for
simulation in areas where digitized terrain or overlay databases do not exist. Deterministic
propagation models incorporate terrain variation, antenna data, overlay (clutter) data, etc. in an
attempt to model actual installations. This predictive modeling can be performed for a large area.
Measured street data incorporates terrain variation and actual installed antennas, but is limited in
the area covered. A LogNormal fading overlay can also be included to account for the effects of
shadowing on the system being modeled.
Where CDMA subscriber units reside within a system will greatly affect total system capacity,
coverage and quality as well as the distribution of resources. Subscriber positioning may be
uniform, random or according to some form of distribution.
Incorporation of CDMA design parameters such as target FER, E
b
/N
o
, Voice Activity Factor, etc.
allows the CDMA call quality to be characterized.
Because of CDMA system complexity and the inter-dependence between coverage, capacity and
quality, it is only when these properties are considered together that a system representation with
a higher degree of accuracy can be developed.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.7 EIA/TIA Specifications and RF Air Interface Limitations
The CDMA RF Air Interface specifications defines the structure of the Forward and Reverse
Channel. These specifications place an upper limitation on the number of channels that can be
served by a CDMA frequency.
3.7.1 Forward Channel Structure
The following figure shows an example of the code channels transmitted by a base station. Out of
the 64 code channels available for use, the example depicts the Pilot Channel (always required),
one Sync channel, seven Paging Channels (the maximum allowed), and fifty-five Traffic Channels.
Figure 3-10: Example of Forward CDMA Channels
Code channels on the forward link are addressed by different Walsh Codes. Each of these code
channels is spread by the appropriate Pseudo-Noise Sequence at a fixed Chip Rate of 1.2288 Mega-
Chips per second. The uniqueness of the forward channel structure is the use of the Pilot Channel.
It is transmitted by each cell site and is used as a coherent carrier reference for demodulation by all
subscriber stations. The pilot signal is unmodulated and uses the zeroth Walsh Code which
consists of 64 zeros. Hence, the pilot simply contains the I and Q spreading code. The choice of
this code allows the subscriber to acquire the system faster. The Walsh Codes are generated with
a 64 x 64 Hadamard Matrix. Thus, the maximum number of code channels per carrier is 64 which
consists of a Pilot Channel, a Sync Channel, a maximum of 7 Paging Channels and a minimum of
55 Traffic Channels (TCH). In view of the channel structure, a 1.23 MHz CDMA carrier can
support up to 55 TCHs if the effect of interference is not considered. Another possible
configuration could replace Paging Channels and Sync Channels one for one with TCHs to obtain
a maximum of 63 TCHs, 1 Pilot Channel, 0 Paging Channel, and 0 Sync Channel. In practice, due
to the intense interference in the spectrum, a satisfactory quality of service in terms of voice quality
and FER is difficult to maintain if all 55 traffic channels are implemented in the system.
The SC
TM
CDMA equipment requires a carrier frequency, a pilot offset, and a Walsh Code to
encode/decode the channel. The BSS allocates a traffic channel in response to the Assignment
Request message from the MSC. BSS does not allocate traffic channels unless a request from the
MSC is acknowledged. The traffic channel will be allocated in the sector with which the call is
associated.
PILOT CH SYNC CH
PAGING
CH 1
PAGING
CH 7
TCH 1
TCH 55
WALSH 0 WALSH 32 WALSH 1 WALSH 63
CDMA FORWARD CHANNEL
1.23 MHz
Traffic Power Control
Data Sub-Channel

(ADDRESSED BY WALSH CODE)
up to
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The BSS maintains a pool of traffic channels and Walsh Codes in each sector for new call setups
and soft/softer handoffs. Traffic channel allocation for new originations and soft handoffs require
an assignment of a physical traffic channel and a Walsh Code. Softer handoff requires just the
assignment of a Walsh Code, no new traffic channel element has to be assigned. The assignment
of Walsh Codes and traffic channels is separated to allow the allocation process to adjust for the
different needs of soft and softer handoff. In order to reduce the risk of soft/softer handoff
assignment failure during the conversation, the BSS denies assignment of traffic channels and
Walsh Codes for new call setups if traffic channels or Walsh Codes are not available or being used
for soft/softer handoffs.
The number of traffic channels is defined by the In-Service Hardware in the BSS. It could be less
than the number configured if some of the hardware is out of service. The number of Walsh Codes
assigned to a sector is set to 64 which is the maximum specified by the EIA/TIA standard. Limiting
the number of Walsh Codes in a sector is a method of controlling service quality. Since Walsh
Codes are not associated with any hardware, they cannot go out of service. As a result, 64 is the
hard limit of the number of code channels per sector according to the protocol specifications.
3.7.2 Reverse Channel Structure
The Reverse CDMA Channel is composed of Access Channels and Reverse Traffic Channels.
These channels share the same CDMA frequency assignment. Each Traffic Channel is identified
by a distinct user long code sequence and each Access Channel is identified by a distinct Access
Channel long code sequence. The following figure shows as example of the signals received by a
base station on the Reverse CDMA Channel.
Figure 3-11: Example of Reverse CDMA Channels
The reverse link employs the same 32768 length binary short PN sequences which are used for the
forward link. However, unlike on the forward link, a fixed code phase offset is used. A long
(2
42
-1) PN sequence with a user-determined time offset is used to identify the subscriber
(analogous to ESN in AMPS). The sequence is then modulo-2 added with a 42 bit wide mask.
The subscriber unit convolutionally encodes the data transmitted on the Reverse Traffic Channel
and the Access Channel prior to interleaving. The transmitted digital information is convolutional
encoded using a rate 1/3 code of constraint length 9 for the Access Channel and Rate Set 1 of the
Reverse Traffic Channel. For Rate Set 2 of the Reverse Traffic channel, the convolutional code rate
ACCESS ACCESS
CH N
TCH 1
TCH M
CDMA REVERSE CHANNEL
1.23 MHz
CH 0
(ADDRESSED BY LONG PSEUDO-NOISE CODE)
(received at the base station)
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
is 1/2. The encoded information is then interleaved over a 20 ms interval. The interleaved
information is then grouped in code words which consist of 6 symbol groups each. These code
words are used to select one of the 64 orthogonal Walsh Codes for transmission. On the reverse
link, the Walsh Codes are used for information transmission. The reverse CDMA frequency
channel can support up to 62 TCHs per Paging channel and 32 Access Channels per Paging
Channel.
3.8 Handoffs
The TIA/EIA Interim Standard, Mobile Station - Base Station Compatibility Standard of Dual-
Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System (TIA/EIA/IS-95), states that a CDMA base
station shall support three types of handoff processes.
3.8.1 CDMA to CDMA Hard Handoff
A CDMA to CDMA hard handoff is a handoff in which the base station directs the mobile station
to transition between disjoint sets of base stations, different frequency assignments, or different
frame offsets.
3.8.2 CDMA to Analog Hard Handoff
A CDMA to Analog hard handoff is a handoff in which the base station directs the mobile station
from a Forward TCH to an analog voice channel.
3.8.3 Soft Handoff
A soft handoff is a handoff in which a new base station commences communications with the
subscriber station without interrupting the communications from the old base station. The base
station can direct the subscriber station to perform a soft handoff only when all Forward Traffic
Channels assigned to the subscriber station have identical frequency assignments. While soft
handoff is being performed, more than 1 TCH shall be assigned to the subscriber.
3.8.4 Softer Handoff
Subscribers in the overlapping region are power controlled by both sectors during softer-handoffs
and their signals are coherently combined. The threshold for activation of this procedure is a
system control parameter. Softer handoff mitigates both path loss differences due to different
shadowing and fades. In the activated region, both sector antennas are engaged and received along
opposite slopes of their patterns to help differentiate multipath components.
3.8.5 Overhead Erlang Capacity for Soft Handoff
The soft handoff factor is used to determine the overhead Erlangs to support different kinds of soft
handoffs. The factor is likely to vary from 1.3 to 2.0. It should be noted that the soft handoff factor
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
(SHOF) defined here is a linear scaling factor of the actual usable Erlangs but not the number of
traffic channels.
Soft Handoff Factor = 1*(1-a-b) + 2*a + 3*b [EQ 3-39]
where:
2-way soft Handoff fraction, a = Average two-way software handoff duration per
access/hold time
3-way soft Handoff fraction, b = Average three-way soft handoff duration per access /
hold time
3.9 Determining Number of Sites to Support Required Capacity
The following section presents a sample calculation for the Chicago Metropolitan Area. This
example is simplified to show the readers only the traffic calculations. Several other issues such
as cell coverage, AMPS and CDMA inter-system interference and antenna configurations have to
be taken into consideration for actual system design.
This example illustrates the case that the cellular operator decides to deploy a single carrier CDMA
system and allocate 1.8 MHz (including the guard band) out of the 12.5 MHz cellular band for
CDMA deployment. The system shall be designed to provide service to 40,000 new CDMA
subscribers. Prior to the design of the system, information concerning the propagation
environment and subscriber distribution has to be gathered for each particular service area.
3.9.1 Required Parameters for Initial System Design
Prior to the design of a CDMA system, the propagation parameters and the subscriber profile must
be available. This section is intended to give an overview of some important parameters and the
correct way to apply them to system design. A completed example follows.
3.9.1.1 Busy Hour Call Attempts and Completions
Busy hour is defined as the continuous one hour period in the day during which the highest average
traffic density is experienced by the system. Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCA) is the number of
call setup requests during the busy hour. Busy Hour Call Completion (BHCC) is the portion of the
requests which succeed in making it to the conversation state.
3.9.1.2 Average Holding Time
Holding time is defined as the average length of time an active user occupies a traffic channel.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.9.1.3 Erlangs per Subscriber
An Erlang is the traffic intensity of a traffic channel which is continuously occupied. Erlang per
subscriber is the product of BHCA per subscriber and the average holding time per access.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98

Figure 3-12: Subscriber Distribution of Chicago Metropolitan Area
CHICAGO
DOWNTOWN
NORTHWEST
SUBURBS
UPTOWN
AREA
WEST
SUBURBS
SOUTHWEST
SUBURBS
SOUTH
SUBURBS
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 3-4: Subscriber Distribution of Chicago Metropolitan Area
System Parameters:
Median (E
b
/I
o
) = 7 dB
Power Control standard deviation = 2.5 dB
Noise Rise Threshold (I
o
/N
o)
= 10
Assumptions:
1. Each mobiles required energy per bit-to-interference density ratio (E
b
/I
o
) is varied
according to propagation conditions to achieve the specified FER of 0.01
2. All the sectors support the same number of mobile stations.
3. The mobile stations are uniformly distributed over each sector.
4. There is no overflow from the CDMA network to the AMPS network
5. There are 40,000 subscribers distributed across the system as shown in Table 3-4 on
page 35.
6. The Average Hold time per Access is 65 seconds.
7. The path loss slope for the dense urban environment is 32.8 dB/decade (Based on the
measured data described in Section 3.4.2.2.1) with a shadowing standard deviation of
7.7 dB.
Area
Subscriber
Distribution
Environment
Classifications
BHCA per
subscriber
1 City core area 50% dense urban 1.40
2 Northwest Suburb 25% suburban 1.40
3 Uptown area 10% dense urban 1.38
4 West Suburb 8% suburban 1.30
5 Southwest Suburb 5% suburban 1.30
6 South Suburb 2% suburban 1.20
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
8. The path loss slope for the urban environment is 38.4 dB/decade (Based on the
measured data described in Section 3.4.2.2.1) with a shadowing standard deviation of 8
dB.
9. 40% of the subscribers will be in soft handoff between two or more sites.
10. The sectorization improvement going from a single sector to three sectors is 2.4 times.
From the Figure 3-6: Probability of Blocking vs Erlangs per CDMA Sector with Various Path Loss
Slope Values with Rate Set 1 Vocoder, Page 21, with fully loaded neighbor cells (worst case), the
maximum capacity for 2% probability of blocking is approximately 15 Erlangs per CDMA
sector for dense urban areas, and 17.8 Erlangs per CDMA sector for suburban areas.
These results in addition to following are approximations based on the curves and the assumptions
which went into generating the curves. Actual system designs will vary from system to system.
For Area 1,
Number of subscribers in the city core = 40,000*50% = 20,000
Required traffic capacity for this area
= BHCA/sub * # of Sub * Average Hold Time per Access(sec) / 3600
= 1.4 * 20,000 * 65 / 3600
= 505.56 Erlangs (0.0253 Erlang per sub)
Required traffic capacity including soft handoff
= Required traffic capacity * soft handoff factor
= 505.56 * 1.4
= 707.78 Erlangs
Required number of CDMA sectors
= 707.78 / 15 erlangs per CDMA omni site
= 48 CDMA sectors
Required number of CDMA sector cells
= 48 / 2.4 (2.4 is the sectorization gain)
= 20 cells
For Area 2,
Number of subscribers in the city core = 40,000*25% = 10,000
Required traffic capacity for this area
= BHCA/sub * # of Sub * Average Hold Time per Access(sec) / 3600
= 1.4 * 10,000 * 65 / 3600
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
= 252.78 Erlangs
Required traffic capacity including soft handoff
= Required traffic capacity * soft handoff factor
= 252.78 * 1.4
= 353.89 Erlangs
Required number of CDMA sectors
= 353.89 / 17.8 erlangs per CDMA omni site
= 20 CDMA sectors
Required Number of CDMA sector cells
= 20 / 2.4
= 9 cells
Using a sectorization gain of 2.45 for a three sector CDMA site, a total of 20 sector cells are
required for area 1. Propagation studies have to be performed to determine if the system is
coverage limited. If the number of sector cell sites required in this case for coverage is larger than
20 (the system is coverage limited), the system should be designed based on the number of cell
sites required for coverage. Propagation studies could be a detailed system wide simulation or a
simple link budget analysis based on certain well-known propagation model such as the Okumura
Model or the Hata Model (depending on the degree of accuracy required).
By the same method, the calculation of the other areas is summarized in following table:
Table 3-5: Chicago Metropolitan Area Summary
Area
BHCA
per
Sub
Subs.
%
Subs.
in
Region
(K)
Required
Traffic
(Erlangs)
SHO
Factor
(Erlangs)
Required
Traffic w/
SHO
(Erlangs)
Max.
Traffic
per
Sector
Required
Sector
Cells
1 1.40 50 20 505.56 1.4 707.78 15.0 20
2 1.40 25 10 252.78 1.4 353.89 17.8 9
3 1.38 10 4 99.67 1.4 139.53 15.0 4
4 1.30 8 3.2 75.11 1.4 105.16 17.8 3
5 1.30 5 2 46.94 1.4 65.72 17.8 2
6 1.20 2 0.8 17.33 1.4 24.27 17.8 1
Total 100 40 997.39 1396.35 39
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.10 Physical Traffic Channel Hardware Requirements
Once the required Erlangs per site is established, the equipment planner will need to determine the
amount of hardware that will be required to support this traffic. A description on the relationship
between Effective, Actual and Physical Traffic Channels will follow in order to aid the system en-
gineer in determining the amount of call processing hardware required at a CDMA cell site. The
following CDMA capacities and equipage apply for both 800 MHz and 1.9 GHz CDMA systems.
3.10.1 Traffic Channel Definitions
In analog systems, the traffic channels (or voice channels) are synonymous with the physical trans-
ceiver hardware. The nature of CDMA technology implies that the effective traffic carrying capac-
ity of a CDMA carrier varies in accordance with the interference density in the band and also
depends on various CDMA system parameters. From the hardware perspective, the physical trans-
ceivers are the same for all channel types meaning that the sync, paging and the traffic channels
are all supported by identical hardware. The transceiver elements could be used for handling in-
coming traffic, supporting soft handoff or configured as sync and paging channels.
Using the guidelines provided earlier in this section, an engineer/system planner is able to derive
the total number of cell sites needed to support the traffic capacity of a planned CDMA system and
estimate the total Erlangs supported by each cell. However, for the purpose of equipment planning,
it is desirable to convert the total Erlangs per cell to the number of transceiver elements required
to support the calls (Physical TCHs).
In order to convert Erlangs to Physical Traffic Channels (PTCH), the quantity of channels required
to handle subscriber traffic, soft handoff and overhead messaging must be known. Motorola cur-
rently defines these quantities under three principle traffic channel types.
3.10.1.1 Effective Traffic Channels (ETCH)
The Effective Traffic Channels (ETCH) are the quantity of channels required to support the prima-
ry traffic. The channel load associated with ETCH does not include the additional channel capacity
required for soft handoff or overhead messaging. Note that in general, one ETCH corresponds to a
single analog voice channel or one voice timeslot of a TDMA carrier. As soft handoff is not includ-
ed within the calculation for ETCH, the quantity of ETCHs can be considered the most relevant
comparison of capacity with analog systems where no make-before-break handoff exists. The
number of ETCHs are calculated by conversion from the total estimated Erlangs generated at a giv-
en Grade Of Service (GOS) using the standard Erlang conversion tables.
3.10.1.2 Actual Traffic Channels (ATCH)
The Actual Traffic Channels (ATCH) are the quantity of channels required for the primary traffic
plus those Erlangs to support soft handoff (SHO). SHO corresponds to additional Erlangs gener-
ated by the primary traffic not additional channels.
For example, if the Effective Erlangs generated for a sector was 11.5 (using Erlang B at 2% GOS
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
this converts to 18 ETCH), the conversion to ATCH assuming 35% SHO would be 11.5 x 0.35 =
4.025 + 11.5 = 15.52 Erlangs (using Erlang B at 2% GOS this converts to 24 ATCH).
3.10.1.3 Physical Traffic Channels (PTCH)
The Physical Traffic Channels (PTCH) are the total channels required for primary traffic, soft
handoff (ATCH) plus OverHead (OH) messaging. The OH messaging corresponds to the channels
required for paging and synchronization on the forward link and access on the reverse link. A total
of two OH channels are required per CDMA sector. Therefore, an Omni directional (single sector)
site requires 2 OH channels, while a three sector configuration requires 6 OH channels (2 per sec-
tor). Additional carriers within a sector may require more OH channels to be dedicated.
3.10.2 Erlangs to Equipment
The Motorola CDMA SC
TM
architecture utilizes Multi-Channel CDMA Controller boards
(MCCs) or Motorola Advanced Wideband Interface (MAWI) boards to process channels on a
CDMA carrier. These boards contain all of the circuitry necessary to process any CDMA channel
type except the pilot (i.e. sync/page/access/traffic). Each of the CDMA channels supported on the
card is referred to as a channel element. Each channel element contains the circuitry necessary to
support the CDMA modulation and demodulation function for any of the specified channels.
These cards have dynamic equipment sharing capability and are grouped together within the SC
TM
architecture for trunking efficiency to form a common pool. This means that all traffic within any
sector has complete access to all of the boards associated with the given CDMA carrier frequency.
Refer to the specific BTS SC
TM
document for each product particulars as to which type of board
the BTS product utilizes, how many channel elements are provided per board (for example, there
exist 8 or 24 channel MCC boards and 16 or 36 channel element MAWI boards) and the minimum
number of boards required at a site.
3.10.2.1 Example
The following example will demonstrate the method to follow to determine the amount of physical
hardware required to support the CDMA traffic. Note that the same methodology may be applied
to other equipment configurations and anticipated Erlang loads.
Assumptions:
The site consists of three sectors.
The required Erlangs to support the subscribers is 7 Erlangs per sector.
The additional Erlang requirement to support soft handoff is 45%.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Effective Traffic Channels
7 Erlangs per sector equates to 12 ETCH per sector at Erlang B 2% GOS
* 3 sectors per cell = 21 Erlangs (3 x 7) per Cell
Actual Traffic Channels
21 Erlangs * 45% Soft handoff (SHO) factor = 9.45 Erlangs SHO per Cell
21 Erlangs + 9.45 Erlangs = 30.45 total Erlangs per Cell
at Erlang B 2% GOS = 39 ATCH
Physical Traffic Channels
39 ATCH + 6 OH channels (2 per sector) = 45 PTCH
Channel Element Hardware Requirement
45 PTCH / (# Channel Elements per board) = # boards required
For example, six boards supporting 8 channel element per board would be required or only three
boards would be required if each board supported 16 channel elements.
In addition to supporting the traffic requirements, there may exist other requirements that need to
be satisfied for determining the number of boards at a site.
A minimum of one board may be required per CDMA sector.
An additional board may be required for redundancy.
The cage housing the board may not have enough slots. (This will be a rare occurrence.)
The following diagram shows the relationship between the three different channel definitions.
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 3-13: Example MCC Card Equipage
3.11 Conclusion
The capacity of a CDMA site and system is dependent upon many factors which can be unique
from one system to the next. Some of these factors are:
Propagation loss (path loss slope, log normal fading, antenna types)
Amount of delay spread in environment
Speed distribution of the subscriber
Environmental characteristics (noise, interference from other services, etc.)
Level of reliability
Quantity and placement of sites in addition to the amount of cell overlap
Vocoder Rate Set
Various formulas can be used, dependent upon the level of complexity and accuracy desired, to
estimate the capacity of a site. The more accurate calculations will require more time to perform
or many simulations executed to obtain results which are statistically and reasonably valid.
7 Erlangs
21
Erlangs
21
Erlangs
9.45
Erlangs
6 OH
9.45
Erlangs
36
39
45
Effective (ETCH)
Erlang B
Actual (ATCH)
30.45 Erlangs
Physical(PTCH)
45 PTCH/Cell
Channels
45%
SHO
at 2% GOS 39 ATCH/Cell
7 Erlangs
7 Erlangs
3
Version 2.1
12/18/98
3.12 References
1. William C. Y. Lee, "Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Systems", McGraw-Hill
Book Company, Second Edition 1995, figure 4.3, p. 110.
2. A. Viterbi & Viterbi, "Erlang Capacity of a Power_Controlled CDMA System", IEEE
Selected Areas in Communications, August 1993, pp. 892-900.
3. A. Viterbi, "CDMA Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication", Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, Copyright 1995.
4. R. Padovani, "Reverse Link Performance of IS-95 Based Cellular Systems", IEEE
Personal Communications Third Quarter 1994, page 28-34.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Section
PN Offset Planning and
Search Windows
4
4.1 Introduction
This chapter will discuss the PN Offset Planning. Section 4.3 provides insight into the sources and
consequences of offset interference. The definition of important terms and parameters are given.
Also, since a knowledge of search windows is considered fundamental, a detailed explanation of
this topic is included. Section 4.4 provides the theory that justifies placing certain boundaries on
the value of PILOT_INC, which is central to PN Offset Planning. Section 4.4.5 and Section 4.4.6
will prove very useful to the offset planner by providing a summary of the factors pertinent to
PILOT_INC selection along with a concise listing of all the planning guidelines. Section 4.4.7
provides guidelines for offset planning at an Inter-CBSC boundary when different PILOT_INC
values are involved. Some information has been provided that will benefit system optimizers. This
includes information on scanning rates (Sections 4.3.5 and 4.4.4) and implementing parameter
changes at the CBSC (Section 4.5). Finally, references are provided for further study of this
important topic.
4.2 Number of Pilot Offsets per CDMA Frequency
The Pilot Channel is a spread spectrum signal carrying no data which is always transmitted on a
downlink CDMA channel. The mobile stations use the pilot to acquire the system, and to assist in
several signal processing functions such as synchronization, demodulation (phase reference), soft
handoff and channel estimation. The uniqueness of the pilot is achieved through time shifts of a
basic sequence known as zero shift pilot or short PN sequence. Since sectors are distinguished by
time shifts of a given pseudo-noise sequence, enough separation between time offsets must be
provided to avoid mutual pilot interference. Per TIA/EIA IS-95 Interim Standard, the chosen
length for the pilot PN sequences is 32,768 chips (section 7.1.3.1.9) with a minimum separation of
64 chips (Section 7.1.3.2.1) between adjacent offsets. This leaves a maximum of 512 (32768/64)
distinct pilot offsets available for a CDMA frequency.
4.3 PN Offset Planning - General
4.3.1 Consequences and Sources of Offset Interference
The design of a PN offset plan for CDMA is comparable to that of a signalling channel frequency
plan in analog. The consequences of poor offset planning include the following:
Active Set Pilot Interference - This phenomenon would occur in the active area and
involve the active search window (SRCH_WIN_A). The interfering signal would need
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
to be strong enough to be processed as an active finger (except in the less likely case
where the timing was perfectly coincident with a true active finger).
Neighbor Set Pilot Falsing - A neighbor set pilot may falsely appear strong enough for
the mobile station (MS) to promote the pilot to the candidate set and recommend to the
base station (BS) to perform a soft handoff add via the Pilot Strength Measurement
Message (PSMM). This falsing would occur in the neighbor area and involve the neigh-
bor search window (SRCH_WIN_N). The falsing signal strength would need to meet
the T_ADD threshold criteria.
The probability for interference or falsing is dependent upon two factors: timing and
strength. Time differentials can be translated into geographic regions and have as their
threshold the search window size. A detailed discussion of this topic will be found later
within this chapter. If a signal falls outside of a search window, its energy becomes
nothing more than uncorrelated interference. Note that the term active area is meant to
refer to the area in which a signal may be (or is intended to be) actively demodulated. The
term neighbor area refers to the area in which a signal will be sought as a candidate. In
geographic terms, the neighbor area greatly expands the region where problems may
occur since we search for a neighbor signal in many areas outside of the active area. The
use of large or generous neighbor lists along with the technique of merging neighbor lists
when in soft/softer handoff creates further expansion. Mitigating this expansion of the
geographic space in which falsing may occur is the heightened signal strength threshold
at which interference may occur (a T_ADD of -14dB versus a finger-locking threshold of
approximately -24dB).
Incorrect BS Identification - A signal may travel far enough to be incorrectly identi-
fied by the BS when it translates the MS reported phase into a PILOT_PN offset index.
In this document, the phrases interference and falsing may be used interchangeably.
In analog systems, co and adjacent channel interference are major factors in the system design.
The co-channel interference was managed via the antenna configuration and the re-use pattern/
distance. The adjacent channel interference was managed through the application of a simple
frequency planning rule.
With the CDMA channel, all sites re-use the same frequency. Interference isolation on the forward
CDMA channel is obtained via short PN code offsets (inter-sector) and walsh codes (intra-sector).
The possible sources of interference/falsing include co and adjacent offsets.
Since CDMA pilots are distinguished through offsets of the same short PN code, adjacent channel
interference has its counterpart in CDMA when phase shifts occur caused by propagation delays.
Using phase for cell identification may therefore cause falsing problems as depicted in Figure 4-14.
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 4-14: PN Offset Planning
The phase delay used in the figure above need not be so exact to create problems. The falsing of
one signal need only fall within the search window of the mobile.
1

The valid set of offsets is limited to multiples of PILOT_INC. In Figure 4-15 below, a PILOT_INC
of 2 was chosen. Offset 4 is adjacent to and can interfere with 6 if it arrives ~2 offsets late which
implies that 4, the interfering signal, is traversing a significant distance. Conversely, offset 6 may
interfere with 4, but 6 would need to arrive ~2 offsets early which implies that the mobile station
(MS) is acting at a significant distance from the site using offset 4. If the PILOT_INC is chosen
carefully, there should be little concern with 2 interfering with 6 or 6 with 2.
Figure 4-15: Short PN Sequence w/PILOT_INC = 2
As with analog, a re-use distance must be maintained between sectors implementing the same PN
offset to avoid interference. Since the pilot signal is integral to the operation of a CDMA system,
careful PN offset planning should be performed to mitigate interference between offset re-users
and falsing between adjacent PN codes which result from phase delay.
4.3.2 PN Offset Planning - Parameters and Terms
There are various parameters and terms which come into play when discussing PN offsets and their
function in CDMA.
1. Note also how time, distance, and chips are all related. Refer to Converting Between Chips and Time or Distance on page 6.
PN 0
PN 1
t
0
= 102 sec
t
1
= 50 sec
Avoid ambiguity
which could result from phase delay.
t = t
0
- t
1
= 102 sec - 50 sec = 52 sec
PN 1 - PN 0 = 64 chips = 52 sec = 9.6 miles
Traversing the additional distance of 9.6 miles, the PN 0 signal has phase
shifted sufficiently so as to be received by the mobile with essentially the
same phase as PN 1.
2 4 6 8 10
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
System Time
All base station digital transmissions are referenced to a common CDMA system-wide time scale
that uses the Global Positioning System (GPS) time scale, which is traceable to and synchronous
with Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
2
Time Reference
The mobile station shall establish a time reference which is used to derive system time. This time
reference will be the earliest arriving multipath component being used for demodulation.
3
This
reflects the assumption that the mobile stations fix on system time is always skewed by delay
associated with the shortest active link.
PILOT_PN
The Pilot PN sequence offset (index), in units of 64 PN chips. It ranges from 0 to 511. Every
transmit sector will have an offset assigned to it. This parameter is set for each sector in the pilotpn
field of the DBCM Sector command, EDIT SECTOR SECGEN. The range is 0 to 511.
Active Set
The pilots associated with the Forward Traffic Channels assigned to the mobile station.
4
It is the
base station that assigns all active set pilots to mobile stations.
Candidate Set
The pilots that are not currently in the Active Set but have been received by the mobile station with
sufficient strength to indicate that the associated Forward Traffic Channels could be successfully
demodulated. As a property of the Mobile Assisted HandOff (MAHO), the mobile station
promotes a Neighbor Set or Remaining Set pilot to the Candidate Set when certain pilot strength
criteria are met and then recommends the pilot to the base station for inclusion in the Active Set.
Neighbor Set
The pilots that are not currently in the Active Set or the Candidate Set and are likely candidates for
handoff. Neighbor Set pilots are identified by the base station via Neighbor List and Neighbor List
Update messages.
Remaining Set
The set of all possible pilots in the current system on the current CDMA frequency assignment,
excluding pilots in the other sets. These pilots must be integer multiples of PILOT_INC (defined
2. EIA/TIA/IS-95-A, Mobile Station - Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System,
1.2.
3. Ibid., 6.1.5.1.
4. Ibid., 6.6.6.1.2.
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
below).
SRCH_WIN_N, SRCH_WIN_R
These parameters represent the search window sizes associated with Neighbor Set and Remaining
Set pilots.
5
The mobile station centers the search window for each pilot around the pilots PN
sequence offset using timing defined by the mobile stations time reference. These parameters are
set via srchwinn and srchwinr fields in the DBCM Sector command, EDIT SECTOR MAHO. The
range is 0 to 15 (defaults to 6).
In general, a neighbor search window, SRCH_WIN_N, will be sized so as to encompass the
geographic area in which the neighbor may be added (a soft handoff add zone or initial
detection area). The largest a neighbor search window need be is sufficient to cover the distance
between the neighbors, , plus an accommodation of the time-of-flight delay (approx. 3 chips).
SRCH_WIN_A
This parameter represents the search window size associated with the Active Set and Candidate Set
pilots.
6
The mobile station centers the search window for each pilot around the earliest arriving
usable multipath component of the pilot. Note that in contrast to the neighbor or remaining set
search windows, the active/candidate search windows "float" with the desired signals. That is to
say that the center position of the search window is updated every scan to track the new location
of the earliest arriving multipath component. This parameter is set via the srchwina field in the
DBCM Sector command, EDIT SECTOR MAHO. The range is 0 to 15 (defaults to 6).
To better illustrate the relationships between search windows, consider the following scenario:
A mobile station monitors a neighbor pilot. The neighbor search window is centered on the
neighbor pilot offset. This centering is relative based on timing derived from the time reference.
When the pilot strength of a neighbor pilot recommends promotion to the candidate set, then the
search window will be tightened to the active search window size. The active search window is
sized to compensate for delay spread only and is, therefore, smaller than the neighbor search
window. In addition, the active search window locks onto and tracks the candidate pilot.
PILOT_ARRIVAL
The pilot arrival time is the time of occurrence of the earliest arriving usable multipath component
of a pilot relative to the mobile stations time reference.
7
PILOT_PN_PHASE
The mobile station reports pilot strength and phase measurements for each active and candidate
pilot in the Pilot Strength Measurement Message when recommending a change in the handoff
5. Ibid., 6.6.6.2.1.
6. Ibid.
7. Ibid., 6.6.6.2.4.
3R
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
status (i.e. mobile assisted handoff). The mobile station computes the reported
PILOT_PN_PHASE as a function of the PILOT_ARRIVAL and the PILOT_PN.
8
The pilot arrival
component represents the time delay of the pilot relative to the time reference or, in other words,
how skewed the pilot is from the mobiles concept of system time. Both the PILOT_ARRIVAL
and PILOT_PN_PHASE measurements are in chips (15 bits, 0 to 32,767 or 2
15
-1) while the
PILOT_PN is in offsets (9 bits, 0 to 511). The difference (6 bits) corresponds to the 64 chip interval
between successive PN offsets.
Note also that the mobile does not identify pilots by their offset index directly, but by their phase
measurement. If the pilot arrival was larger than 32 chips (1/2 of a pilot offset or 4.8 miles), then
this could undermine the ability of the base station to properly translate pilot phase into pilot offset
index (given a PILOT_INC of 1).
PILOT_INC
The pilot PN sequence offset index increment is the interval between pilots, in increments of 64
chips. Its valid range is from 1 to 15. The mobile station uses this parameter in only one manner,
to determine which pilots to scan from among the Remaining set. Only valid pilots (i.e. those pilots
that are multiples of PILOT_INC) will be scanned. For the mobile station, PILOT_INC impacts
only the scanning rate applied to Remaining pilots. It accomplishes this by reducing the number
of Remaining pilots that need to be scanned.
For the base station, its effect is different. In the base station, it is used in properly translating pilot
phase back into pilot offset index. The consequence is that the operator may artificially increase
the separation between valid time offsets. By selecting a PILOT_INC of 2, for instance, an
operator chooses to limit the number of valid offsets to 256 (i.e. 0, 2, 4,..., 508, 510) instead of 512.
The increased separation means that the pilot arrival must be larger before adjacent offset
ambiguity is possible and consequently the likelihood of a strong adjacent interferer is reduced.
4.3.3 Converting Between Chips and Time or Distance
Chips are related to time by the following relationship:
[EQ 4-40]
Chips are related to distance by the following relationship:
[EQ 4-41]
Or, in kilometers:
[EQ 4-42]
8. Ibid.
Time (us)
Chips
1.2288 Mcps
------------------------------- Chips 0.8138 us/chip = =
Distance (miles) Chips 0.8138 us/chip 186,000 miles/1,000,000 us Chips 0.1514 miles/chip = =
Distance (km) Chips 0.8138 us/chip 299,311 km 1,000,000 us Chips 0.244 km/chip = =
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Note that the chip rate (1.2288 Mcps) and the speed of light (186,000 miles/sec) are fundamental
to these conversions.
4.3.4 Search Windows and Geography
Before discussing offset planning in any detail, it will benefit the reader to appreciate search
windows and their spatial relationships to cell sites and mobile stations. Base Stations, by virtue
of their GPS tracking, have an exact concept of system time. This, in turn, means that signals
leaving these sites have precise offsets and identities. On the other hand, Mobile Stations (MSs)
derive their timing from a time reference. Their concept of system time is skewed late by the time-
of-flight delay associated with this time reference signal. The greater the distance between the MS
and the time reference site, the greater the skewing.
Consider the diagram below:
Figure 4-16: MS Location Relative to Search Window
Let MS A, Site 1 and Site 2 be co-linear with MS A positioned exactly between Sites 1 and 2 with
Site 1 active. The MSs concept of system time is skewed from real system time by X, the distance
between it and its time reference. When the MS searches for a neighbor, it will center the search
window on the offset associated with the neighbor, but based on its own system time (which, of
course, is a little late compared with real system time). Assuming Site 2 to be a neighbor of
interest, its signal traverses a distance to MS A that is exactly as late as the MSs time reference.
Under these circumstances, the time differential between the two signals is zero (i.e. X-X = 0) and
the signal from Site 2 will fall directly in the center of the neighbor search window in which the
MS is searching for Site 2.
Now, let us consider MSs B and B. MS B is located 1 chip closer to Site 1 with Site 1 active;
therefore, MS Bs system time is skewed by only X-1. The signal from Site 2 traverses X+1 and
the time differential between the two signals is (X-1) - (X+1) = -2; consequently, the signal from
Site 2 is arriving 2 chips late and will appear 2 chips off center in the neighbor search window.
Please note that a 1 chip shift in spatial location has had a 2 chip impact on the location within
the search window. Conversely, MS B has timing skewed by X+1 while Site 2s signal traverses
only X-1 chips, leading to a time differential of (X+1) - (X-1) or 2 chips. Site 2s signal is arriving
early by 2 chips. To design a search window large enough to encompass locations B and B, we
would need a search window at least 4 chips or +/- 2 chips wide.
The worst case time differential is when the MS is located directly adjacent to one site while trying
A
B
C
2 1
B
D = distance between Site 1 and Site 2
X = D/2
1 chip
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
to detect or demodulate the signal from the other site. For example, MS C effectively has timing
that is coincident with system time (i.e. its skewing is 0). Site 2s signal is arriving D chips late.
For this signal to fall into the search window, it must be sized +/- D chips or 2D chips wide. Since
this is the worst case scenario, we should appreciate the following: if a search window is sized large
enough to compensate for the distance between the two sites (i.e. 2D), then there is no location
where a MS would have one site as its time reference and not see the other site in its search window.
Here is a more generalized depiction of search windows in space:
Figure 4-17: Search Windows in Space
The two sites are located at (0,0) and (10,0) and are 10 units apart. The curves represent constant
time differentials between the two sites and will correspond to the edges of certain search window
sizes. Search windows will be centered on the perpendicular line half-way between the sites. The
width of the search window in space will correspond to half of the search window size in chips.
For example, the two lines corresponding to time differentials of -4 and +4 demarcate an area that
corresponds to a search window that is +/- 4 units or 8 units in width. In geographic space, the
width of the area on the line between the two sites will only be 4 units wide or 1/2 of the search
window size. Between the curves, a MS tied to one site will see the other site fall within its search
window. Conversely, no matter how strong a neighbor signal may be, if the MS is located outside
of the search window area, it will not detect the signal.
Note how the curves bend as the search window is enlarged. When the search window is made
large enough to compensate for the distance between the two sites, the curves collapse upon
themselves indicating that there is no longer any region in space where the signal will not fall
within the search window. In general, a generous attitude toward search window sizing should
Diff = -8
Diff = -6
Diff = -4
Diff = -2 Diff = 2 Diff = 6
Diff = 4
Diff = 8
Diff = -10 Diff = 10
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
exist. The ability to demodulate a signal depends on being able to see it. The table below correlates
distance between neighbors to search window sizes:
The SrchWin sizes come from their definition in IS-95A/J-STD-8. The equation correlating
Window Size (in chips) to distance between neighbors (in miles) is:
[EQ 4-43]
The two chips removed from the Window Size compensate for time-of-flight (i.e. real world)
delays. If you were starting with a distance between sites and calculating a window size, you would
add two chips.
This discussion on search windows was designed to help the system engineer visualize the spatial
relationship of search windows to cell sites. An individual out in the field can estimate how large
a search window would need to be for a particular location by estimating the time differential
between the two sites of interest (use the absolute value only), adding 1 chip (to compensate for
time-of-flight delays), and multiplying by 2.
4.3.5 Search Windows and Scan Intervals
The following information is provided to give insight to system optimizers and is based on
Motorolas general understanding of subscriber vendor pilot scan algorithms. The reader should
note that such algorithms are not specified through IS-95-A/J-STD-008 and are, therefore,
manufacturer specific. Also, pilot scanning rates/intervals are a function of many variables.
In general, active and candidate pilots are scanned at a rate of 50 times/second or better. This
would be valid for up to a total of 6 pilots and is not impacted by the number of neighbors or
remaining set pilots.
Neighbor set pilots are scanned anywhere between 2 to 40 times/second with a common range
being 4 to 15 times a second. The rate is dependent on the number of actives/candidates and
neighbors.
Remaining set pilots are scanned on the order of seconds. The remaining set pilots will be scanned
Table 4-6: Search Window Size vs. Neighbor Separation
SrchWin 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Window Size (chips) 4 6 8 10 14 20 28 40
Delay (s) 1.6 3.3 4.9 6.5 9.8 14.6 21.2 30.9
Neighbor Separation (mi) 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.9 1.4 2.0 2.9
SrchWin 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Window Size (chips) 60 80 100 130 160 226 320 452
Delay (s) 47.2 63.5 79.8 104.2 128.6 182.3 258.8 366.2
Neighbor Separation (mi) 4.4 5.9 7.5 9.7 12.0 17.0 24.2 34.2
distance
Window Size 2 ( )
2
---------------------------------------------- 0.1516 =
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
N
R
times slower than the neighbors (where N
R
represents the number of remaining set pilots, a
function of PILOT_INC).
4.4 PN Offset Planning - Solutions
Current concepts for PN offset planning generally center on finding an appropriate value for
PILOT_INC. A large value would provide good protection against adjacent offset interference
since the pilot needs to travel a greater distance before potentially falsing (since signal attenuation
is highly correlated with propagation distance). But, too large a value implies too few valid PN
offsets and too small a re-use distance, thereby increasing the likelihood of co-offset interference.
Conversely, a small value of PILOT_INC delivers a large set of valid PN offsets, a large re-use
pattern and re-use distance, thereby reducing the likelihood of any co-offset interference. But, too
small a value will not provide good isolation against adjacent offset interference or ambiguity.
Prior to discussing in detail the planning limits for PILOT_INC, it is important to note the
following concerning R, the radius of the cell site. CDMAs use of soft handoff makes the radius
of the active area significantly larger than that to which we were accustomed with analog and
which is associated with a hexagonal grid. Speaking of the radius of a site conveys significant
information since both re-use distance, D, and cluster size, N, are related as follows:
[EQ 4-44]
But, with CDMA and soft handoff there is significantly greater overlap between sites. If we were
to label the hex/analog oriented radius as R
hex
and the CDMA active area radius as R
cdma
, then we
would need to understand that R
cdma
can easily be twice as large as R
hex
, perhaps slightly larger.
Many discussions of offset planning have failed to characterize this difference and consequently
lead the readers to draw faulty conclusions. Specifically, consider a recommendation that suggests
that 5R is sufficient separation for reusing sites. If the R is taken to be R
hex
, then D/R would be 5
and the cluster size would be 9. But, if it is understood that R is R
cdma
, then D/R would be more
on the order of 10 and the cluster size would be 36 ... a significant difference! Generally, within
this discussion, the context will be sufficient to distinguish between the two, but we attempt to
clearly distinguish whenever any ambiguity is present and we will always determine the cluster
size appropriately.
4.4.1 Mitigating Adjacent Offset Interference - General
The following explanations, which define the limits of adjacent offset interference based on timing
and signal strength considerations, are not impacted by antenna configuration (whether the sites
are omni, 3-sector, or 6-sector). This attribute simplifies the discussion.
4.4.1.1 Adjacent Offset Interference Protection Based on Timing
For an adjacent offset to have the potential of falsing, it must meet a timing criteria. That is to say
that it must fall into the search window. This is depicted below:
D
R
---- 3 N =
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 4-18: Min. Distance for Adjacent Offset Interference
A signal from a potential adjacent interferer must traverse a minimum distance to be able to fall
into the search window of the adjacent offset.
[EQ 4-45]
In this equation, S is 1/2 of the search window size. For a PILOT_INC = 3 and SRCH_WIN_N =
+/- 30 chips, this minimum distance corresponds to 3 x 64 - 30 = 162 chips = 39.5 km = 24.6 miles.
A larger PILOT_INC provides greater isolation; conversely, larger SRCH_WIN_N values mitigate
the isolation.
Of course, the value of 60 chips for SRCH_WIN_N is a recommended starting value and will take
on larger or smaller values. Since SRCH_WIN_A is always smaller than SRCH_WIN_N, an
adjacent offset interferer must always travel a greater distance to potentially interfere in the active
search window.
Table 4-7: Distance/Timing Restriction on Adjacent Interference
(assuming SRCH_WIN_N = +/- 30 chips)
a
a. For ease of performing mental math, note that each offset of 64 chips contributes a little
less than ~10 miles (9.7) or a little more than ~15 km (15.6). The 30 chip search window
accounts for a 7.3 km or 4.5 mi reduction.
PILOT_IN
C (offsets)
PILOT_IN
C (chips)
Minimum
Distance
(chips)
Minimum
Distance
(km)
Minimum
Distance
(miles)
1 64 34 8.3 5.2
2 128 98 23.9 14.9
3 192 162 39.5 24.6
4 256 226 55.1 34.3
5 320 290 70.8 44.0
6 384 354 86.4 53.7
3 6
PILOT_INC
SRCH_WIN_X = +/- S
Minimum Distance PILOT_INC S =
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Due to this timing requirement, a general rule can be established concerning placement of an
adjacent offset and its neighbors. They should be located under the PILOT_INC - S (Equation 4-
45) umbrella within the cluster. To the degree that this criteria is met, it eliminates the potential
for adjacent interference within the cluster. The limit of this example is to place adjacents with
sectors that are co-located. Under these conditions, there is no time differential between
signals leaving the site and only distant reflections can possibly achieve the time constraints
of interference, which is highly unlikely.
4.4.1.2 Adjacent Offset Interference Protection Based on Signal Strength
Let us expand the timing discussion by taking into account signal strength considerations. Here
we identify the lower bound on PILOT_INC which correlates to an acceptable C/I threshold.
Consider this equation which seeks to guarantee a bounded interference between correlated pilots,
effectively yielding the PILOT_INC.
9
[EQ 4-46]
In this equation, R is the radius of the cell in chips, S is 1/2 of the search window size, a is the
desired C/I in dB, and law represents the propagation exponent. The result, m, represents the
required offset, in chips, between any two pilots so that the desired C/I can be achieved. The
relationship can be interpreted as recommending that for each chip of R, there should be k chips of
separation for an adjacent offset so that a minimum C/I threshold is achieved. In this equation, the
presence of S reflects the fact that the correlation need not be perfect for interference to exist. The
adjacent signal need only fall into the search window (a less stringent timing criteria).
10
Note also
that Equation 4-45 and Equation 4-46 are identical in form. Equation 4-46 is stating that at a
distance of PILOT_INC - S (or m - S), the C/I threshold will be achieved. The following table
shows a few different examples of the calculation:
9. Qualcomm, The CDMA Network Engineering Handbook , March 1, 1993, 9.4.2.
10. An earlier, more conservative version of this relationship had S also scaled by k.
Table 4-8: Pilot Sequence Offset Index Assignment
(assuming a = 18.0 dB, law = 3.0, k = 2.98)
R
(km)
R
(miles)
R
(chips)
S
(chips)
m
(chips)
PILOT_INC
(offsets)
Number
of Valid
Offsets
Cluster
Size
(3-sector)
24.9 15.5 102 80 384 6 85 28
20.9 13.0 85.5 65 320 5 102 34
16.9 10.5 69.1 50 256 4 128 42
12.4 7.7 51.0 40 192 3 170 57
m 10
a law 10 ( )
1 ( ) R S + k R S + =
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
A conservative propagation exponent was chosen to compensate for the simplicity of the approach
(for example, the assumption of uniform power at both sites). The C/I threshold was set at 18.0 dB
to correspond to a 12 dB C/I threshold (6 dB fade margin, 90% area reliability w/8dB deviation)
for a 2 cell system. This 12 dB imbalance seems sufficient to predict that the searcher will not
select the interfering energy within the active window. Under unloaded conditions (worst case),
this threshold corresponds to an interferer Ec/Io of -14.9 dB which is below the normal range for
TADD; therefore, neighbor window falsing is unlikely. Additionally, to generate the table values,
neighbor search window sizes, which vary with cell radius, were used.
Although these table values seem fairly generous, there is one element mitigating the results. An
appropriate value for R must take into account two factors. First, the R is R
cdma
. Additionally,
since path loss is not isotropic and systems are not ideally laid out on grids (i.e. are non-uniform)
the selection of R should reflect a limiting case. Since a system-wide value of PILOT_INC is being
determined, the value of R should more closely represent the 90th percentile rather than the mean.
The radius of highway sites and other larger radius sites that are not clustered need not dominate
the analysis since spatial separation may be used to mitigate interference in those cases.
4.4.2 Protection Against Co-Offset Interference
The following explanations, which define the limits of co-offset interference based on timing and
signal strength considerations are impacted by both the antenna configuration (i.e. omni or sector)
and whether the MS is in the active area or in the larger neighbor area. As such, they will need to
be more extensive.
4.4.2.1 Co-Offset Interference Protection Based on Timing
Let us begin the study of co-offset interference by looking at the timing considerations involved in
interfering within the active search window. Consider the following diagrams:
8.0 5.0 32.9 30 128 2 256 85
4.1 2.5 16.8 14 64 1 512 170
Table 4-8: Pilot Sequence Offset Index Assignment
(assuming a = 18.0 dB, law = 3.0, k = 2.98)
R
(km)
R
(miles)
R
(chips)
S
(chips)
m
(chips)
PILOT_INC
(offsets)
Number
of Valid
Offsets
Cluster
Size
(3-sector)
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 4-19: Active Window Interference Timing Criteria
It has been stated elsewhere
11
that if two offset re-users where positioned 2R + S away from each
other (where S is 1/2 of the search window size), then the potential for co-offset interference is
avoided due to the timing criteria not being met. From the discussion on search windows in
Search Windows and Geography on page 7, it can be seen that if two sites met this criteria for
separation, then the search window would spatially fall completely outside of R. For the sectorized
case, the requirement was modified to R+S.
While meeting this criteria is sufficient to protect against interference within the active search
window, it does not protect us against falsing within the neighbor search window. From a timing
perspective, neighbor falsing will be limiting. Consider the following diagrams:
Figure 4-20: Neighbor Window Interference Timing Criteria
Here are some guidelines used in generating these approximations:
There can be no common neighbors among re-users. Stated otherwise, no sector may
share an offset assignment with one of its neighbors nor may any of its neighbors share
the same offset assignment.
The distance 2R + S
Active
is sufficient to define non-neighbors.
11. Qualcomm, The CDMA Network Engineering Handbook, March 1, 1993, 9.4.2.
A
B
S
Active
R
R
OMNI
SECTOR
A
B
S
Active
R
A
B
C
S
Active
R
R
R
R
S
Neighbor
OMNI
N
e
i
g
h
b
o
r
A
r
e
a

R
a
d
i
u
s
A
B
S
Active
R
R
S
Active
SECTOR
N
e
i
g
h
b
o
r
A
r
e
a

R
a
d
i
u
s
R
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
As Neighbor Area is limited to 3R + S
Active
for omni and 2R + S
Active
for sector.
For omni systems, B must be separated by S
Neighbor
from As Neighbor Area to avoid
neighbor falsing.
For sector systems, B possesses back-side neighbors (i.e. the co-located sectors) which
must be separated by S
Active
from As Neighbor Area to avoid sharing common
neighbors.
The conclusions from this exercise are summarized in the following table:
The analysis above, though simple, can help establish a safe margin easily. A somewhat more
detailed analysis below may help determine an absolute minimum re-use distance based on timing.
Figure 4-21: Active and Neighbor Areas
To help us visualize the true requirements of the situation, consider Figure 4-21. The sector
labelled with 0 represents the sector of interest. The active area for this sector is depicted in yellow.
Depicted in blue is all of the active area pertaining to the top 10 neighbors. (As with search window
sizing, we also recommend being generous with neighbor lists.) Keep in mind that the blue area
Table 4-9: Estimates of Re-Use Distance and Cluster Size Based on Timing
(assuming R
cdma
= 2R
hex
, S
Neighbor
2R
hex
and S
Active
1R
hex
)
Antenna Configuration Re-Use Distance Equation Re-Use Distance Cluster Size
Omni 4R
cdma
+ S
Active
+ S
Neighbor
11R
hex
43
Sector 3R
cdma
+ 2 x S
Active
8R
hex
~21
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2 2
2
2
Sector 0
Top 10 Neighbors
11 - 16 Neighbors
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
represents the neighbor area to which we have been referring. That is to say, areas where a MS
might be looking for the offset of sector 0 even though it is well outside of the area where sector 0
is actively demodulated. By this means alone, one can see that the neighbor area represents an
expansion of greater than 300% over the active area. If one were to include as neighbors the next
six most significant neighbors (sectors labelled 2 in cyan), one can see the neighbor area expand
even further. Note how both the front and back of this sector have neighbor search areas. The front
is more pronounced while the back is affected mostly by the co-located sectors. (These neighbor
relationships and MS locations are based on soft handoff relationships identified through CDMA
static simulations for an ideal grid and uniform distribution.)
Estimates based on this perspective will prove more optimistic than those derived earlier since they
account for the overlapping of cells and they better estimate the true neighbor area size.
Note: To take advantage of sectorization, the planner must re-use offsets with the same orientation.
4.4.3 Incorrect Identification of an Offset by the Base Station
The CBSC (i.e. the XC subsystem) translates phase measurements to offsets by pooling them to
the nearest valid offset based on its knowledge of PILOT_INC. For correct identification, this
process assumes that the PILOT_ARRIVAL component of the phase measurement never exceeds
1/2 of PILOT_INC. As a check on the selection of PILOT_INC, planners should ask whether or
not locations exist within the system where MSs may be active with a site at a distance greater than
1/2 of PILOT_INC. [Note: the process by which phase measurements are translated to offset
Calculation of Re-Use Distance
(Assuming S
Neighbor
2R, S
Active
1R and Active Area Radius (A) 2.2R)
Front
(F)
Back
(B)
Re-Use
Equation
a
a. The re-use equation is based on spatial relationships depicted in Figure 4-20. The Front range corresponds
to the Neighbor Area Radius.
Re-Use
Distance
Cluster
Size
Top 10 Neighbors - Sector 3.1 R 2.2 R
F + S
Active
+ B
b
b. Under these conditions, the back-side requirement for 2A + S
Neighbor
6.4R would become limiting.
6.3 R 13
Expanded Neighbor List - Sector 4.3 R 2.2 R F + S
Active
+ B 7.5 R 19
1 Tier - Omni 2.7 R - F + S
Neighbor
+ A 6.9 R 16
2 Tier - Omni 4.4 R - F + S
Neighbor
+ A 8.6 R 25
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
indices is not specified by IS-95-A/J-STD-008.]
Now, compare the relationship between SRCH_WIN_N and PILOT_INC. It is a rule that
SRCH_WIN_N (and SRCH_WIN_R) never exceed PILOT_INC. The consequences of doing so
are that the two adjacent windows would overlap. The BS may incorrectly identify the offset and
the MS may report multiple signals where only one is present. This guideline, easy to express and
understand, is frequently the truly limiting factor on the lower bound for PILOT_INC (and
conversely, the upper bound on cluster size). When situations arise where an area of the system
requires very large search windows, so as to permit soft handoff between distant neighbors (across
water or mountains with large time differentials), the PILOT_INC (a global parameter) must be re-
sized large enough to accommodate the search window.
4.4.4 PILOT_INC and the Scan Rate of Remaining Set Pilots
The following information is provided to give insight to system optimizers and is based on
Motorolas general understanding of subscriber vendor pilot scan algorithms. The reader should
note that such algorithms are not specified through IS-95-A/J-STD-008 and are, therefore,
manufacturer specific.
As was noted in the definition of PILOT_INC, according to IS-95-A/J-STD-008, the only impact
of PILOT_INC on the MS is to influence the scanning rate of remaining set pilots. Please note that
for optimum system performance, the scanning rate of remaining set pilots is not considered a
dominant factor in determining the size of PILOT_INC. Remaining set pilots are at a distinct
disadvantage over neighbor set pilots due to the scanning prioritization of pilot sets. For example,
all active and candidate set pilots are scanned between scans of individual neighbor or remaining
set pilots. All neighbor set pilots are scanned between scans of individual remaining set pilots. The
scanning order is represented as follows for 3 active set pilots and 1 candidate set pilot [please
remember that the actual scanning order is mobile manufacturer specific]:
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
N
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
N
2
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
N
3
...
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
N
N
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
R
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
N
1
...
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
N
N
A
1
A
2
A
3
C
1
R
N
Begin again from the top.
A remaining set pilot is scanned N times slower than a neighbor set pilot where N is the number of
remaining set pilots. In addition to their low scanning priority, IS-98 specifies no performance
0 3 6 9 12
PILOT_INC = 3 = spacing between valid offsets
0 3 6 9 12
pilot phase reported by MS in PSMM
SRCH_WIN_N
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
criteria for remaining set pilots.
Any remaining set pilot that appears strong enough (and long enough) to recommend promotion to
the active set needs to be analyzed as part of the optimization process. Perhaps, it should be added
to the neighbor list (or have its coverage adjusted). Feedback on these events can be derived from
callproc logs in the pre-commercial phase and Call Detail Logs (CDLs) in the commercial phase.
Note: Since remaining set pilots are prioritized low and, currently, Motorola does not honor
requests to enter into soft handoff with a remaining set pilot, some operators have considered
reducing SRCH_WIN_R to a minimum (i.e. 4 chips) and trading off the remaining set scan time
for improved scan time on actives, candidates and neighbors. This is not recommended. The most
significant reason is that the remaining set search window provides a means by which truncated
neighbors can be recognized by the system. When in soft/softer handoff, a merging of neighbor
lists take place. If the merge yields more than 20 neighbors, the MS limit of 20 neighbors requires
that we truncate the list to only higher prioritized neighbors. Although these neighbors may not be
identified to the MS as neighbors, they nevertheless may be detected through a remaining set scan.
The system will recognize and honor these remaining set pilot requests. A secondary motivation
for permitting the windows to stay open is that they provide a means for optimizing neighbors
lists by recognizing those sites which should be neighbors, but are not on the neighbor list. On the
other hand, the improvement in the scan interval will only be modest on average (~6%).
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
4.4.5 Summary
To summarize the key guidelines for sectorized systems on sizing PILOT_INC:
1. Minimum cluster size is 19 for 3-sector or 6-sector systems. Refer to Section 4.4.2 for
details.
2. Maximum PILOT_INC is 8 for 3-sector and 4 for 6-sector. This correlates to the
minimum cluster size.
3. For Suburban environments at 1.9 GHz, minimum PILOT_INC is 3 (based on a
minimum C/I threshold of 18.5 dB and unloaded carriers). This will serve the Urban/
Dense Urban areas as well.
Note: Due to the approximate 9 dB difference between pathloss at 1.9 GHz and 800 MHz,
PCS systems have smaller sites and consequently lower minimum PILOT_INC values.
PILOT_INC
Comments
8 6 4 3 2 1
Cluster Size (3-sector) 19 25 37 52 76 148 co-offset
D/R (3-sector) 7.5 8.7 10.5 12.5 15.1 21.1 co-offset
Extra Sites (3-sector) 2 3 5 4 8 20 insurance
Cluster Size (6-sector) 9 13 19 25 37 76 co-offset
D/R (6-sector) 5.2 6.2 7.5 8.7 10.5 15.1 co-offset
Extra Sites (6-sector) 1 1 2 3 5 8 insurance
C/I (5km/10km)
a
a. Refer to Section 4.4.1.2.
40.3/
31.9
36.6/
28.3
31.3/
23.4
27.8/
20.2
20.4/
15.9
16.1/
10.4
adjacent offset -
PCS
C/I (8km/16km) 34.5/
26.4
30.9/
23.0
25.9/
18.5
22.5/
15.6
18.0/
11.9
12.1/
7.4
adjacent offset - 800
S (chips) 80 65 50 40 30 14 varies w/cell radius
PILOT_INC - S
(chips)
432 319 206 152 98 50 adjacent offset
PILOT_INC - S (km) 105.4 77.8 50.2 37.1 23.9 12.2 adjacent offset
PILOT_INC (chips) 512 384 256 192 128 64 compare w/
SRCH_WIN_N
PILOT_INC/2 (chips) 256 192 128 96 64 32 Neighbor Proximity
Check?
PILOT_INC/2 (km) 62.5 46.8 31.2 23.4 15.6 7.8 Neighbor Proximity
Check?
C/I 30 m S ( ) R 1 + ( ) log =
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
4. For Suburban environments at 800 MHz, minimum PILOT_INC is 4 (based on a
minimum C/I threshold of 18.5 dB and unloaded carriers). This will serve the Urban/
Dense Urban areas as well.
5. PILOT_INC must be larger than the Neighbor and Remaining Set search windows,
SRCH_WIN_N and SRCH_WIN_R. All timing differentials must be less than
PILOT_INC/2. Carefully review the system design for any neighbors that are separated
by more than PILOT_INC/2 since potentially these neighbors can generate sufficiently
large timing differentials to cause translation errors (i.e. Neighbor Proximity Check).
Refer to Section 4.4.3 for details.
6. To eliminate the potential for adjacent interference within a cluster, an adjacent offset
and its neighbors should be separated from the potential interferee by a distance no
greater than PILOT_INC - S. The distance PILOT_INC/2 is a safer limit (since S is a
variable with an upper limit of PILOT_INC/2). This criteria can best be met by either
co-locating the adjacent offsets within the same site or by assigning them to 1st tier
neighbors. Refer to Section 4.4.1.1 for details.
7. If your system truly is characterized by Urban/Dense Urban environments, then smaller
PILOT_INC values may be justified. Or, if an entire CBSC is characterized by smaller
radii, then that CBSC may have its PILOT_INC set lower.
8. Small sized trials are very easy to plan for. You may use the largest PILOT_INC which
will not require your trial to have any re-use whatever. Under these conditions, co-offset
interference is non-existent and adjacent interference protection is maximized. If you
select the PILOT_INC to be a multiple of that to which you will ultimately migrate,
then implementing changes in PILOT_INC later will not force you to change sector
level PN offset assignments.
9. Multiple carriers in a sector are all assigned the same PN offset.
10. The implementation of CDMA at 1.9 GHz is, generally, not tied to an already existing
analog base with its locations and antennas where significant cell splitting has taken
place. The site grid should be flatter than the mature analog counterpart. This should
lend itself to a simpler repeat pattern implementation.
11. From a practical perspective, it should be understood that the majority of Motorola
systems that are commercial use a PILOT_INC in the range of 2 to 4. The systems using
a PILOT_INC of 2 can be characterized as possessing small radius sites. The systems
employing a PILOT_INC of 4 can be characterized as possessing some areas of
extensive propagation (water, mountains) that have required resizing SRCH_WIN_N,
and consequently PILOT_INC, larger.
4.4.6 Guidelines for Assigning Offsets
It has already been explained that there should be a goal for locating adjacent offsets close to each
other. In the figure below, the Adjacent Sectors configuration shows co-located sectors containing
adjacent offsets. This represents the absolute limit on how close adjacent offsets can be located.
Under these conditions, two-thirds of all adjacent assignments (for 3 sector sites) will have reduced
the time differential to zero. For the remaining third, we locate the adjacent offset in an adjacent
site. This approach also has the benefit of easy recognition of co-located sectors during system
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
optimization.
Previously, this has been the only recommendation. There is now an alternative recommendation,
Adjacent Sites, which locates all adjacent offset assignments within adjacent sites (and not within
adjacent sectors of the same site). The Adjacent Sites approach has Offset Groupings associated
with it that are found in Table 4-10 and Table 4-11. Although this represents a slight compromise
with respect to the timing margin of the Adjacent Sectors configuration, there are several
characteristics recommending this approach:
Virtually all adjacent offsets possess the same antenna orientation (as co-offsets
normally do). This provides an additional measure of interference protection and
simplifies system optimization.
A uniform increment of 168 exists between co-located sectors regardless of the
PILOT_INC in use. This will help optimization through easier recognition of co-site
offsets. (The Adjacent Sectors approach also benefits from easy recognition of co-site
offsets.)
A 3-sector site uses one group while a 6-sector site uses 2 groups. (The Adjacent
Sectors approach possesses this benefit as well.)
Table 4-10 contains 84 groupings for a PILOT_INC of 2. Subsets of this table apply to
PILOT_INC values of 4 (42 sets), 6 (28 sets), 8 (21 sets), and 12 (14 sets). These
groupings will prove useful in any transition or migration between different
PILOT_INCs.
Table 4-11 contains 56 groupings for a PILOT_INC of 3. Subsets of this table apply to
PILOT_INC values of 6 (28 sets) and 12 (14 sets). These groupings will prove useful in
any transition or migration between different PILOT_INCs.
For example, to transition between PILOT_INCs 2 and 3, we would design a transition
zone of 6. All of the appropriate groupings for a PILOT_INC of 6 already exist within
ADJACENT SECTORS ADJACENT SITES
6
3
9
12
15
18
6
174
342
9
177
345
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
the separate 2 and 3 sets.
Generic information on re-use patterns can be found in Section 4.6. Here are some possible cluster
configurations:
Table 4-10: Offset Groupings for PILOT_INC = 2 (also 4, 6, 8, and 12)
Alpha
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
Beta
170 172 174 176 178 180 182 184 186 188 190 192 194 196 198 200 202 204 206 208 210
Gamma
338 340 342 344 346 348 350 352 354 356 358 360 362 364 366 368 370 372 374 376 378
Alpha
44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84
Beta
212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 228 230 232 234 236 238 240 242 244 246 248 250 252
Gamma
380 382 384 386 388 390 392 394 396 398 400 402 404 406 408 410 412 414 416 418 420
Alpha
86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126
Beta
254 256 258 260 262 264 266 268 270 272 274 276 278 280 282 284 286 288 290 292 294
Gamma
422 424 426 428 430 432 434 436 438 440 442 444 446 448 450 452 454 456 458 460 462
Alpha
128 130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 152 154 156 158 160 162 164 166 168
Beta
296 298 300 302 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 318 320 322 324 326 328 330 332 334 336
Gamma
464 466 468 470 472 474 476 478 480 482 484 486 488 490 492 494 496 498 500 502 504
Table 4-11: Offset Groupings for PILOT_INC = 3 (also 6 and 12)
Alpha
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63
Beta
171 174 177 180 183 186 189 192 195 198 201 204 207 210 213 216 219 222 225 228 231
Gamma
339 342 345 348 351 354 357 360 363 366 369 372 375 378 381 384 387 390 393 396 399
Alpha
66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120 123 126
Beta
234 237 240 243 246 249 252 255 258 261 264 267 270 273 276 279 282 285 288 291 294
Gamma
402 405 408 411 414 417 420 423 426 429 432 435 438 441 444 447 450 453 456 459 462
Alpha
129 132 135 138 141 144 147 150 153 156 159 162 165 168
Beta
297 300 303 306 309 312 315 318 321 324 327 330 333 336
Gamma
465 468 471 474 477 480 483 486 489 492 495 498 501 504
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The 19-cell repeat pattern is easy to use. A site number, N,
within the pattern can easily be translated into a PN offset
assignment for a particular sector.
For Adjacent Sectors, 6-sector, and PILOT_INC of 4:
SECTOR x OFFSET= ((N-1) * 6 + x) * 4
For Adjacent Sites, 6-sector, and PILOT_INC of 4:
SECTOR x OFFSET= N*4 + (x-1)*168; (x = 1,2,3)
SECTOR x OFFSET= (N+21)*4 + (x-4)*168; (x = 4,5,6)
The 25-cell repeat pattern is easy to use. A site
number, N, within the pattern can easily be translated
into a PN offset assignment for a particular sector.
SECTOR x OFFSET= (N+28)*3 + (x-4)*168;
(x = 4,5,6)
The 37-cell repeat pattern is easy to use. A site
number, N, within the pattern can easily be translated
into a PN offset assignment for a particular sector.
17 9 1 12 4
10 2 13 5
16 8 19 11
3 14 6
15 7 18
3
10
17 6 14
4 8 13 19 22
7 14 18 23
3 9 12 20
15 17 24
2 10 11
1 6 15
11 16 25
24
25 16
21 21
22
5
6
4
5
1
2
23 12 1 27 16
13 2 28 17
22 11 37 26
3 29 18
21 10 36
20 9 35
4 30 19
31
32 25
33 15
34
24
14
5
6
7
8
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The 52-cell repeat pattern is easy to use. A site number,
N, within the pattern can easily be translated into a PN
offset assignment for a particular sector.
4.4.7 Guidelines for Changing PILOT_INC at Inter-CBSC Boundaries.
PILOT_INC is a CBSC global parameter. As such, PILOT_INC can only be changed at CBSC
boundaries. When such a change is required, the preferred methodology includes the following
guidelines:
One side shall have a PILOT_INC which is a multiple of the other side. For example,
transitioning between 2 and 4 or 3 and 6.
The challenge in transitioning is characterized by MSs on one side seeing a site from the
other side, but the home CBSC does not interpret the phase correctly because a different
PILOT_INC is in use. For example, CBSC A is using 2 and CBSC B is using 4. A MS
tied to B sees an A site using offset 6 and reports it in a PSMM. CBSC B will interpret
the offset as either 4 or 8, because it does not recognize 6. This problem does not
manifest itself in the other direction since all multiples of 4 are already multiples of 2.
A transition zone should be planned on the A side (using PILOT_INC = 2) of the border
such that for a few layers of cells, all sites are using multiples of 4. In other words the
transition is planned as an extension of the B side.
21 47 1 27 7
48 2 28 8
20 46 26 52
3 29 9
19 45 25
18 44 24
4 30 10
38
39 51
40 6
41
22
49
33
34
35
36
37 17 43 11
12
23
42
16
15
14
13
32
31 5
50
5
10
12
16
23
31
36
50
42
CBSC A
PILOT_INC = 2
CBSC B
PILOT_INC = 4
TRANSITION ZONE
6
8
4
16
multiple of 2, but not of 4
multiple of 4
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
If the PILOT_INC on one CBSC is not the multiple of the PILOT_INC in use on the
other CBSC, then a transition zone consisting of offsets based on a common multiple
should be used. For example, to transition between 2 and 3, we use the common
multiple of 6.
A pseudo-requirement of Inter-CBSC Soft Handoff is that PILOT_INCs should be the
same across all CBSCs that are connected. Since target CBSC BTSs are being
controlled by a source/anchor CBSC, they are subject to using the anchor PILOT_INC
during an Inter-CBSC soft handoff. If you are using No Legs-Wait or No Legs as the
anchor handoff trigger, then this technique would still probably work. You may need to
plan for a larger transition area.
4.5 Implementing PN Offset Plan Changes
To change the pilot offset, use the edit secgen CLI. Invoking this command will propagate the
change to the BTS. The BBX and the BBXR should be taken out of service. This would affect
users on that cell; consequently, it is recommended that this be done during the maintenance
window. It should take about 6-15 minutes for a BTS.
The PILOT_INC parameter is found both in the MM and XC database.
On the XCDR, use the disp_cp_params command to display the current status of pilot inc. Use the
set_ho_params to change the HO_pilot_inc field to the new value.
Note: After a XC reset, the XC pilot_inc will be reset to 1, the default. A backup script must be
executed to re-load this and other data. If this is not performed, you can expect to see requests to
enter into soft handoff rejected due to the offset not being found in the neighbor list. This is the
result of incorrect translation of the phase. You may detect evidence of the problem in several
ways which include: viewing the PILOT_INC value being transmitted in a Neighbor List Update
Message (NLUM) or searching Pilot Strength Measurement Messages in the callproc log for many
instances of PN offsets which are not multiples of the true PILOT_INC. This information is still
valid for R7.
To change pilotinc on the OMCR, use the edit cbsc cbscgen CLI. The pilotinc change will require
a system reset. This may take on the order of 90 minutes.
This is only to be performed during the maintenance window.
4.6 Re-Use Patterns
This table can help in defining re-use patterns through use of i & j coordinates. For example, to
create a normal analog 7 cell re-use pattern, one would follow along the i axis for 2 cells and then
follow the j axis (either clockwise or counter-clockwise, but be consistent) for 1 cell. The grayed
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
out table elements pertain to cluster sizes not likely to be used in CDMA.
4.7 References
Prior discussions of topics significant to PN Offset Planning which are useful references include
the following:
1. TIA/EIA/IS-95A, Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode
Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System, version 0.07, 6.1.5.1, 6.6.6.1.2,
6.6.6.2.1, 6.6.6.2.4.
2. Qualcomm, The CDMA Network Engineering Handbook, March 1, 1993, 9.1.1,
9.2.3, 9.4.
3. Scott M. Hall (Motorola), Simple CDMA PN Search Windows, January 5, 1995.
Table 4-12: Re-Use Pattern Coordinates, i & j,
and Cluster Size, N, and D/R
i j N D/R i j N D/R
1 0 1 1.73 7 1 57 13.08
1 1 3 3.00 5 4 61
(4 ring)
13.53
2 0 4 3.46 6 3 63 13.75
2 1 7
(1 ring)
4.58 8 0 64 13.86
3 0 9 5.20 7 2 67 14.18
2 2 12 6.00 8 1 73 14.80
3 1 13 6.24 5 5 75 15.00
4 0 16 6.93 6 4 76 15.10
3 2 19
(2 ring)
7.55 7 3 79 15.39
4 1 21 7.94 8 2 84 15.87
5 0 25 8.66 6 5 91
(5 ring)
16.52
3 3 27 9.00 7 4 93 16.70
4 2 28 9.17 8 3 97 17.06
5 1 31 9.64 6 6 108 18.00
6 0 36 10.39 7 5 109 18.08
4 3 37
(3 ring)
10.54 8 4 112 18.33
5 2 39 10.82 7 6 127
(6 ring)
19.52
6 1 43 11.36 8 5 129 19.67
4 4 48 12.00 7 7 147 21.00
5 3 49 12.12 8 6 148 21.07
7 0 49 12.12 8 7 169
(7 ring)
22.52
6 2 52 12.49 8 8 192 24.00
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
IEEE Conference Papers on this topic include:
4. Chu Rui Chang, Jane Zhen Wan and Meng F. Lee (NORTEL Wireless Engineering
Services), PN offset planning strategies for non-uniform CDMA networks, 1997 IEEE
47th Vehicular Technology Conference, May 4-7, 1997.
5. Jin Yang, Derek Bao and Mo Ali (Airtouch Cellular), PN offset planning in IS-95
based CDMA systems, 1997 IEEE 47th Vehicular Technology Conference, May 4-7,
1997.
4
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.1 Introduction
The design of a wireless system revolves around three main principles. Those principles are cov-
erage, capacity and quality. The coverage of a system relates to the area within the system that has
sufficient signal strength to provide for a quality call. The capacity of a system relates to the ability
of the system to support a given number of users. Finally, the quality of the system reflects the de-
gree of naturalism to reproduce speech and ease of two-way communication. With CDMA, all
three of these quantities are interrelated. To improve quality, one has to sacrifice some coverage
and capacity. To improve coverage, one would sacrifice capacity and quality, and to improve ca-
pacity, one would sacrifice coverage and quality.
The CDMA system design process consists of several levels or phases. These levels range from an
initial budgetary design to a final design used to implement the system. The amount of time and
effort required to complete a design increases as one moves from a budgetary design to a final de-
sign. However, this additional time and effort results in a more accurate system design.
There are basically three levels of a system design. The first level is a budgetary level. It uses a link
budget along with a statistical propagation model (such as Hata or COST-231 Hata) to estimate the
coverage of the sites and ultimately determine how many sites are required for the particular sys-
tem. This type of propagation model has a slope and intercept value for each type of environment
(Urban, Suburban, Open, etc.) and does not include terrain effects. This relatively simplistic ap-
proach allows for a quick analysis of the number of sites that may be required to cover a given area.
The next level of a system design requires a more detailed propagation model. This propagation
model takes into account the characteristics of the selected antenna, the terrain, and the land use /
land clutter surrounding the site. Since these factors are accounted for, this propagation model will
determine a better estimate of the coverage of the sites than the previous statistical propagation
model. Thus, its use, in conjunction with the link budget, produces a more accurate determination
of the number of cells required. Motorola uses the NetPlan tool for this portion of the design pro-
cess.
In general, this level of the design uses a reverse link budget to assist in determining the required
propagation path loss to be used in NetPlan. However to complete a system design, the forward
link must also be analyzed to determine power settings and pilot coverage. The forward link budget
consists of many variables including mobile speed, location, soft handoff, noise figure, voice ac-
tivity, and pilot range. It is recommended that a simulation be used to analyze the forward link by
accounting for the statistical variation in these parameters. Such simulator studies are part of the
final design phase.
The final level or phase of the design process incorporates further detail into the design by the use
of simulation studies. Motorola uses the NetPlan Simulator for this analysis. The simulation studies
Coverage of CDMA
Cells and Link Budget
Section
5
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
account for mobile distributions within a coverage area and also for CDMA system and cell level
parameters. The simulator analyzes both the forward and the reverse links. This final design pro-
cess is required in deployment of the system or in determining warranty coverage.
The one element common to all three levels of a system design is the RF link budget. The following
discusses this element in detail.
5.2 Radio Frequency Link Budget
The link budget is important because, in addition to a propagation model, it is used to aid in pre-
dicting the RF coverage of a site, which ultimately determines the number of cells required for sys-
tem RF signal coverage and hence the system cost. Figure 5-1 shows the impact to the quantity of
sites required due to changes in the RF Link Budget. For example, if the link budget (maximum
allowable path loss) was improved by 5 dB, half the number of sites would be required.
Figure 5-1: Percentage of Cells Based on dB Changes to the Link Budget
The above figure is derived using the COST 231 Hata Suburban propagation model. Other models
may differ slightly from this. This figure can be utilized as a quick aid to help quantify the number
of sites required based upon a change made to the link budget. It should be pointed out that other
environmental factors may contribute to the above not holding true. For instance, in a very hilly
terrain location, dB improvements may not provide for extra range if the terrain is blocking the
propagation.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The RF Link Budget is used to define:
All of the gains and losses along a path
The maximum allowable path loss
The assumptions to use for the design
The parameters within the RF link budget can be divided into four major categories:
1. - Propagation related
2. - CDMA specific
3. - Product specific
4. - Reliability
The following figure shows the typical gains and losses that are encountered in the reverse link.
Figure 5-2: RF Link Budget Gains & Losses
5.2.1 Propagation Related Parameters
Propagation related parameters are those gains or losses of a link budget that are constant, indepen-
dent of the multiple access technology chosen or vendor. The values of these parameters though
are frequency dependent (i.e. differences would exist between an 800 MHz design and a 1,900
MHz design or between mobile and a fixed environment). These parameters include such factors
as: building loss, vehicle loss, body loss, man-made noise margin, RF feeder losses, and antennas.
If one is comparing link budget information between vendors, these propagation related parameters
should be set the same so as to obtain a realistic comparison.
BTS
MS
MS Line Loss
MS Antenna Gain
Body Loss
Vehicle Loss
Building Loss
Man-made Noise
RF Path Loss
Shadow Fade Margin (Reliability)
BTS Antenna Gain
Transmission Line Loss
Jumpers & Connector Loss
RF
Gains
&
Losses
MS TX Power
MS RX Sensitivity
BTS TX Power
BTS RX Sensitivity
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.2.1.1 Building Loss
Building loss is associated with the degradation of the RF signal strength caused by a building
structure when a subscriber handset operating within a building is communicating with a base sta-
tion. An adequate RF signal strength within a building can be accomplished in one of two ways.
One method involves the propagation scenario where a base station located outdoors communi-
cates with a subscriber unit that is inside a building. The second method involves the propagation
scenario where both the base station and the subscriber unit are within the same building.

For this discussion on link budgets, only building losses associated with the building penetration
of the RF signal from an outdoor source are considered (refer to the diagram labeled INTO).
One approach for modeling the into building penetration is as an extension of an outdoor prop-
agation model. This method uses a distance-dependent path loss for a subscriber unit that is outside
a building, and adds a building loss factor.
Another approach is that radio transmission into buildings should be undertaken separately and not
as an extension of the outdoor propagation models plus the building loss factor. Besides the anten-
na heights and path length, the floor area, number of rooms on the floor, angle of illumination of
the building to the base station and the construction of the walls should be considered when trying
to determine a new propagation model.
We shall assume that a building loss factor will be added to the macro cell link budget. This build-
ing loss factor is highly variable. Variations result from construction material, building layout,
user location inside the building, proximity to the base station, and direction from base station.
Building losses can range anywhere from 5 to 40 dB or more. If actual field data is not available
for a given area, a value of building penetration may be assumed. The following table of values can
be used for a mobile design as a possible guideline in the absence of field data for the particular
INTO
Propagation Scenario where a base
station communicates with a radio
receiver that is inside a building.
WITHIN
Propagation Scenario where both
the transmitter and receiver are
within the same building.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
environment:
This table of building losses represents the average difference in RF signal strength between the
outside environment and numerous points throughout the inside of the building.
For a fixed system, the subscriber unit is not moving around inside the building but is instead fixed
to a position. Since the Fixed Wireless Terminal (FWT) unit is fixed, the installation should be in
a position that allows for the best signal to be received from the base station. The preferred instal-
lation is to have the FWT with its whip antenna located near to a window, preferably on the side
of the building closest to the base station.
1
This would minimize the loss required for the signal to
penetrate into the building. In addition, the preferred FWT location would have it being mounted
above desk height. If this optimum location is achieved, the building loss will be minimized. Care-
ful placement of the fixed wireless terminals antenna near to the window could reduce the building
loss value to 3 to 6 dB. The following figure shows the preferred location of the FWT with whip
antennas.
Figure 5-3: Preferred FWT Locations Without External Antennas
There are numerous papers that exist which describe building penetration losses. The papers cover
Table 5-1: Example Building Penetration Losses (800 & 1,900 MHz)
Environment Penetration Loss
Dense Urban 20 dB
Urban 15 dB
Suburban 10 dB
Rural 8 dB
1. "Fixed Wireless Terminal Description and Installation", 68P64113A02-O, Motorola Technical Education
Documentation
Good
Reception
Better
Reception
Install FWT near window
that faces the general
direction of the cell site.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
many different factors that affect building loss such as: height of base station antennas, angle of
illumination to the building, differing heights of buildings, various building constructions, and the
impact of frequency on building loss. Some of these papers are contradictory. For example, a paper
by Turkmani
2

3
concluded that building loss decreases with an increase in frequency. On the other
hand, Aguirre
4
, in another paper, reached the conclusion that higher penetration losses were expe-
rienced at higher frequencies. It should be pointed out that Turkmanis study had antennas above
the rooftop, whereas Aguirres study had antennas below the rooftop.
Due to the differences in the papers, one could only venture an assumption for building penetration
loss by utilizing the results that are from a test case more in line with how the operator plans to
provide for the building penetration.
As the floors of a building are ascended, the relative signal strength increases. This effect is usually
attributed to the increased probability of line of site propagation between the higher floors of the
building and the base site. This is commonly referred to as a height gain per floor. This height gain
can effectively reduce the building loss by approximately 1.3 to 2 dB per floor. Since one is nor-
mally designing for a worst case scenario, the height gain would not be considered unless the par-
ticular design is to provide coverage only to a given floor(s).
5.2.1.2 Vehicle Loss
Vehicle loss is the degradation of the RF signal strength caused by a vehicular enclosure when a
subscriber handset is operating within a vehicle while trying to communicate to a cell site. Vehicle
loss has been seen to range from 5 to 12 dB. If one wishes to design a system assuming a vehicle
penetration loss, an average range is approximately 5 to 8 dB.
Vehicle loss will not apply for a fixed system.
5.2.1.3 Body Loss
Body loss, also referred to as head loss, is the degradation of the RF signal strength due to the close
proximity of the subscriber handset antenna to the persons body. A 2 dB loss is associated with
the antenna in a vertical position; 6 dB is associated with the antenna in a horizontal position. It is
assumed that the typical user will rotate the phone or move slightly to help improve the quality of
the call. Therefore, a lower body loss is often used in system designs.
For a fixed system, there will be no body loss since the FWT antenna is either connected directly
to the FWT or is installed outdoors.
2. Turkmani, Parsons and Lewis, "Measurement of building penetration loss on radio signals at 441, 900 and
1400 MHz", Journal of the Institution of Electronic and Radio Engineers, Vol. 58, No. 6 (Supplement), pp.
S169-S174, September-December 1988
3. Turkmani and Toledo, "Modelling of radio transmissions into and within multistorey buildings at 900,
1800 and 2300 MHz", IEEE Proceedings-I, Vol. 140, No. 6, December 1993
4. Aguirre, "Radio Propagation Into Buildings at 912, 1920, and 5990 MHz Using Microcells", 0-7803-1823-
4/94 IEEE, session 1.6 & 1.7, pp. 129-134
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.2.1.4 Noise Margin
The noise margin parameter can be added to the link budget to allow for an adjustment to the ther-
mal noise value. Additional environmental noise may exist within the coverage area. This noise
could be generated from automobiles, factories, machinery, and other man-made noise. Since each
environment is unique, a noise floor study should be performed to determine if an adjustment is
required to the theoretical thermal noise floor value.
Man-made noise is less significant at 1,900 MHz than at 800 MHz. Also, galactic or sky noise is
at a minimum.
5
5.2.1.5 RF Feeder Losses
RF feeder losses include all of the losses that are encountered between the base station cabinet and
the base antenna, or with respect to a mobile, all of the losses between the PA and the antenna.
Since a majority of subscriber units for a mobility system being sold to customers are portable,
there is minimal feeder loss and therefore, RF feeder loss at the mobile is not considered in the link
budget. However, the feeder loss at the base site can account for several dB of loss.
For a fixed system, the FWT may have an antenna connected directly to the unit or the antenna may
be installed on the outside of the building and thus require a transmission run from the FWT to the
antenna. For the external antenna to an FWT, feeder loss does need to be accounted for in the RF
Link Budget. This feeder loss would be the total loss encountered from the FWT to the external
antenna, which is a function of the size of transmission line and the length of the run. A lightning
arrestor will also need to be accounted for. Since this transmission line may need to wind its way
from the FWT to the external antenna, the size of the line may be small to allow for better bending
radii. The following table provides some samples of cable types and the associated loss for two dif-
ferent spectrums.
Table 5-2: Example of FWT External Cable Losses
Various items contained within the base station RF feeder loss are: top jumper, main transmission
line, bottom jumper, lightning arrestors, connectors, duplexers, splitters, combiners, etc. The loss
associated with the RF feeder system is minimized by reducing the transmission line run between
the base station and its antennas, and/or utilizing lower loss transmission lines. Transmission lines
can range from 1/2 to 1-5/8 diameter cables. The larger the diameter of the cable, the less lossy
the medium, but the sacrifice is more rigid lines, larger bending radius, greater weight, more wind
loading and larger area required. Transmission lines are also available with either air or foam di-
electrics. The air dielectric cables are more expensive to install and maintain, but are less lossy than
5. Lee, William C.Y. "Mobile Communications Engineering", Copyright 1982, McGraw-Hill Inc. pg. 33-40.
Cable Length and Type Loss at 800 MHz Loss at 1900 MHz
3 meter RG-58 cable 1.7 dB 2.6 dB
10 meter RG-142 cable 2.6 dB
10 meter LMR-300 cable 3.2 dB
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
the foam lines. The following figure reflects most of the different components that are encountered
between the base site antenna and the base station equipment.
Figure 5-4: Typical Components in the RF Feeder Run
Transmission cables are more lossy at higher frequencies. At 800 MHz, a 7/8 line may suffice but
one may require 1-5/8 line for 1,900 MHz to maintain a similar loss.
From a budgetary or approximation viewpoint, one RF feeder loss value could be assumed as the
typical value for all of the sites. In real world situations, however, it is rare that one loss value will
be common for all of the sites. Some sites (and sectors) may have longer or shorter runs of main
transmission due to being installed with a taller antenna supporting structure or possibly a short run
due to the site being located on the top of a building. In performing propagation predictions via
computer analysis, it is important that each site (sector) is represented as accurately as possible.
This will provide results that are more accurate.
Refer to the "RF Antenna System" sections for additional information on transmission lines.
Antenna
(A) Top Jumper
(B) Main Transmission Line
(C) Antenna Surge Protector
(D) Jumper to Directional Coupler
(E) Directional Coupler
(F) Jumper to Duplexer
(H) Jumper to TX and RX Antenna Port
BTS
Waveguide Entry Port
Note: Each Jumper consists of:
Two connectors and
One line
(G) Duplexer
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.2.1.6 Antennas
Antennas can be either omni or directional. Omni antennas provide approximately the same
amount of gain throughout the entire 360 degree horizontal pattern. Directional antennas, some-
times referred to as sector antennas, have a maximum gain in one direction with the backside being
15 to 25 dB below the maximum gain.
The gain of the antenna is a function of the horizontal pattern, vertical pattern, and number of ele-
ments that make up the antenna array. The number of elements will dictate the size of the antenna.
The horizontal and vertical beamwidths are referenced as the amount of degrees between the points
on the pattern where the gain is down 3 dB from the maximum gain. Some basic rules of thumb
can be used in antenna selection.
The narrower the horizontal beamwidth, the greater the gain.
The narrower the vertical beamwidth, the greater the gain.
The longer the antenna, the greater the gain.
One needs to ensure that the horizontal and vertical patterns provided by the selected antenna will
provide for coverage in the desired area. For instance, as a means to improve forward gain of the
antenna, the vertical beamwidth may be reduced. In some situations, this reduction in the vertical
beamwidth may produce unsatisfactory signal strengths near the cell site tower due to the antenna
is basically overshooting the area to be covered.
Another item to keep in mind is if the antenna gain is in reference to a dipole or an isotropic anten-
na. The difference is usually signified by dBd or dBi. A zero dBd gain antenna would correspond
to a 2.14 dBi gain antenna. Cellular often referenced antennas in dBd, but PCS RF link budgets
normally refer to dBi gain antennas. The important point to be made is that a propagation model
may be referenced to an isotropic or dipole antenna. Thus, care should be taken to ensure the cor-
rect antenna gain is used with the propagation model, a potential error of 4.3 dB could result.
5.2.1.6.1 Base
The antennas located at the base site can be either omni or directional. In early cellular designs,
most sites started out as omni. Fewer antennas were required and the system was lightly loaded.
As the traffic requirements grew, sites were required to be sectorized to provide for this additional
traffic and to restrict the amount of co-channel and adjacent channel interference.
PCS systems, though not requiring an abundance of capacity initially, are pursuing directional an-
tennas because of the extra gain associated with a directional antenna as compared to an omni an-
tenna. One could easily achieve a 4 dB improvement by using directional antennas instead of omni
antennas. This 4 dB improvement would reduce the quantity of sites required at 1,900 MHz by ap-
proximately 40%.
It is not mandatory that all sites use the same antenna. The system planner may deploy either omni
or directional antennas at a cell site to meet the coverage goals desired.
As mentioned above, the antennas need to be selected to ensure coverage will be provided over the
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
desired area. In addition antennas need to be selected to minimize the level of interference. De-
creasing the level of interference will allow for greater site capacity and improved system perfor-
mance. Antenna patterns that provide a faster rolloff past the half power points (i.e. 3 dB down
from main lobe) will provide for better interference protection. In frequency reuse systems
(AMPS, GSM, USDC), improved interference control, such as through the use of sectorized sites,
allows for a set of frequencies to be used at closer distances (i.e. tighter reuse pattern), thus provid-
ing increased capacity. For CDMA, as mentioned in the section on capacity (Section 3), interfer-
ence from other cells and other sectors has an impact on the capacity that can be supported.
5.2.1.6.2 Subscriber Unit
Our assumption here is that the portable antenna gain without factoring in body loss is 0 dBi (-2.14
dBd) and is an omni antenna. It is possible that differences may exist. The system could be de-
signed for mobile coverage, in which case, the antenna mounted on the external of the vehicle may
have higher gain.
Another scenario is a fixed application. An option for the FWT is to have a whip antenna connected
directly to the FWT unit. This whip antenna gain may differ based upon product or vendor. An-
other option is that the FWT installation may utilize yagi or patch antennas with much greater gain
and directivity. However, Motorola recommends most FWTs be installed using whip antennas.
Among other reasons, whip antennas have the lowest cost profile. The FWT currently being of-
fered by Motorola has a 1.1 dBi whip antenna.
In some circumstances, particularly for users in fringe coverage areas, external antennas are appro-
priate alternatives to the simple whip antenna. Since Motorola's FWTs have a standard 50 Ohm
TNC antenna connector, any number of different antennas may be used with the FWT. Motorola
has tested a 9 dBi (for 800 MHz) and a 7.5 dBi (for 1900 MHz) antenna with the Motorola FWT.
These antenna gains assume that these antennas are placed outdoors with obstructions and pointed
in the correct direction. These gains can not be guaranteed if these directional antennas are installed
indoors due to the many reflections and cancellations of signals that may occur.
From a link budget standpoint, the system planner may wish to use the worst case scenario in plan-
ning out the system.
5.2.2 CDMA Specific Parameters
CDMA specific parameters are those items in the RF link budget which will have different values
based on the technology chosen. CDMA parameters include such factors as: interference margin,
soft handoff gain and E
b
/N
o
.
5.2.2.1 Interference Margin
In determining RF coverage in CDMA systems, the effect of interference generated from the serv-
ing cell as well as the neighboring cells must be considered. As discussed in Section 3, this is in
contrast to the RF coverage analysis for AMPS cells where interference mainly affects the frequen-
cy assignment but not the coverage.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The interference margin is dependent upon the amount of loading assumed in the system. Different
cell deployment strategies can be modeled by varying the interference margin. CDMA cell deploy-
ments could be based on loading individual frequencies one by one, until they achieve the target
load (for instance, a 6 dB noise rise). An alternative deployment could utilize more CDMA radio
carriers, initially operating at a reduced load, to further extend the range of the cells (for instance,
3 dB noise rise) while trading off capacity (exploiting any immediate spectrum available). This 3
dB system rise improvement would result in approximately 30% fewer CDMA cell sites at system
turn-on.
The following equation can be used as a first pass approximation to the amount of interference mar-
gin one should add to the link budget to account for loading the CDMA system with users.
[EQ 5-1]
Where X is the maximum allowed number of users, specified as a fraction of pole capacity. For
example, a capacity cell site has X equal to seventy-five percent (75%). Noise rise varies as a func-
tion of propagation, environment, load, user distribution, etc. Refer to the appendix of this section
for further detail on how this equation is derived.
5.2.2.2 Soft Handoff Gain
Soft handoff is the term that is normally associated with the fact that a CDMA system makes a con-
nection to a target cell prior to releasing (breaking) from the source site, commonly referred to as
make-before-break. A hard handoff, associated with AMPS, GSM, or USDC, requires that the
signal strength from the target cell be greater than the signal strength from the source cell by a hys-
teresis value in order to reduce the number of handoffs per call and the ping-pong effect. This
hysteresis requires an overlap between the cell coverage areas. The soft handoff gain corresponds
to a decreased shadow fade margin required by the CDMA soft handoff over that of a hard handoff
system.
Some proponents of CDMA may have a separate entry in the RF link budget for soft handoff gain.
The purpose of this is to provide information as to the benefits of CDMA over other technologies.
Some factions believe that the soft handoff gain should be accounted for in the reliability value
(shadow fade margin). The example RF link budget provided in a later section incorporates the soft
handoff gain in with the shadow fade margin. Refer to the section on Reliability for further discus-
sion on the shadow fade margin.
For a fixed system, the gain offered by soft handoff may or may not be present depending upon the
system design. For instance, a single isolated site supporting a WiLL system would have no neigh-
boring sites to even allow soft handoff to occur. In this situation, the soft handoff gain would be
zero. Another situation is for a fixed system utilizing external FWT antennas. These antennas tend
to be directional and would be sited to the best signal source and therefore minimal advantage from
soft handoff would be recognized. Even for the situation of a fixed system using the FWT whip
antennas, soft handoff gain may be lower than seen in a mobile environment. The FWT installation
causes a form of building directionality which may decrease the soft handoff advantage.
NoiseRise 10
1
1 X
------------
,
_
log =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.2.2.3 E
b
/N
o
E
b
/N
o
corresponds to energy per bit over interference plus noise density for a given target FER
(typical FER target is 1%). In digital communications, it is customary to designate one-sided noise
density with N
o
. In CDMA, interference is dominated by the noise generated due to other users in
the system. The reader is cautioned that the notation, N
o
, in this section refers to the total power
density due to interference and noise.
Included in the CDMA E
b
/N
o
value is diversity improvement arising from performance in Ray-
leigh fading. This is distinct from the entry Soft Handoff Gain which represents an estimate of
the performance improvement of soft handoff, relative to hard handoff, when experiencing log nor-
mal shadowing.
In general, the required downlink E
b
/N
o
, to provide an acceptable audio quality, improves at higher
speeds and in soft handoff. In the uplink path, the required E
b
/N
o
improves at lower speeds (reverse
of downlink). The worst case E
b
/N
o
value for the uplink is at about 30 Kmph.
The uplink E
b
/N
o
value accounts for rake (non-coherent combining) receiver, dual antenna, and
interleaving/coding. The downlink E
b
/N
o
value accounts for rake (coherent, maximal ratio com-
bining), and interleaving/coding.
For mobile systems, the E
b
/N
o
target varies dynamically as the mobile moves around. However,
FWTs are fixed and the only movement is that of people around the FWT in a building and buses
or pedestrians close to an outdoor FWT antenna. Optimized FWT deployment may significantly
reduce the E
b
/N
o
target by avoiding the fading caused by the surrounding environment.
In a mobile environment, the fading characteristic is Rayleigh. For a fixed system, the fading en-
vironment may be more Rician. The E
b
/N
o
value assumes a certain type of fading environment.
The E
b
/N
o
requirement for a fixed system will therefore be different than for a mobile environment.
The E
b
/N
o
target value can range from 4 dB to 8 dB for CDMA WiLL systems. The E
b
/N
o
target
value should be set to 8 dB for isolated cells using indoor omni FWT antennas or for cells with
little SHO benefits in the fringe areas. However, if external directional FWT antennas are used and
a Line Of Site (LOS) path exists between the cell site and the FWT antenna, an E
b
/N
o
target value
of 4 dB may be used.
As improvements are made to the hardware (chipsets) and to the software (how the energy is man-
aged), the E
b
/N
o
requirement level may be lessened. Typical E
b
/N
o
values used for fixed systems
are stated above. The current requirements for a mobile system are approximately 7 to 7.5 dB for
the 8 kb and 13 kb vocoder respectively.
From a link budget analysis, only one E
b
/N
o
value can be assumed for a given scenario. The Mo-
torola NetPlan Simulator will incorporate a family of curves to more accurately model the E
b
/N
o
requirements needed to meet a desired frame error rate for each link that is being analyzed between
the user and the site. Refer to Section 5.6 for additional discussion on the simulator.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.2.3 Product Specific Parameters
Product specific parameters are those items in the RF link budget which can vary based on the
product (BTS and subscriber) chosen. There may exist differences between products within Mo-
torolas BTS product line, such as differences in PA power of different BTS products. Differences
will also exist between different equipment vendors. Each equipment vendor will have their own
vision of the type of market their equipment is to satisfy.
5.2.3.1 Product Transmit Power
The transmit power is typically referenced by the power out of equipment prior to the RF transmis-
sion lines and antennas. One needs to determine at what point the transmit power is being measured
to ensure that there are no gains or losses missed.
The IS-95A standard provides the maximum effective radiated power (ERP) for any class of per-
sonal station transmitter in Table 6.1.2.1-1. The Class II personal station is not to exceed 2.5
Watts (34 dBm). For the Class III personal station, the minimum ERP is 0.2 Watts (23 dBm) and
the maximum ERP is 1 Watt (30 dBm).
The CDMA standard for 1.8 to 2.0 GHz (ANSI J-STD-008) provides the maximum effective iso-
tropic radiated power (EIRP) for any class of personal station transmitter in section 2.1.2.1. The
Class I personal station is not to exceed 2 Watts (33 dBm). For the Class II personal station, the
minimum EIRP is 0.2 Watts (23 dBm) and the maximum EIRP is 1 Watt (30 dBm).
One should carefully note the slight difference between the PCS and Cellular specifications. Cel-
lular references the output power with respect to a dipole (ERP), whereas PCS makes reference to
an isotropic (EIRP). Therefore, there is approximately a 2 dB difference between the specifications
given in the standards documents.
The typical subscriber value to be used in the reverse link (uplink - subscriber transmit to base re-
ceive) is 23 dBm.
With respect to the reverse link budget, one could assume one item for the transmit power of the
subscriber unit (the EIRP value) or one may wish to break up this value into three parts. The three
parts are: subscriber PA output, transmission line and connector losses, and the antenna gain.
Since the subscriber unit, portable or FWT, can be purchased from different vendors, the specifi-
cations for each subscriber unit should be obtained.
5.2.3.1.2 Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
The CDMA standard for 1.8 to 2.0 GHz (ANSI J-STD-008) in section 3.1.2 states that the base
station shall not transmit more than 1,640 Watts of effective isotropic radiated power (62.1 dBm
EIRP) in any direction in a 1.25 MHz band for antenna heights above average terrain less than 300
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
meters. The base transceiver station power is used in the forward link (downlink - base transmit to
subscriber receive).
With respect to the forward link budget, one could assume one item for the transmit power of the
BTS (the EIRP value) but typically one breaks up this value into three parts. The three parts are:
BTS PA output, transmission line and connector losses, and the antenna gain. The subscriber units
are typically more uniform, having similar line losses and antenna gains. The BTS, on the other
hand, can be quite varied. Based on the configuration of the site, location of antennas with respect
to the BTS infrastructure, and power out required, it is not as simple to have one EIRP value that
is common across the majority of the sites. Since each BTS site can be unique, one needs to factor
in the uniqueness of the site to ensure the appropriate EIRP is being designed for. For instance, one
site may require a 100 foot run of main transmission line, whereas another site may only require a
50 foot run. The additional loss for the longer run would alter the EIRP from the site. Another dif-
ference would exist based on differences of antennas and their associated gains.
The power output of the BTS is normally assumed to be the power out at the top of the cabinet. It
is possible that each vendor will have different transmit powers for their equipment. In addition,
one vendor may have different transmit powers for each product in their portfolio of base station
products. Obtain the specifications for the particular base station(s) that will be used in the system
design. In looking at the specifications, the power amplifiers may be for multiple carriers or for a
single tone (carrier).
5.2.3.2 Product Receiver Sensitivity
The sensitivity of a radio receiver is a measure of its ability to receive weak signals. The following
equation can be utilized in calculating the sensitivity of a radio receiver.
[EQ 5-2]
where:
k = Boltzmans constant = 1.38e-23 W/(Hz K)
T = Room temperature of 290 degree Kelvin
W = Bandwidth of the carrier in Hz
NF = Noise figure of the equipment
E
b
/N
o
= Energy bit density over noise
R = Information bit rate
Differences will exist between the subscriber unit and base transceiver station due to the differenc-
es in E
b
/N
o
values and the noise figure of the equipment. The other parameters will be the same for
RxSensitivity kT ( )
dBm
W
dB
NF ( )
dB
E
b
N
o
( )
dB
W
R
-----
,
_
dB
+ + + =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
both ends of the link.
The noise figure for the subscriber unit is approximately 10 dB. The required E
b
/N
o
value, to pro-
vide acceptable audio quality, for the subscriber unit is highly dependent on several parameters.
These parameters include: the speed, the environmental parameters, multipath and soft handoff of
the subscriber unit. This is one of the reasons why it is difficult to determine a forward link budget.
It is best left to a CDMA simulator that takes these situations into account.
5.2.3.2.2 Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
The noise figure for the base station is approximately 6 to 7 dB maximum. Typical base station
noise figure values are approximately 4.5 dB. For a mobile environment, the worst case reverse
link E
b
/N
o
for the 13 kbps vocoder is approximately 7.3 dB and is approximately 7 dB for the 8
kbps vocoder. Refer to Section 5.2.2.3 for a discussion of the values to assume for a fixed system.
5.2.3.2.3 Noise Figure
The noise figure, or NF, of a network is a value used to compare the noise in a network with the
noise in an ideal or noiseless network. It is a measure of the degradation in signal-to-noise ratio
(SNR) between the input and output ports of the network. Noise factor (F) is the numerical ratio of
NF, where NF is expressed in dB. The equation for converting noise factor to noise figure is:
[EQ 5-3]
For some situations it may be necessary to calculate the noise figure of a group of amplifiers that
are connected in series. This can be accomplished if the noise figure of each individual amplifier
is known. The equation for determining the cascaded noise factor is:
[EQ 5-4]
Where:
F
n
is the noise factor of each stage,
G
n
is the numerical gain of each stage (not in dB).
The equation for converting Gain dB to linear Gain is:
[EQ 5-5]
NF
dB ( )
10 F ( ) log =
F
Total
F
1
F
2
1
G
1
---------------
F
3
1
G
1
G
2
---------------
F
4
1
G
1
G
2
G
3
--------------------- + + + =
G
dB ( )
10 G
Linear
( ) log =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
One important point to be made with respect to Equation 5-4 is that if the gain of the first stage
(G
1
) is sufficiently high, the denominators of the subsequent terms will force those terms to be
small, leaving only F
1
. Therefore, the NF of the first stage will typically determine the NF of the
cascaded configuration.
The NF of two or more cascaded lossy networks can be found by simply adding the losses (in dB)
of each network element. Examples of a lossy network element are: transmission lines, jumpers,
duplexors, filters and mixers. If a duplexer with an insertion loss of 0.5 dB is followed by a main
transmission loss of 3 dB, the combined noise figure of this cascaded network is 3.5 dB.
Typically the noise figure value to be used in determining the receiver sensitivity value can be ob-
tained from the specification sheet for the particular product. In some instances, a tower top ampli-
fier (TTA) may be installed at a site to improve the level of the received signal at the BTS. The
TTA includes an amplifier and therefore a new noise figure needs to be determined since the con-
figuration now has cascaded amplifiers. The reader needs to be cautioned in that a TTA will only
benefit the reverse path (subscriber to base station). Since the TTA is only improving the reverse
link, one needs to determine if the forward link becomes more of the limiting path. It may be that
a larger power amplifier is needed in the forward link in order to balance both paths.
The following figure shows two different sites, one site has an amplifier located on the top of the
tower and the other site is more the conventional site that has no additional amplification beyond
the base station. This diagram will be used to run through an example showing the noise figure im-
provement with the TTA. In this diagram, stage 2 in the tower top amplifier example and stage 1
of the without tower top amplifier example represent cascaded lossy network elements which are
able to be summed together.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 5-5: Example of Two Different Receive Path Configurations
Antenna
Jumper to Antenna
Main Transmission Line
Antenna Surge Protector
Jumper to Directional Coupler
Directional Coupler
Jumper to Duplexer
Jumper to TX and RX Antenna Port
BTS
Waveguide Entry Port
Duplexer
Tower Top Amplifier
BTS
Jumper
12 dBd
0.5 dB
3 dB
NF = 2.5 dB, Gain 12 dB
0.5 dB
12 dBd
0.5 dB
3 dB
A
B
C
D
With Tower Top
Amplifier
Without Tower
Top Amplifier
NF = 9.5 dB NF = 6 dB
Stage
1
Stage
2
Stage
1
Stage
2
Stage
3
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The following table lists the noise figures, noise factors, and gains for each stage in the above fig-
ure.
Table 5-3: Receive Path Noise Figures and Gains
Based upon the information in Table 5-3 on page 18 and Equation 5-3, Equation 5-4, and
Equation 5-5, the noise factor at reference point B in Figure 5-5 for the receive path with the TTA
can be calculated as follows:
[EQ 5-6]
F
B
= 2.97
Using Equation 5-3, the cascaded noise figure would be:
NF
B
= 4.73 dB
The design without the tower top amplifier would result in the following noise factor at reference
point D shown in Figure 5-5:
[EQ 5-7]
F
D
= 7.96
NF
D
= 9.0 dB
The noise figure at point D could have also been determined by just adding the noise figure of stage
1 to the noise figure of stage 2 because the elements which made up stage 1 were all lossy.
From the above calculations, one can see that the low noise figure and the gain of the TTA adjusts
the noise figure to be 4.73 dB at reference point B. This is a 4.77 dB improvement in the noise fig-
ure as compared to the noise figure at point A. Point D, in the non-TTA case, can be compared to
point B to show the improvement to the noise figure and thus the reverse link that can be achieved
With Tower Top Amplifier Without Tower Top Amplifier
NF
1
2.5 dB F
1
1.78 NF
1
3.0 dB F
1
2.0
NF
2
3.5 dB F
2
2.24 NF
2
6.0 dB F
2
3.98
NF
3
9.5 dB F
3
8.91
G
1
12.0 dB G
1
15.85 G
1
-3.0 dB G
1
0.5
G
2
-3.5 dB G
2
0.45
F
B
1.78
2.24 1
15.85
-------------------
8.91 1
15.85 0.45
------------------------------ + + =
F
D
2
3.98 1
0.5
------------------- + =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
with the TTA. The reverse link has improved 4.27 dB (9 - 4.73) with the TTA.
If one was entering information into a link budget, the following values would be used:
Table 5-4: Link Budget Inputs
Please note that Motorolas BTS product which includes the TTA (as opposed to ordering the BTS
and TTA separately) has a higher noise figure than the typical BTS. The higher noise figure for the
BTS/TTA configuration is required so that the gain of the TTA does not overdrive the front-end of
the BTS.
Though the above scenario shows a reverse link budget advantage when a TTA is installed, not all
aspects of TTA may be as advantageous. The following lists some of the drawbacks of TTAs:
Increased susceptibility to reverse interference noise
Since the TTA only improves the reverse link, an increase to the forward power may be
required to maintain a balance link
Timing concerns (How large can a site be without causing timing issues?)
Active electronics at the top of the antenna structure (more susceptible to lightning,
more difficult to get to for maintenance, etc.)
Due to the increased susceptibility to noise, Motorola does not typically recommend TTAs.
Though in some scenarios (for example in rural applications), TTAs may be beneficial.
5.2.4 Reliability (Shadow Fade Margin)
Shadow fade margin, also known as log normal fading or slow fading, accounts for the variation
of signal measurements at one location over time. Shadow fade margin is a factor added to the link
budget to account for the reduction in received signal level that results from RF shadowing. The
log-normal distribution has been found to be a good estimate of the statistical nature of shadowing
and is used to calculate the probability of RF coverage at each point in the cell. At points near the
base station, the average received signal level and the probability of coverage will be high. At
points near the edge of the cell, the average received signal level and probability of coverage will
be lower. The total probability of coverage for the entire cell is determined by integrating the point
probabilities over the cell area. The desired area coverage (e.g. 90%) is achieved by adjusting the
fade margin to the necessary level. A normal distribution of signals can be used in calculating the
reliability. The following figure shows that adding a margin to the link budget will increase the re-
liability (confidence) of achieving the desired signal level.
Parameter With TTA Without TTA
Base RX Feeder Loss 0.5 dB 3.5 dB
Base Noise Figure 4.73 dB 6 dB
Yields RX Sensitivity @ point B C
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 5-6: Impact of Fade Margin on Reliability
Reliability is used to select the margin, where a 97% design requires several dB more margin than
a 95% design. Since we are looking at the tail of the distribution, additional margin is added to all
users so that the tail is shifted to achieve the target level of reliability. For a fixed system this may
not be efficient nor cost effective since placement has a big effect in determining the worst 5% of
the users. The cost of increasing the reliability (increasing dB margin) should be replaced with fix-
ing the worst 5% of the users, and thus saving the dB margin for the average users. For a fixed sys-
tem, the fade margin, building penetration margin, and soft handoff gain should to be considered
together to provide for the best achievable link budget.
Many readers may be familiar with Jakes
6
equations that determine the edge and area reliability
of a single cell model. Edge reliability is dependent on the standard deviation and fade margin as-
sumed. Depending on the propagation environment, the log-normal standard deviation can easily
vary between 5 and 9 dB or even greater. The greater the standard deviation, the lower the edge
reliability assuming a constant fade margin. Area reliability is dependent on the standard deviation,
6. Jakes, W.C.,"Microwave Mobile Communications", IEEE Press Reissue 1993, (Wiley, New York, 1974),
pp. 125-127
No Fade Margin
Margin
Edge Reliability at 50%
Edge Reliability at greater than 50%
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
fade margin, and propagation loss slope (the slope is dependent on the height of the antennas). As-
suming flat terrain, urban environments, due to their highly obstructive properties, produce higher
standard deviation to mean signal strengths than do open rural environments. Refer to the appendix
of this section for Jakes edge and area reliability equations.
The following two figures are results from Jakes single cell model. The edge reliability has been
shown for three different standard deviations (6.5, 8, and 10 dB) to demonstrate the impact of the
standard deviation. The area reliability figure assumes a standard deviation of 8 dB for the three
curves. The difference in the curves is due to three different path loss slopes (32, 35, and 40 dB/
decade).
Figure 5-7: Area Reliability vs. Fade Margin
Uplink Shadow Fade Margin (dB)
A
r
e
a

R
e
l
i
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 5-8: Edge Reliability vs. Fade Margin
As mentioned in the section on soft handoff gain, some link budgets may have separate entries for
soft handoff gain and shadow fade margin. Typically when this is done, Jakes single cell model
fade margin is used to obtain the reliability level desired. The CDMA link budget, though, still
needs to account for the benefit of soft handoff. Therefore, an approximation for the benefit of soft
handoff gain is required in the link budget. Motorola typically assumes the benefit for soft handoff
in a mobile environment to be approximately 3.5 dB. The reader should be cautioned that this is an
approximation based on a single cell model plus an assumed soft handoff benefit.
Since most systems are comprised of more than a single cell, one could make use of multiple cell
effects. Simulations can be performed given various assumptions (path loss slope, standard devia-
tion, correlation) to determine the appropriate shadow fade margin to be added to the link budget
to provide for the reliability desired. This multiple cell effect accounts for the overlap of adjacent
cells and the fast handoff capability of the CDMA soft handoff method. As mentioned in the pre-
vious soft handoff section, the gain associated with soft handoff can be rolled into one shadow fade
margin.
The following two figures illustrate examples of the required fade margin based on simulations.
These simulations account for the soft handoff advantage in a multi-cell system. The two figures
illustrate the cell area and edge reliabilities as a function of shadow fade margin. Note that the re-
quired margin varies as a function of the propagation model and sectorization. The notation (x
1
, x
2
,
E
d
g
e

R
e
l
i
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
x
3
), in the figures refer to the propagation model, where x
1
is the path loss slope, x
2
is the lognormal
shadow fading standard deviation, and x
3
is the site-to-site correlation (Note: path loss slope x
1
converts to path loss dB/decade by multiplying x
1
by a factor of 10).
Figure 5-9: Area Reliability as a Function of Shadow Fade Margin
For the above analysis, the sector sites assumed an antenna with ninety degree horizontal beam-
width. For a given area reliability, the sector sites required a larger fade margin to account for the
reduction of gain experienced between the sectors.
Sector (3.5, 6.5, 0.5)
Sector (4, 8, 0.5)
Omni (3.5, 6.5, 0.5)
Omni (4, 8, 0.5)
A
r
e
a

R
e
l
i
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 5-10: Edge Reliability as a Function of Shadow Fade Margin
Sector (3.5, 6.5, 0.5)
Sector (4, 8, 0.5)
Omni (3.5, 6.5, 0.5)
Omni (4, 8, 0.5)
E
d
g
e

R
e
l
i
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.2.5 Example Reverse (Uplink - Mobile to Base) Link Budget
The following table provides an example of a reverse path RF link budget for both a mobile/por-
table system and a fixed system. Antenna gains, feeder losses, noise rise, building losses, vehicle
losses, shadow fade margins, etc. will differ from system to system and from site to site (possibly
even from sector to sector) based on the design objectives of the system planner.
Note: 1. Path Loss values shown assume an unloaded CDMA system.
Note: 2. The shadow fade margin assumes the effects of soft handoff and multiple cells.
Table 5-5: Reverse Link Budget Example
Parameter Mobile
Value
Fixed
Value
Unit
Subscriber TX Power P
p
23.0 23.0 dBm
Subscriber TX Feeder Loss L
fp
0.0 0.0 dB
Subscriber Antenna Gain G
p
0.0 1.1 dBi
Base RX Antenna Gain G
b
16.5 16.5 dBi
Base RX Feeder Loss L
fb
3.0 3.0 dB
kT kT -174.0 -174.0 dBm/Hz
Base Noise Figure N
fb
6.0 6.0 dB
Bandwidth (1.2288 MHz) W 60.9 60.9 dB-Hz
Information Rate 9,600 bps R
8
39.82 39.82 dB
Information Rate 14,400 bps R
13
41.58 41.58 dB
Eb/No 9,600 bps E
8
7.0 7.0 dB
Eb/No 14,400 bps E
13
7.3 7.3 dB
Base RX Sensitivity 9,600 bps S
8
-121.2 -121.2 dBm
Base RX Sensitivity 14,400 bps S
13
-119.1 -119.1 dBm
Interference Margin (Noise Rise)
Note: 1
I
m
0.0 0.0 dB
Thermal Noise Floor Margin T
m
0.0 0.0 dB
Body (Head) Loss H
m
2.0 0.0 dB
Vehicle Penetration Loss V
m
7.0 0.0 dB
Building Penetration Loss B
m
0.0 6.0 dB
Shadow Fade Margin
Note: 2
F
m
5.6 5.6 dB
Maximum Isotropic Reverse Path Loss 9,600 bps L
p-8
143.1 147.2 dB
Maximum Isotropic Reverse Path Loss 14,400 bps L
p-13
141.0 145.1 dB
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
where:
Sensitivity and path loss for 8 kb vocoder (9,600 bps)
S
8
= kT + N
fb
+ W + E
8
- (W - R
8
)
L
p-8
= P
p
- L
fp
+ G
p
+ G
b
- L
fb
- S
8
- I
m
- T
m
- H
m
- V
m
- B
m
- F
m
Sensitivity and path loss for 13 kb vocoder (14,400 bps)
S
13
= kT + N
fb
+ W + E
13
- (W - R
13
)
L
p-13
= P
p
- L
fp
+ G
p
+ G
b
- L
fb
- S
13
- I
m
- T
m
- H
m
- V
m
- B
m
- F
m
In comparing the link budget between mobile (portable) and fixed, one will notice three differenc-
es. The first being that the fixed link budget has a subscriber antenna gain of 1.1 dB (assumes FWT
has the whip antenna installed, which is the recommended installation but could be higher with ex-
ternal antennas). It is also assumed that the FWT whip antenna is connected directly to the FWT
base unit and therefore there is no line loss between the FWT base and antenna. Other scenarios
may require that a line loss be added for antennas not connected directly to the base unit. A second
difference is that there is no body loss assumed for the fixed case. The antenna gain and body loss
differences give a 3.1 dB link budget advantage of fixed over mobile.
The third difference is with respect to the building/vehicle penetration loss. For the fixed case, a
building loss value of 6 dB is shown based upon the assumption that the FWT with whip antenna
will be placed close to a window and in a location that will minimize the impact of the building
loss. The amount of building penetration will need to be adjusted (could be greater or less than the
6 dB value assumed here) based on the installation location of the FWT antenna and the building
characteristics (some buildings may allow RF to pass better than others).
For the mobile case, the 7 dB is more for a vehicle penetration value. If in-building is desired than
this value would need to be modified accordingly. If one wished to provide in-building coverage,
additional margin would be required.
The fade margin is set the same for fixed and mobile for these link budget examples. One view is
that the fade margin should be increased to provide for better reliability for a fixed system. This
increased fade margin though would apply to all subscribers. Another way to improve the reliabil-
ity for a fixed system is not by adding margin in the link budget, which effects all users, but to take
the worst performing FWT and replace the whip antenna with an external antenna thereby improv-
ing its performance which ultimately improves that overall reliability. Another view is that the re-
liability for fixed should be higher since fixed is competing with the wireline service. The amount
of fade margin is related to the reliability. If the reliability criteria is increased, the fade margin will
also need to be increased.
Another value which differs between the fixed and mobile is the subscriber antenna height. This is
not part of the link budget above but would be required in the propagation models. The typical sub-
scriber antenna height assumed for the mobile (portable) case is 1.5 meters. The FWT antenna has
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
the ability of being positioned at various heights (on a desk, on a wall, externally on the roof), there-
fore the height of the FWT could range from 1 to 3 or more meters.
These link budgets are examples and may need to be modified to accommodate specific design
goals for a system. Refer to the previous discussion on each of the parameters to determine if al-
terations are required for a specific design.
5.2.6 RF Link Budget Summary
The link budget propagation related parameters have the most variability. These propagation relat-
ed parameters are typically vendor and technology independent. The link budget parameters, but
not the values, listed above can apply to all technologies and frequencies. For instance the loss as-
sociated with the transmission line is dependent upon the frequency.
The following figure demonstrates the impact to the quantity of sites required if one assumption is
made over another. The figure only shows 5 examples. There are many other combinations that are
possible.
Figure 5-11: Impact of dB Trade-off to Number of Sites
5.3 Propagation Models
The propagation model is used in conjunction with the RF link budget to obtain an estimate of the
cell radius based on the allowable path loss from the link budget. Statistical propagation models
are used in budgetary designs to give quick estimates of cell radii within various environments and
ultimately the number of cells required for a system.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
There are many RF propagation factors which could extend or restrict the coverage of a site (prox-
imity to buildings, actual terrain, antenna heights, topology, morphology, etc.). More detailed
propagation models, which include some or all of these factors, will produce more accurate predic-
tions of cell radii. The following sections give additional detail concerning statistical propagation
models.
5.3.1 Free Space Propagation Model
The free space power received by a receiver antenna which is a distance of d from the transmitter
antenna is given by Friis free space equation.
[EQ 5-8]
Where:
P
T
is the transmitted power
G
T
is the transmitting antenna gain
G
R
is the receiving antenna gain
d is the separation distance between antennas
The path loss which represents the signal attenuation as a positive quantity is defined as the differ-
ence between the effective transmitted power and the received power and may or may not include
the effects of the antenna gains. The path loss for the free space model when the antennas are as-
sumed to have unity gain is provided by the following equation.
[EQ 5-9]
Expressed in dB as:
[EQ 5-10]
Where:
d is in meters
f is in Hertz
c is equal to the speed of light (3 x 10
8
meters per second)
P
R
P
T
G
T
G
R
4d
----------
,
_
2
=
P
T
P
R
------
4d
----------
,
_
2
4df
c
------------
,
_
2
=
=
L
FS
dB ( ) 10
P
T
P
R
------
,
_
20
4
c
------
,
_
20 f ( ) 20 d ( ) log + log + log = log =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
[EQ 5-11]
[EQ 5-12]
One is able to see from the above free space equations that 6 dB of loss is associated with a dou-
bling of the frequency. This same relationship also holds for the distance, if the distance is doubled,
6 dB of additional loss will be encountered.
5.3.2 Hata Propagation Model
Among the many technical reports that are concerned with propagation prediction methods for mo-
bile radio, Okumuras
7
report is believed to be the most comprehensive one. In his report, many
useful curves to predict a median value of the received signal strength are presented based on the
data collected in the Tokyo area. The Tokyo urban area was then used as a basic predictor for urban
areas. The correction factors for suburban and open areas are determined based on the transmit fre-
quency. Based on Okumuras prediction curves, empirical formulae for the median path loss, L
p
,
between two isotropic antennae were obtained by Hata and are known as the Hata Empirical For-
mulae for Path Loss
8
. The Hata propagation formulae are used with the link budget calculation to
translate a path loss value to a forward link cell radius and a reverse link cell radius.
For Urban Area:
[EQ 5-13]
For Suburban Area:
[EQ 5-14]
For Quasi Open Area:
[EQ 5-15]
For Open Rural Area:
[EQ 5-16]
7. Okumura, Y., Ohmori, E., Kawano, T., Fukada, K.: "Field strength and ITs Variability in VHF and UHF
Land-Mobile Radio Service", Rev. Elec. Commun. Lab., 16 (1968), pp. 825-873
8. Hata, M.: "Empirical formula for propagation loss in land mobile radio services", IEEE Trans. on Vehicu-
lar and Technology, VT-29 (1980), pp. 317-325
L
FS
dB ( ) 147.56 20 f ( ) 20 d ( ) log + log + =
L
FS
dB ( ) 32.44 20 f (
MHz
) 20 d (
km
) log + log + =
L
U
69.55 26.16 f
c
( ) log 13.82 H
b
( ) log A
Hm
44.9 6.55 H
b
( ) log ] r ( ) log [ + + =
L
S
L
U
2
f
c
28
------
,
_
log
2
5.4 =
L
q
L
U
4.78 f
c
( ) log [ ]
2
18.33 f
c
( ) log 35.94 + =
L
q
L
U
4.78 f
c
( ) log [ ]
2
18.33 f
c
( ) log 40.94 + =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
where:
A
Hm
Correction Factor For Vehicular Station Antenna Height
For a medium-small city:
[EQ 5-17]
For a large city:
[EQ 5-18]
L
u
, L
s
, L
q
= isotropic path loss values
f
c
= carrier frequency in MHz (valid 150 to 1,000 MHz)
H
b
= base antenna height in meters (valid 30 to 200 meters)
H
m
= mobile antenna height in meters (valid 1 to 10 meters)
r = radius of site in kilometers (valid 1 to 20 km)
This model is valid for large and small cells (i.e. base station antenna heights above roof-top levels
of buildings adjacent to the base station).
5.3.3 COST-231-Hata Propagation Model
The COST 231 Subgroup on Propagation Models proposed an improved propagation model for ur-
ban areas to be applied above 1,500 MHz
9
. Like Hatas model, the COST-231-Hata model is based
on the measurements of Okumura. The COST-231-Hata propagation model has been derived by
analyzing Okumuras propagation curves in the upper frequency band. Hatas analysis was restrict-
ed to frequencies below 1,000 MHz. The COST-231-Hata propagation model extended the range
of parameters to include 1,500 to 2,000 MHz. Their modified model was based on Hatas formula
for the basic transmission loss in urban areas (see above).
For Urban Area:
[EQ 5-19]
9. COST 231 - UHF Propagation, "Urban transmission loss models for mobile radio in the 900- and 1,800-
MHz bands", COST 231 TD (91) 73 The Hagne, September, 1991
A
Hm
1.1 f
c
( ) 0.7 log [ ] H
m
1.56 f
c
( ) 0.8 log [ ] =
A
Hm
3.2 11.75 H
m
( ) ] log [
2
4.97 =
L
U
46.3 33.9 f
c
( ) log 13.82 H
b
( ) log A
Hm
44.9 6.55 H
b
( ) log ] r ( ) log [ + + =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
For Suburban Area:
[EQ 5-20]
For Quasi Open Area:
[EQ 5-21]
For Open Rural Area:
[EQ 5-22]
where:
A
Hm
Correction Factor For Vehicular Station Antenna Height
For a medium-small city:
[EQ 5-23]
For a metropolitan center:
[EQ 5-24]
L
u
, L
s
, L
q
= isotropic path loss values
f
c
= carrier frequency in MHz (valid 1,500 to 2,000 MHz)
H
b
= base antenna height in meters (valid 30 to 200 meters)
H
m
= mobile antenna height in meters (valid 1 to 10 meters)
r = radius of site in kilometers (valid 1 to 20 km)
This model is valid for large and small cells (i.e. base station antenna heights above roof-top levels
of buildings adjacent to the base station).
A comparison between the Hata and COST-231-Hata equations show that they are similar except
for the following two terms:
Hata yields
COST-231-Hata yields
L
S
L
U
2
f
c
28
------
,
_
log
2
5.4 =
L
q
L
U
4.78 f
c
( ) log [ ]
2
18.33 f
c
( ) log 35.94 + =
L
q
L
U
4.78 f
c
( ) log [ ]
2
18.33 f
c
( ) log 40.94 + =
A
Hm
1.1 f
c
( ) 0.7 log [ ] H
m
1.56 f
c
( ) 0.8 log [ ] =
A
Hm
1.1 f
c
( ) 0.7 log [ ] H
m
1.56 f
c
( ) 0.8 log [ ] 3 =
69.55 26.16 f
c
( ) log +
46.3 33.9 f
c
( ) log +
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Measurements which have been taken at 1,900 MHz have shown the path loss difference between
800 MHz and 1,900 MHz closer to 11 dB. The COST-231-Hata model was developed to account
for this difference.
5.3.4 Additional Propagation Models
The above propagation models are widely known and are usually referenced when conversing in
more general terms. Numerous books can be referenced for further discussion on these models,
such as those listed in references
10,11
.
These propagation models can be used to obtain an estimate of the expected radius of a site. How-
ever, they do not include the effects of the terrain, ground clutter and antenna patterns experienced
between the transmitter and receiver. In addition, the Hata and COST 231 Hata model are depen-
dent upon the environment classification. Defining the area types are fairly subjective and the en-
tire cell site is considered to be the defined area type. For instance, if an area is assumed to be urban
but is more realistically suburban, a 12 dB impact results (many more sites would be specified that
what would really be needed). In addition, these propagation models do not portray ground clutter
such as a forested area, though modifications can be made to the propagation model or the link bud-
get to account for loss due to foliage or forest.
One model that does include these effects is Motorolas propagation model in Motorolas NetPlan
propagation analysis tool. This propagation model is based on work from Longley&Rice, Okumu-
ra, Bullington and field measurement data. It takes into account the effects of ground reflections,
diffractions and line of sight propagation. It defines the path loss with respect to dipole antennas.
Hata or COST-231-Hata propagation models assume path loss is defined with respect to isotropic
antennas.
As was mentioned in the introduction, this sophistication in a propagation tool is required to pro-
vide a more realistic portrayal of the coverage for a system.
5.4 Forward Link Coverage
In Section 5.2 we discussed the CDMA subscriber-to-base link (reverse or uplink). This is a many-
to-one link, i.e. many subscribers communicating with a single base station (or a fixed number of
base stations). Hence, the link can be simply characterized using a link budget with additional mar-
gin included for interference. This margin is typically measured in terms of noise rise at the cell,
which is specified in terms of the operating point relative to a fixed asymptotic capacity (pole), e.g.
operating at 75% of the pole results in a 6 dB noise rise.
The CDMA base-to-subscriber (forward or downlink) is a one-to-many link, i.e. a single base sta-
tion (or a fixed number of base stations) communicating with many subscribers. This link is some-
10. Parsons, David, "The Mobile Radio Propagation Channel", Copyright 1992, Reprinted 1996 by John
Wiley & Sons Ltd.
11. Rappaport, Theodore S., "Wireless Communications Principles & Practices", Copyright 1996 by Prentice
Hall PTR
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
what more complicated to analyze, and it does not lend itself to a simple link budget method. The
reason for the difficulty is:
In the absence of multipath, the use of orthogonal Walsh codes on the downlink removes the
intra-cell interference. With multipath, intra-cell interference causes a reduction in signal-to-
noise ratio. However, this is mitigated (in most cases) by the fact that multipath improves the
mobile receiver sensitivity.
Mobile receiver sensitivity is characterized in terms of E
b
/(I
oc
+N
o
), energy-per-bit over other-
cell interference (plus noise) power density. Here we assume that there is sufficient power al-
located on downlink such that thermal noise does not effect the performance. It has been deter-
mined, using simulations, that 13 Watts is sufficient to balance the uplink and downlink of the
CDMA system. These simulations assumed mobile noise figure = 10 dB, base noise figure = 6
dB, and mobile PA power of 200 mW.
The downlink modem sensitivity varies substantially with multipath (or soft handoff) and mo-
bile speed. For example, E
b
/I
oc
in 1-path (i.e. no multipath) Rayleigh fading at slow mobile
speed can be as high as 20-25 dB, whereas with 3-path, E
b
/I
oc
is less than 8 dB.
Soft handoff also complicates the downlink, because typically mobiles in soft handoff require
less power (from each cell site). On the other hand, the mobiles at the edge of the soft handoff
region experience high interference, and the modem performance (without multipath) is the
worst. Thus, for downlink, it is not sufficient to balance the link to the edge of the cell, but it
has to be balanced to the edge of the soft handoff region. Note that the soft handoff regions vary
dynamically as a function of load in the desired and the surrounding cells, as well as the prop-
agation environment.
Due to the above mentioned factors, there are no closed form (or simplified) solutions for the
downlink. Appendix VII. includes a design example which illustrates forward link analysis, how-
ever to completely characterize the process one needs to run a simulation.
5.4.1 Power Amplifier Considerations
It is important to account for the power requirements when designing and optimizing a CDMA sys-
tem. Forward link power at the base station will limit coverage and may limit capacity. Here are
some guidelines to assist the system engineer.
5.4.1.1 Equipment Capabilities
In these guidelines, two PA parameters are frequently referred to: the Average Rated Power (ARP
or Steady State Rating) and the High Power Alarm Rating (HPA). The table below is neither com-
prehensive nor, necessarily, current; the reader is referred to equipment specifications for details
on the BTS product of interest.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 5-6: PA Ratings for Some BTS Products
a. The High Power Alarm Rating (dB) is here represented in terms of dB above the Average Rated Power.
It is also a worst case specification; typical ratings are 0.5 to 1.0 dB better.
b. This is a TrunkedPower BTS. It has four LPA modules serving one three-sector carrier. Its Carrier
ARP is shared across all three sectors. The High Power Alarm functions on a total carrier power basis, as
opposed to an individual sector basis as for non-trunked BTSs. A sector-equivalent HPA rating is shown
here only for comparative purposes, and is based on a conservative trunking benefit of 1.1 dB.
c. This product, having no fans, has its Average Rated Power thermally limited.
The following table illustrates the pilot RF power adjustment range capability for several different
CDMA BTS products. The upper specification is determined by the BTS RF gain when the BTS
is operating with a pilot digital gain of 127. The lower specification, corresponding to a
pilot+page+sync signal, depends on a specific BTS transmit dynamic range. For a BTS equipped
with Single Tone LPA, an external attenuator is required when operating at lower than the
minimum specification. For a BTS equipped with a multitone LPA, the minimum total power
(shown in note b. of the table) must be maintained for proper operation. This can be achieved by
implementing one of the following: 1) multi-carrier operation, 2) raising the minimum operating
level, or 3) adding an external attenuator. The table below is neither comprehensive nor,
necessarily, current; the reader is referred to equipment specifications for details on the BTS
product of interest.
BTS Product Frequency
(MHz)
Number of
PA
Modules
Sector
Average
Rated Power
(W)
Sector/Carrier
High Power
Alarm Rating
(W)
Sector/Carrier
High Power
Alarm Rating
(dB)
a
Sector/Carrier
SC611 1900 1 7
c
28 6
SC614T 1900 (4
b
) 16/48 32
b
/76 3
b
/2
SC4852E 1900 2 20 32 2
SC4852R 1900 4 45 71 2
SC604 1900 2 10
c
24 3.8
SC611 800 1 7
c
32 6.6
SC614 800 2 20 32 2
SC2450 800 2 20 40 2
SC4812 800 2 22.5 36 2
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
a. Maximum pilot RF power as determined by the BTS RF gain with pilot digital gain of 127. The minimum
limit is with overhead channels (pilot+page+sync).
b. LPA power must be converged first before operating at the minimum level, which is assumed for the pilot
beacon application. The minimum level for the LPA to converge depends on the LPA types: 36 dBm for
125W ELPA; 40 dBm for 70W NAMPS/SC9600 LPA; and 42 dBm for 125W NAMPS/SC9600 LPA.
c. Maximum pilot power limits to 36 dBm with SGLF4009KE BBX.
Additional factors that will have an impact on the power amplifier are:
The use of external duplexers should be accounted for by including an additional 0.5 dB
of loss, nominally. For Motorolas SC4800-series "E" options (i.e. outdoor products)
and the SC600-series, duplexers are included and the specifications will already reflect
the duplexer loss.
For multiple carriers, the use of external combining should be accounted for. Nominal
figures include ~3.5 dB of loss; although low-loss combiners (~1.8 dB) are available.
For example, if the insertion loss of cavity combiners and associated cabling was on the
order of 1.8 dB, then the 20 Watts associated with the SC2450 would drop to 13.2 Watts.
For Motorola products with internal combiners (e.g. SC4812 at 800MHz), the specifica-
tions will already reflect the combiner loss.
Products exploiting PA trunking across sectors (e.g. SC614T at 1.9 GHz) have both sec-
tor-carrier and site-carrier limits of which to be aware. For example, the SC614T at 1.9
Table 5-7: BTS Pilot Power Adjustment Range
a
Pilot Power Adjustment Range
BTS Product Frequency
(MHz)
Minimum PPS
a
(dBm)
Maximum Pilot
(dBm)
SC604 1900 24.0 33.0
SC604 800 27.0 36.0
SC614T 1900 27.0 36.0
SC6x1 800/1700/1900 23.0 33.0
SC2400 ELPA 800
23.0
b
40.0
SC2450 800 30.0
33.0
c
SC4820 1700 27.0 36.0
SC485x/SC485xE 1900 27.0 36.0
SC4812 800 23.0 36.0
SC9600/SC9620 800
23.0
b
40.0
SC9640/SC4840/SC2440 800 (JCDMA)
23.0
b
40.0
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
GHz can deliver 48 Watts total for the site-carrier, but is rated for 40 Watts for an indi-
vidual sector-carrier.
Verify that your Pilot, Page, Sync, and Traffic Channel power relationships can be
established. Although the PA may be rated to deliver the total power out you desire, it
may be the case that other devices are limiting the input signals into the LPA or the
ratios among them. For example, there are gain limits on the Paging, Sync, and Traffic
channels of 127 (7F
HEX
), but the Pilot has an upper limit of 1023 (3FF
HEX
). Adjusting
any pilot gain to achieve ~4 Watts or more may require the Pilot gain setting to exceed
127 and thereby impact the ratio of maximum traffic channel gain to Pilot gain, which
may impact performance.
Account for any thermal limitations. Typically for indoor products, the operating tem-
perature range is 0C to 50C. The ARP is expressed in dBm or Watts at 25C, the mid-
point in the temperature range. An allowance for variation due to temperature is
provided. For example, the SC4812 for 800MHz specification is as follows.
Transmitter Total Output Power Out with 2 LPAs (non-duplexed):
43.5 dBm (22.5 W) @25C t2 dB over temperature.
When the base station is to be operating inside an air conditioned environment, then the
43.5 dBm would be used for planning purposes. But, if the base station is to be
subjected to warm extremes (i.e. close to 50C), then greater consideration should be
given to the anticipated power requirements.
Some self-contained products have their ARP "thermally limited" due to lack of fans.
Additionally, to protect against overheating, the SC601 and SC604 products have a
thermal "foldback" feature that dynamically and proportionately reduces the output
power beginning at 35C (for operation at the specified ARP) up to a maximum of 3 dB
at 50C. (Note that IS-97 tolerates a power out variation of +2 dB to -4dB over the
temperature range.) Conversely, the SC611, SC614, and SC614T products only
foldback output power above the ARP or maximum operating temperature
specifications.
The SC4852E is rated for 180 Watts or 18 PA modules. This permits 3 sectors of 2
carriers with each sector-carrier at 30 Watts or, alternatively, 2 sectors of 2 carriers with
each sector-carrier at 40 Watts. The SC4852 is rated for 40 Watts ARP for all 6 sector-
carriers.
5.4.1.2 CDMA Signal Power Distribution Characteristics and PA Sizing
There are three characteristics of the CDMA signal power distribution which are useful in discus-
sions on PA requirements and are to be compared to PA equipment capabilities. These include:
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
1. The Long Term Average (LT-AVG): represents an average over 30 minutes or more.
For the PA to be sized correctly, the LT-AVG must be less than or equal to the Average
Rated Power (ARP).
2. The Short Term Average (ST-AVG): represents an average over 5 minutes.
For products that are not thermally limited, it may prove useful, as a rule of thumb, to
compare the ST-AVG to the ARP. Greater detail on this can be found in the next
section.
3. The Very Short Term Average (VST-AVG): represents an average over less than 2
seconds.
For the PA to be sized correctly, the VST-AVG must be less than or equal to the High
Power Alarm Rating.
Note that any peak excursions significantly higher than the VST-AVG are of very short
duration and are managed by PA overload protection mechanisms.
5.4.1.3 General Power Relationships.
As a result of various simulation studies, the following characteristics of a system that is interfer-
ence limited (i.e. fully loaded) have been derived and may be considered rules of thumb:
1. The LT-AVG is approximately 5 times the Pilot power.
2. The ST-AVG is approximately 10 times the Pilot power. This is 3 dB over the LT-AVG.
3. The VST-AVG is approximately 15 times the Pilot power. This is ~4.8 dB over the LT-
AVG and ~1.8 dB over the ST-AVG.
The reader may note that, given the deviation of the power distribution, the system designer will
generally find the indoor products (i.e. SC4852, SC2450, and SC4812) and the outdoor products
with fans (i.e. SC614, SC614T, SC4852E) to be HPA limited. Since the ST-AVG is ~1.8 dB below
the VST-AVG and the ARP is 2 dB below the HPA (worst case), using a ST-AVG comparison to
the ARP can provide a convenient rule of thumb for estimating your PA requirements for these
products.
Those products that have no fans (i.e. are thermally limited) include the SC601, SC604, and the
SC611. Both the SC601 and the SC604, with their HPA rating 3.8 and 4.8 dB over the ARP (worst
case), respectively, are close to being balanced in terms of HPA and ARP limits relative to the
CDMA signal power distribution. Conversely, the SC611, at 1.9GHz and 800MHz, is an excep-
tion; with its HPA of 6 dB or more over the ARP, it is definitely ARP limited.
Based on simulations of CDMA carriers at capacity, the average forward link power per traffic
channel relative to the Pilot power can be estimated. For Rate Set 1 (RS1), ~13.5% of the Pilot
power would be consumed on average. For Rate Set 2 (RS2), ~27.8%. For a 2 Watt Pilot, the av-
erage traffic channel power is ~270mW and 556mW for RS1 and RS2, respectively. These figures
take into account the Voice Activity Factor. [Greater detail on these estimates can be found in
Section 5.4.1.5.] The number of forward links associated with this estimate is the 98th-ile of for-
ward links and would include soft/softer links (i.e. 2% Erlang B on Walsh Code usage). This
would also correspond to the ST-AVG.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Although RS2 consumes approximately double the power of RS1, it also carries only approximate-
ly half the subscribers. Consequently, an LPA sized correctly for a RS2 carrier at capacity would
be sized correctly for RS1 as well. The transition, therefore, between RS2 and RS1 (i.e. EVRC)
would not require any additional PA power.
There is a level of Pilot power which will balance the reverse link. To increase the Pilot power
beyond this level will not significantly improve the composite area reliability since the reverse link
becomes limiting. For this reason, it is recommended that the Pilot powers be designed to levels
sufficient to balance the reverse link, but not excessively so as to conserve the PA resource.
The introduction of the EMAXX chip set (supported in SC Software Release 2.8 and only with cer-
tain BTS products) will improve the reverse link budget by an approximate 3 dB for systems that
are fully loaded (average rise levels >= 2 dB). This improvement would, for initial system designs,
necessitate a compensatory increase in forward power by 3 dB to balance the links.
The introduction of a tower-top amplifier will improve the reverse link by effectively negating the
losses between the antenna and the top of the rack (approximately 3 to 4 dB, refer back to
Section 5.2.3.2.3). This improvement (as with the introduction of the EMAXX chip set) would ne-
cessitate a compensatory increase in forward power to balance the links. When TTA is introduced
under the assumption of light loading (e.g. "highway site"), it is more likely that the links can be
balanced. It is not recommended to use TTAs elsewhere.
A 2:1 deployment in overlaying analog will require an approximate 3 dB increase in forward power
to overcome the Inter-System Interference (ISI). For a 1:1 overlay of analog, the PA requirements
are no different than normal.
5.4.1.4 Design Guidelines
When initially designing a CDMA system, the following two points should be kept in mind in order
to minimize the chance of sectors not having sufficient power out capabilities.
Design the system with low pilot powers in mind. It may be advisable to consider using
a 1 Watt pilot as the norm.
Inter-system Interference (ISI) will require higher pilot powers.
Motorolas NetPlan CDMA Simulator (or comparable design tool) can be utilized to generate sta-
tistics for a CDMA design. These statistics can be analyzed to determine if any sectors will have a
potential PA issue.
Evaluate the coverage/capacity/quality impacts of reduced pilot powers.
The confidence level is impacted by the number of Monte Carlo runs performed in gen-
erating the data.
Evaluate the power requirements of each sector-carrier. Outputs from the CDMA Simu-
lator include statistics on traffic channel (TCH) power and forward links (i.e. Walsh
Codes). Details on this evaluation should be found in the RF Design Procedure.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
For conventionally powered BTS products (i.e. no sharing of PA resources across multi-
ple sectors and/or carriers), it is only necessary to determine the LT-AVG and VST-
AVG requirements for the sector-carrier and then compare them with the ARP and HPA
ratings, respectively. The ratings must exceed the requirements.
For TrunkedPower BTS products, there are two steps:
1. Determine the LT-AVG and VST-AVG requirements over the appropriate set of
sector-carriers over which the PA resource is shared and then compare them with the
ARP and HPA ratings, respectively. The ratings must exceed the requirements.
2. Determine the LT-AVG requirement for each individual sector-carrier and then com-
pare this with the ARP rating for a sector-carrier. The rating must exceed the require-
ment.
As has been stated earlier, the SC614T at 1.9 GHz is rated for 40 Watts in any individual
sector-carrier and 48 Watts total for 3 sectors of 1 carrier.
5.4.1.4.1 Comparison to Average Rated Power
The following steps can be performed to obtain the LT-AVG for the sector-carrier(s) which can be
compared with the product ARP specification (for some products, these values are provided in
Table 5-6 on page 34).
1. Take the average of the TCH power distribution.
For trunked PAs, generate the average for the individual sector-carrier for comparison
against sector-carrier ARP limits and then again for all the sector-carriers over which the
resource is to be shared for comparison against total ARP limits. For the total ARP
comparison, the power statistics must first be summed across the appropriate set of
sector-carriers within each Monte Carlo run. Although this will not impact the average,
it will impact the deviation.
2. Add in the constant power components associated with the Pilot, Page, and Sync
channels.
3. Compare this with the ARP of the PA. It must be lower.
Note: to compare the ST-AVG to the ARP, use the 98th-ile of the TCH power distribution.
5.4.1.4.2 Comparison to High Power Alarm Rating
The following steps can be performed to obtain the VST-AVG for the sector-carrier(s) which can
be compared with the product HPA specification (for some products, these values are provided in
Table 5-6 on page 34).
1. Take the 98th-ile of the TCH power distribution.
For trunked PAs, generate the average for all the sector-carriers over which the resource
is to be shared for comparison against total HPA limits. The power statistics must first
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
be summed across the appropriate set of sector-carriers within each Monte Carlo run.
The 98th-ile is then taken across the summed set of statistics.
2. Scale it up by a factor of 1.5. This compensates for variations in the voice activity factor
(up to a level that corresponds to the 98th percentile of the binomial distribution).
3. Add in the constant power components associated with the Pilot, Page, and Sync
channels.
4. Compare this with the High Power Alarm Rating. It should be lower.
5.4.1.4.3 Comparison to Walsh Code Limit
1. Take the average number of forward links. This may be interpreted as Walsh Code
Erlangs.
2. Calculate a maximum number of forward links based on 2% GOS Erlang B for the
number of Walsh Code Erlangs derived in step 1.
3. Compare step 2 results to the Walsh Code limit. It should be lower.
5.4.1.5 General Power Requirements
In the absence of more precise simulations, here are some definitions and equations that can be
used to provide power requirements as a function of rate set, pilot power, and number of forward
links.
Definitions:
P
pilot
is the Pilot power.
P
page
is the Page power (commonly 75% of P_pilot).
P
sync
is the Sync power (commonly 10% of P_pilot).
FwdLinks
50th-ile
is equivalent to Walsh Code Erlangs. It can be derived from the Effec-
tive Traffic Load using the Soft/Softer Handoff Factor.
FwdLinks
98th-ile
is equivalent to the number of Walsh Codes that result from taking
Walsh Code Erlangs at 2% Erlang B.
V
eff
(Effective Voice Activity Factor) is scaled up from the normal VAF (Voice Activity
Factor) to compensate for Power Control Bit puncturing on the forward link. The PCB
bits are transmitted at a constant high power to maintain the integrity of the closed loop
power control mechanism. Scaling the VAF is one method of compensating for the
effect on forward power output. V_eff is 0.55 and 0.47 for rate sets 1 and 2, respectively.
V
wc
represents, for the VAF binomial distribution, a ratio of the 98th percentile to the
mean. A value of 1.5 is used.
P
tch_avg
is the Average Traffic Channel Power. As a fraction of P_pilot, these powers
are 24.6% and 59.1% for rate sets 1 and 2, respectively.
Assume:
[EQ 5-25] P
Pilot
P
Page
P
Sync
+ + 1.85 P
Pilot
=
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.4.1.5.1 Minimum ARP Based on LT-AVG Estimate
The following equations can be used to determine the minimum ARP specification based on the
Pilot power and the average number of links.
[EQ 5-26]
Rate Set 1:
[EQ 5-27]
Rate Set 2:
[EQ 5-28]
Note: to compare the ST-AVG to the ARP, use FwdLinks
98th-ile
in place of FwdLinks
50th-ile
.
5.4.1.5.2 Minimum HPA Based on VST-AVG Estimate
The following equations can be used to determine the minimum HPA specification based on P
pilot
and FwdLinks
98th-ile
.
[EQ 5-29]
Rate Set 1:
[EQ 5-30]
Rate Set 2:
[EQ 5-31]
Alternatively, an upper estimate on FwdLinks
98th-ile
can be determined based on the HPA rating
and P
pilot
. This may serve as a Walsh Code limit that will block traffic at levels that near the HPA
rating.
Rate Set 1:
[EQ 5-32]
Rate Set 2:
[EQ 5-33]
AverageRatedPower P
Pilot
P
Page
P
Sync
FwdLink
50th ile
P
tch_avg
V
eff
+ + + =
AverageRatedPower P
Pilot
1.85 [ F ( wdLink
50th ile
0.1353) ] + =
AverageRatedPower P
Pilot
1.85 [ F ( wdLink
50th ile
0.2778) ] + =
HighPowerAlarmRating P
Pil ot
P
Page
P
Sync
FwdLink
98t h i le
P
tch_avg
V
ef f
V
wc
+ + + =
Pilot
1.85 [ F ( wdLink
98th ile
0.2030) ] + =
Pilot
1.85 [ F ( wdLink
98th ile
0.4167) ] + =
FwdLink
98th ile
Pilot
) 1.85] 0.2030 ( [ =
FwdLink
98th ile
Pilot
) 1.85] 0.4167 ( [ =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
5.4.1.5.3 Exceeding the High Power Alarm Rating
An LPA module which exceeds its High Power Alarm Rating will enter an OOS_RAM mainte-
nance state. The consequences and possible operational response to this event were outlined in FYI
No. SCCDM-1997.84 March 20, 1997. Design and optimization responses to this event include the
following:
Add more PA power. Depending upon the BTS product and its installed configuration,
there may be an ability to add an additional PA module.
Re-optimize the pilot power to a lower level. Be careful to review the potential
consequences on coverage. If the sites involved have the potential for significant
overlap, then lowering pilot powers may be the appropriate response.
Re-optimize cell forward power control parameters. For example, reducing the Nominal
Traffic Channel Gain can reduce the overall output power and PA requirements.
A Walsh Code limit can be implemented which will maintain traffic on a sector-carrier
basis to levels which should not exceed the High Power Alarm Rating of the PA.
Determining this threshold can be based on the information provided here. Once Walsh
Code limits are in place, Walsh Code usage and blocking statistics may be monitored
and projected against the limit per standard traffic engineering guidelines.
5.4.1.6 Government Regulations
Certain government rules and regulations may exist which prohibit an operator from transmitting
an excess of power. For instance, the FCC regulations limit the Base Station output power to 1640
Watts EIRP per carrier for PCS systems.
12
Knowing the maximum power for a sector at the top
of the rack, this FCC limit will translate into a limit on antenna gain offset by cable losses. For
example, the SC614T is rated for 40 Watts maximum for a sector-carrier. Consequently, the max-
imum gain permitted between the top of the rack and the effective radiated power would be G
max
:
[EQ 5-34]
The reader is advised to determine if any regulations exist in the area of their system.
5.5 CDMA Repeaters
CDMA system coverage can be traded off for more capacity. This is reflected on the reverse link
by determining the acceptable interference margin allowed which helps determine reverse link
coverage. By designing the system with a relatively small interference margin, less users can be
supported but a larger coverage area is supported. For a relatively larger interference margin,
more users can be supported but for a smaller coverage area. Similarly, on the forward link, it is
12. Title 47, Part 24, Sub-Part E, Section 24.232.
G
max
10 P
out
P
in
( ) log 10 1640 40 ( ) log 16.13 dB = = =
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
the required PA power that is used to determine the desired mixture of coverage and capacity. For
a given load, the smaller the coverage area the smaller the required PA power, while the larger the
coverage area the larger the required PA power. For a given coverage area, the required PA power
is directly proportional to the load up to the point where the system becomes forward link interfer-
ence limited such that increasing PA power does not maintain or improve SNR.
In some cases, it is desirable to use transceivers called repeaters (see Figure 5-12) to boost CDMA
signals. This is especially useful in areas where the signal from the base station is blocked by
some kind of RF obstruction. In this case, a repeater can be used between the donor base station
and the served subscriber to boost the signals. The repeater helps to get both the base station and
subscriber signals around or through such RF obstructions. Repeaters can typically be used to pro-
vide improved coverage for the following applications: terrain limited coverage, in-building cov-
erage, and tunnel/subway/parking garage/underground coverage. Using repeaters in this way
maintains the coverage of the donor base station while eliminating the need for another base sta-
tion (assuming the donor base station has enough capacity availability to accept the additional
load from the repeater). This is economical as long as the repeater is significantly cheaper than the
type of base station to be added (e.g. SC611 or SC614) and/or the site costs are less expensive. In
the overlap areas of coverage between the donor BTS and the repeater, there is enough delay in
the repeater signal path such that the mobile can resolve the signals between the two sources. The
same will be true for the reverse link back to the BTS.
Figure 5-12: Typical Repeater Application
When using repeaters in a typical application to overcome an RF obstruction within a BTSs cov-
erage area, it is important that you follow the repeater vendors installation & optimization engi-
neering guidelines. Proper donor to subscriber antenna isolation at the repeater may be difficult to
achieve for some applications. The repeater diagram in Figure 5-12 shows the donor antenna at a
higher elevation than the subscriber antenna. This represents a repeater application which takes
advantage of vertical separation between the donor antenna and subscriber antenna in order to
Base
Station Repeater
Repeater
Coverage
BTS Cell
Coverage
Donor
Antenna
Subscriber
Antenna
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
achieve the isolation requirements. If the repeaters antennas do not have adequate isolation from
each other, the repeaters amplifiers may start oscillating. Placing the donor antenna at a higher
elevation may also provide a direct line-of-sight path to the donor base station which is highly
recommended for all repeater implementations. In some applications, the subscriber antenna may
be mounted at a higher elevation than the donor antenna. Just as long as the isolation and direct
line-of-sight requirements are satisfied, the optimal antenna locations may depend upon the par-
ticular application. Pilot pollution can be made worse if the repeater donor antenna is not narrow
enough and localized to the desired donor base station sector. Since the repeater repeats the entire
CDMA carrier (signal plus noise), it is important that the repeater location be line-of-sight to
donor BTS with a dominant PN.
It is also important to set the repeater gain levels for the RX & TX paths properly. Setting the gain
too high for the repeaters TX path to the subscriber could cause the repeater TX PA to be over
driven under a loaded condition (this may not be a major concern if the repeater is designed with
gain compression). Setting the repeaters RX path back to the donor BTS too high could cause the
BTS receiver to desense. In a normal application (i.e. the repeater is NOT being used for maxi-
mum range extension), the repeater vendors typically recommend the repeater RX gain back to
the BTS to be set lower (up to 10 dB) than the repeater TX gain to the subscriber to ensure that the
repeater does not desense the donor BTS. Figure 5-13 below shows the potential effects of reduc-
ing the range of a donor BTS if the gain settings are not set properly.
Figure 5-13: Potential Range Reduction Due to Repeaters
With the assumption stated in the chart, the Y axis in the figure above represents the difference in
repeater forward TX power relative to the BTS power plus the difference in the repeater forward
B T S R X R a n g e
1 , 2 , o r 4 R e p e a t e r s
3 . 2 6 R F p r o p l o s s
-20.0
-15.0
-10.0
- 5.0
0.0
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
N o r m a l i z e d R X C e l l c o v e r a g e r e f e r e n c e d t o B T S n o i s e f i g u r e
R
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

T
x

&

R
x

L
i
n
k

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
s
1 Repeater
2 Repeaters
4 Repeaters
distance BTS with 1 Repeater
BTS
Path Loss
Mobile to BTS
L i n k L o s s = P a t h L o s s + C a b l e L o s s + A n t e n n a G a i n + R e p e a t e r G a i n
A s s u m p t i o n
R e v e r s e L i n k R e p e a t e r t o B T S = F o r w a r d L i n k B T S t o R e p e a t e r
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
TX gain relative to the repeater reverse RX gain. Table 5-8 below provides an example of how to
calculate the relative TX & RX link difference.
Table 5-8: Relative TX & RX Link Difference Example
With this example, the donor BTSs normalized RX cell coverage at a -10dB relative TX & RX
link difference is ~96% of the BTSs coverage area without the repeater (i.e. the repeater reduced
the coverage area by ~4%). Typical settings of the relative TX & RX link differences are -15 dB
or better which will cause little to no effect on the normal coverage area of the donor BTS.
5.5.1 CDMA Repeaters Used for Range Extension
Another application is to use repeaters to extend the range of a CDMA cell site or sector for the
case where there is no RF obstruction, such as down a highway. The range extension obtained is
largely limited by the following:
How much the repeater desensitizes the base station (for maximizing range of the
repeater, typically a 3 dB desense of the donor BTS allows optimum range of the BTS &
repeater combination). Note: maximizing overall coverage of the BTS and repeater will
cause a 3 dB desense reduction in the donor BTSs range.
The cascaded noise figure at the repeater (determined by the noise figures of the repeater
and base station including the transmission gain between them).
Repeater receiver sensitivity on the reverse link and ability to maintain diversity recep-
tion back at the donor base station (repeater with transmit diversity is used for link back
to donor base station to compensate for repeater not having diversity reception and rake
receiver for subscriber to repeater link).
The effect of the loss of soft handoff of the donor site at the repeater location.
The size of the repeater PA used on its forward link (typically 6 Watts).
Given these limitations it has been determined that there is currently little range extension (24-
26%) using existing commercial repeaters (see Figure 5-14 below).
BTS TX Pilot Power 30 dBm a
Repeater TX Pilot Power 25 dBm b
Repeater TX Path Gain 70 dB c
Repeater RX Path Gain 65 dB d
Relative TX & RX Link Differences -10 dB (b-a) + (d-c)
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 5-14: Repeater Range Analysis Results
Figure 5-14 above shows the percent improvement in range due to adding a repeater (normalized
to the BTS range without the repeater) for different BTS donor configurations. This analysis used
a typical noise figure value of 4.5 dB. For a guaranteed coverage calculation or prediction, it may
be necessary to use the six sigma value for the noise figure specification which is usually 1.5 to
2.5 dB higher than the typical value. A 20W LPA was assumed for all cases above. The dBi num-
bers represent antenna gain and TTA indicates a tower top LNA was used at the BTS to reduce
the BTS effective noise figure. The range is largely limited by the reverse link allowing about a
25% increase in range. While the forward link range extension can be large (above 50%) for a
donor site using a CSM chip set, it quickly drops as the receiver sensitivity is improved by using
an EMAXX chip set and then again if tower top low noise amplifiers (LNAs) are used to reduce
antenna cable loss. Going from left to right, the CSM to the EMAXX, and then to the CSM w/
TTA, each configuration improves the receiver sensitivity of the BTS, which in effect increases
the normalized range of the BTS. This also increases the power requirements of the BTS LPAs,
which is why the forward link improvement decreases quickly due to the fixed 20W LPA assump-
tion. When you consider the increase in normalized range with each configuration change, the
overall reverse link improvement in range is increasing, but the percentage improvement due to
the repeater is still around the 24% range.
By making some simplifying assumptions, the cascaded noise figures for a repeater and base sta-
tion configuration becomes more easier to calculate. Figure 5-15 represents an alternate repeater
analysis with the following assumptions.
R a n g e I m p r o v e me n t U s i n g R e p e a t e r
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
S y s t e m C o n f i g u r a t i o n
P
e
r
c
e
n
t

I
n
c
r
e
a
s
e

i
n

R
a
n
g
e
Rev Link Increase
Fw d Link Increase
Rev Link Increase 26% 26% 26% 26% 24% 24%
Fw d Link Increase 58% 59% 35% 38% 10% 13%
CSM 17dBi CSM 23dBi EMAXX 17dBi EMAXX 23dBi
CSM
TTA .17dBi
CSM
TTA .23dBi
BTS NF=4.5 dB
Rptr NF=7.0dB
NIM=0dB or 3dB desense
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The total loss/gain is the same between the forward and reverse links
The forward link loss/gain is measured from the Forward TX output of the base station
to the Forward TX output of the repeater
The reverse link loss/gain is measured from the Reverse RX input of the repeater to the
Reverse RX input of the base station
The base and repeater antennas have the same cable losses and antenna gains serving the
subscribers
Figure 5-15: Alternate Repeater Analysis
The Y axis in the above figure is identical to that of Figure 5-13 (see page 44 for further details).
In a maximum range extension application, the repeater TX and RX gains are typically equal and
thus cancel themselves out. As a result, the title in the above figure only mentions the difference
in repeater to BTS TX powers. This alternate analysis also shows a ~26% increase in range. An
interesting point to note is that in this type of repeater configuration (maximum range), the donor
BTS range is reduced by over 40%, primarily due to the lack of soft handoff gain and the repeater
desense of BTS receiver. It also shows the expected reductions in overall range as the relative
power levels are changed.
5.5.2 Potential Issues with Repeaters
Repeaters have been successfully installed and used in CDMA markets. By carefully following
the guidelines provided by the repeater vendor, it should be possible to engineer, install, and opti-
mize a repeater to enhance system coverage for most repeater applications.
Below is a summary of some of the issues regarding repeater engineering, installation, and opti-
mization:
B T S a n d R e p e a t e r R X R a n g e
3 . 2 6 R F p r o p l o s s
-20.0
-15.0
-10.0
- 5.0
0.0
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
N o r m a l i z e d R X C e l l c o v e r a g e r e f e r e n c e d t o B T S n o i s e f i g u r e
R
e
p
e
a
t
e
r

F
o
r
w
a
r
d

T
X

p
o
w
e
r

r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

t
o

B
T
S
distance BTS distance Repeater
B T S l o s e s - 4 d B s o f t h a n d o f f g a i n R e p e a t e r l o s e s - 1 d B f a d i n g t o B T S - 0 . 5 d B E c / I o F i n g e r s
P ath Loss
Mobile to Repeater
P ath Loss
Mobile to BTS
L i n k L o s s = P a t h L o s s + C a b l e L o s s e s + A n t e n n a G a i n s + R e p e a t e r G a i n
A s s u m p t i o n
R e v e r s e L i n k R e p e a t e r t o B T S = F o r w a r d L i n k B T S t o R e p e a t e r
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Pilot pollution can be made worse if the repeater donor antenna is not narrow enough
and localized to the desired donor base station sector. Since the repeater repeats the
entire CDMA carrier (signal plus noise), it is important that the repeater location be line-
of-sight to donor BTS with a dominant PN.
Complicated field calibration required for good performance requiring skilled techni-
cians. In a normal application, the RX link gain settings of the repeater must be set such
that you do not desense the donor BTS receiver, which can affect the performance and
range of the donor BTS. The TX link gain settings must be set such that the PA does not
become overloaded under a loaded condition (verify if PAs are designed with gain com-
pression) and should also take into consideration the rated PA power (different repeaters
have different PA ratings, i.e. 2W or 6W PAs).
Potential transmitter and receiver isolation problems (especially in a cluttered environ-
ment). Proper donor to subscriber antenna isolation at the repeater may be difficult to
achieve for some applications. The repeaters antennas must have adequate isolation
from each other to prevent the repeater from oscillating.
More complicated system to maintain and monitor especially if tower top LNAs are
used. Have to adjust/optimize search windows and open loop power control parameters.
The expansion design of a multiple carrier system becomes more complex. Duplication
of repeater hardware & installation is required with each additional carrier added to the
donor BTS.
Increased BTS Donor PA requirements with Repeaters used for range extension. Based
on link budget analysis the BTS donor PA requires about 15 to 20 Watts of power for its
short term average. This assumes that the Repeater PA is rated for a short term average
level of 6.3 Watts.
Some repeater vendors offer a diversity receive repeater and others do not. An adjust-
ment to the repeater link budget is required depending on the diversity benefit of the
repeater.
5.6 Theoretical vs. Simulator
Because of the interrelated nature of CDMA coverage, quality and capacity, Motorola utilizes the
NetPlan Simulator to estimate capacity of individual system installations.
The Motorola NetPlan Simulator may be used for analyzing DS-CDMA performance in proposed
and existing systems resulting in predicted capacity, required system parameters and hardware
loading information. It provides for a method of understanding the inter-relationship between cov-
erage, capacity, and quality. It permits investigations into real Cellular/PCS system concerns such
as edge effects, excess background noise, propagation anomalies, antenna beamwidth, mobile dis-
tribution, receiver sensitivity impact, interference mitigation, power control and handoff. It also
provides performance levels and determines required power allocation for page, sync, pilot, for-
ward and reverse traffic channels (TCH) for different channel models, cell loading, and receiver
characteristics. Both the reverse and forward link are simulated.
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The reader is cautioned to the fact that the accuracy of the simulator is dependent on the accuracy
of the input it requires (such as path loss, traffic distribution, vehicle speed, etc.).
5.7 Conclusion
The goal of the CDMA Link Budget and an associated propagation model is to provide a charac-
terization of the RF coverage of an IS-95 CDMA system.
It should be emphasized that a link budget and associated statistical propagation model (i.e. Hata),
although useful as an analysis technique to evaluate relative differences between radio systems or
to obtain a qualitative description of a CDMA system, cannot be used to guarantee capacity or cov-
erage reliability. A detailed system design needs to be completed which takes into account the spe-
cific characteristics of the given area. Some of the specific characteristics to be accounted for are:
site locations, subscriber distribution, terrain, and ground clutter. The generic assumptions of flat
terrain, uniform subscriber distribution, and ideal site locations implied within the propagation and
traffic distribution models do not adequately account for specific characteristics of actual systems.
The actual terrain of the area to be covered can greatly influence the range to which a site will prop-
agate. Instead of an ideal line of sight propagation, reflections, diffractions and shadowing of the
RF signal are taken into account to adjust the distance that the signal will propagate. In addition
to the terrain, what is on the terrain, ground clutter, is quite important. A given RF signal will prop-
agate further in an area that is desolate (little to no buildings or foliage), than in an area which is
comprised of many buildings. Also, the placement of the site within this terrain is very important.
Simply stated, if the site is surrounded by obstructions, the coverage of the site will be less than if
there are no obstructions.
The actual traffic characteristics of systems are non-uniform with large variations possible from
sector to sector. The more spectrally efficient a given radio technology is, the more economical it
is to maintain the grade of service in these sectors by simply adding additional traffic channels. In
less efficient radio systems, cell splitting is the only option available to maintain the grade of ser-
vice. This often requires the addition of several cells to resolve the blocking problem in a single
sector. This characteristic is not accounted for in the RF link budgets.
Many different criteria exist for determining the CDMA coverage area of a system. Among these
criteria, differentiation should be made between the forward and reverse links, as well as, between
the criteria that can be simulated as opposed to being field test measured. Differentiation of the sub-
scriber unit needs to be considered. Fixed (WiLL) systems need to have different assumptions or
considerations applied to the design that will be different from a system being designed to support
mobility. Finally, a distinction must be made between coverage area as defined in the loaded sys-
tem as opposed to the unloaded system. Coverage will change with loading. Any coverage test
needs to keep loading in perspective.
5.8 References
1. "Fixed Wireless Terminal Description and Installation", 68P64113A02-O, Motorola
Technical Education Documentation
5
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2. Turkmani, Parsons and Lewis, "Measurement of building penetration loss on radio
signals at 441, 900 and 1400 MHz", Journal of the Institution of Electronic and Radio
Engineers, Vol. 58, No. 6 (Supplement), pp. S169-S174, September-December 1988
3. Turkmani and Toledo, "Modelling of radio transmissions into and within multistorey
buildings at 900, 1800 and 2300 MHz", IEEE Proceedings-I, Vol. 140, No. 6, December
1993
4. Aguirre, "Radio Propagation Into Buildings at 912, 1920, and 5990 MHz Using
Microcells", 0-7803-1823-4/94 IEEE, session 1.6 & 1.7, pp. 129-134
5. Lee, William C.Y. "Mobile Communications Engineering", Copyright 1982, McGraw-
Hill Inc. pg. 33-40.
6. Jakes, W.C., "Microwave Mobile Communications", IEEE Press Reissue 1993, (Wiley,
New York, 1974), pp. 125-127
7. Okumura, Y., Ohmori, E., Kawano, T., Fukada, K.: "Field strength and ITs Variability
in VHF and UHF Land-Mobile Radio Service", Rev. Elec. Commun. Lab., 16 (1968),
pp. 825-873
8. Hata, M.: "Empirical formula for propagation loss in land mobile radio services", IEEE
Trans. on Vehicular and Technology, VT-29 (1980), pp. 317-325
9. COST 231 - UHF Propagation, "Urban transmission loss models for mobile radio in the
900- and 1,800- MHz bands", COST 231 TD (91) 73 The Hagne, September, 1991
10. Parsons, David, "The Mobile Radio Propagation Channel", Copyright 1992, Reprinted
1996 by John Wiley & Sons Ltd.
11. Rappaport, Theodore S., "Wireless Communications Principles & Practices", Copyright
1996 by Prentice Hall PTR
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.1 Introduction
This section will outline RF engineering considerations that should be incorporated into the design
of co-located 800 MHz AMPS and CDMA "antenna systems". The antenna system is defined as
those elements between the BTS equipment cabinet (top of rack) and the TX or RX antenna. A de-
tailed discussion of equipment and antenna sharing between the AMPS and CDMA systems (in-
cluding CDMA cell site antenna parameters) is covered. In addition, the topic of CDMA/AMPS
transmit/receive antenna isolation requirements at 800 MHz as well as 1900 MHz is included.
6.2 Co-Located AMPS & CDMA Cell Sites (800 MHz)
This section describes various methodologies for implementing co-located AMPS and CDMA cell
sites. Issues of mutual system interference and cell site equipment sharing are considered.
While Motorola recommends that CDMA implementations not share equipment with existing
AMPS systems, it is understood that zoning restrictions and other hard realities might make the
sharing of some equipment a virtual requirement from the customer's point of view. The guidelines
below are intended to assure the most efficient implementation of the CDMA system while mini-
mizing the risk to operation of the host AMPS system.
6.2.1 SC
TM
BTS/HDII Shared Facilities (LPA, Modem Frame, Antennas, Etc.)
Sharing equipment virtually always implies sharing antennas. Three likely conditions for antenna
sharing might exist:
Common transmit antenna
Common receive antenna(s)
Duplexed antennas.
In all cases where equipment is shared between SC
TM
BTS and HDII, a site-by-site evaluation of
the changes to basic parameters (receive noise figure, receive IPi, receive sensitivity, transmit max-
imum power, transmit IM spur potential of the site, etc.) is recommended, and in most cases is re-
quired.
6.2.1.1 Common Transmit Antenna
Several possible cases of transmit antenna sharing are described in this section. In most cases, in
order to share a transmit antenna it will be necessary to combine all signals prior to the LPA input,
unless the >3 dB loss resulting from post LPA wide-band hybrid combining is site engineered and
RF Antenna
Systems - Part 1
Section
6
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
determined to be acceptable.
6.2.1.1.1 Combining Configuration for the SC
TM
9600 LPA (Used by HDII Carriers)
This configuration is recommended for commercial deployment.
Figure 6-1: SC
TM
9600 LPA Used by HDII Carriers
Notes for Figure 6-1: SCTM9600 LPA Used by HDII Carriers:
1. HDII system coverage is not affected, if the SC
TM
9600 LPA has enough reserve power.
2. Refer to Section 6.2.1.1.4 for the maximum total average power available from a single
LPA.
6:1
HDII
SC
TM
9600
SC
TM
9600 LPA
CDMA
INTERFACE
HDII
INTERFACE
SC
TM
9600 SIF
FROM OTHER
HDII BAYS
XCVR RACK
CDMA MF
PRE-AMP
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.1.2 Combining Configuration for the HDII LPA (Used by SC
TM
BTS CDMA Carri-
er(s))
Two options are described below to properly configure the HDII LPA (used by the SC
TM
BTS
CDMA carriers). The first option uses the SC
TM
9600 Modem Frame. The second option uses the
SC
TM
9600-D Modem Frame.
Option 1: (SC
TM
9600 Modem Frame)
This configuration requires an upgrade to the NAMPS LPA which contains a pre-amplifier. The
upgraded NAMPS LPA has two input ports, one for high level HDII signals, and the other for low
level CDMA signals. The optional LPA output filter which provides increased attenuation in the
receive band should also be ordered; this reduces the isolation needed between the transmit antenna
and the receive antenna.
Figure 6-2: HDII LPA Used by SC
TM
9600 CDMA Carriers(s)
Notes for Figure 6-2: HDII LPA Used by SC
TM
9600 CDMA Carriers(s):
1. HDII system coverage is not affected if the NAMPS LPA has enough reserve power.
2. This system can handle multiple CDMA carriers.
3. This configuration is only applicable for the HDII 20 channel rack. It does not apply to
LD rack due to the lack of a wideband combiner/attenuator
4. Refer to Section 6.2.1.1.4 for the maximum total average power available from a single
LPA.
6:1
HDII
NAMPS LPA
PRE-AMP
CDMA
INTERFACE
HDII
INTERFACE
SC
TM
9600 SIF
FROM OTHER
HDII BAYS
XCVR RACK
(WITH OPTIONAL
PRE-AMPLIFIER)
SC
TM
9600
CDMA MF
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Option 2: (SC
TM
9600-D Modem Frame)
This configuration also requires the upgrade to the NAMPS LPA which contains a pre-amplifier
and two separate input ports for HDII and CDMA signals. The optional LPA output filter which
provides increased attenuation in the receive band should also be ordered; this reduces the isolation
required between the transmit antenna and the receive antenna. The SC
TM
9600-D configuration
provides SC
TM
9600 CDMA capability into an existing HDII analog cell site that presently has
enough reserve power in the LPA(s) to support a CDMA carrier. Since the existing HDII filter rack
and LPA frames are reused, this configuration provides a cost effective way of implementing a
CDMA overlay into an existing HDII system.
Figure 6-3: HDII LPA used by SC
TM
9600-D CDMA carriers(s)
Notes for Figure 6-3: HDII LPA used by SC
TM
9600-D CDMA carriers(s):
1. HDII system coverage is not affected if the NAMPS LPA has enough reserve power.
2. This system can handle multiple CDMA carriers.
3. This configuration is only applicable for the HDII 20 channel rack. It does not apply to
LD rack due to the lack of a wideband combiner/attenuator.
4. Refer to Section 6.2.1.4 for the maximum total average power available from a single
LPA.
6:1
HDII
NAMPS LPA
CDMA
INTERFACE
HDII
INTERFACE
RFDS
FROM OTHER
HDII BAYS
XCVR RACK
(WITH OPTIONAL
PRE-AMPLIFIER)
(OPTIONAL)
PRE-AMP
SC
TM
9600-D
CDMA MF
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.1.3 Unapproved Combining Configurations
6.2.1.1.3.1 Ring Combiners
Combining of CDMA transmit signals with AMPS signals using ring combiners is not recom-
mended. The constraints on the passband amplitude and phase characteristics for the wide band-
width CDMA signal, and the narrow transition region between the CDMA carrier and the AMPS
carriers, results in a filter design that would be undesirable because of high insertion loss. Such a
filter would have be tuned for a specific frequency plan, and would change as additional CDMA
carriers are added. A wideband hybrid combiner (3 dB) would be smaller and less expensive, while
still lossy.
6.2.1.1.3.2 Pseudo-Omni Cell Using Splitters/Combiners
It is possible to construct a unique AMPS cell site configuration using panel antennas with passive
Tx splitters and Rx combiners to achieve an pseudo-omni pattern using an omni configuration
BTS. While such a configuration would function for CDMA, the risk of performance degradation
is significant. The deliberate creation of a deeply faded field in the antenna overlap areas, without
the benefit of softer hand-off, is likely to require increased average power per mobile. The delay
spread between these simulcast signals from each antenna can be less than 1 chip time. Forward
and reverse power control operation in this situation would be more highly taxed. How much deg-
radation occurs would depend on the amount of multipath present. This configuration is not rec-
ommended.
6.2.1.1.4 Power Allocation in Mixed Mode Systems
The subject of base station transmitter power considerations in mixed-mode (IS-95 CDMA plus
analog) systems is generally not well understood by those responsible for setting the levels. The
following sections provide an explanation on estimating the CDMA forward channel carrier power
requirements and a calculation of the derated LPA power specification. The formulas for derating
the rated power output of AMPS Band ELPA, the Combined-Shelf AMPS Band ELPA, and the
AMPS Band LPAs for any combination of analog and CDMA carriers have been presented. Other
linear power amplifier models will have different derating recommendations. Also provided is an
example on how to allocate available transmitter power between IS-95 CDMA carriers and the an-
alog carriers on a sector of a mixed-mode Base Station, which is intended to illustrate the concepts
and considerations involved in determining these requirements. It should be noted that each mixed-
mode site will be unique, and that in general, the results will differ from the example. System En-
gineering must design the site for the desired coverage, performance, and traffic channel capacity,
without exceeding the PA power limitations of the Base Station, preferably by using the best so-
phisticated simulation tools available, such as the CDMA Static System Simulator (CSSS) option
of the NetPlan system design tool package. In the absence of a sophisticated simulation tool, the
following calculations can be used to estimate the mixed mode power allocation of available trans-
mitter power of a linear power amplifier.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.1.4.1 CDMA Forward Channel Carrier Power
CDMA forward channel carrier power varies greatly depending on how many traffic channels are
in use, the characteristics of the users voices, the Forward Power Control settings as requested by
each subscriber unit in use, and the power allocated for overhead functions (Pilot, Page and Sync).
An approximation of the CDMA forward channel carrier power can be defined as the power
under the following conditions:
Number of Forward Links (or total Traffic Channels): the number of traffic channels
required at the 2% Blocked-Calls-Cleared (Erlang B) Grade of Service level plus the num-
ber of traffic channels that are in Soft Handoff with another cell, and/or in Softer Handoff
with another sector of the same cell, i.e., Nfl = N(2%) x SSHOF, where SSHOF is the Soft
plus Softer Handoff Factor
Traffic Channel power: the power of the average traffic channel due to average modula-
tion plus full rate Power Control Bits, i.e., approximately 0.15 x Ppilot for Rate Set 1, and
approximately 0.27 x Ppilot for Rate Set 2
Forward Power Control: the average Forward Power Control setting, at this setting the
average traffic channel power is still approximately 0.15 x Ppilot for Rate Set 1, and
approximately 0.27 x Ppilot for Rate Set 2
Overhead power: Pilot plus Page plus Sync power is equal to Ppilot plus 0.75 x Ppilot plus
0.1 x Ppilot = 1.85x Ppilot
Since the component parts of the CDMA carrier power are all expressed in terms of Pilot power,
and since Pilot power is generally determined by the site coverage requirements, we may sum this
up as follows:
P(cdma) = Overhead power + Traffic Channel power
P(cdma) = 1.85 x Ppilot + Nfl x 0.15 x Ppilot (for Rate Set 1) or,
P(cdma) = 1.85 x Ppilot + Nfl x 0.27 x Ppilot (for Rate Set 2)
It must be realized that these formulas are approximations, since the power level of the Overhead
components and the number and power level of the Traffic Channels continuously vary in the real
world.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.1.4.2 Linear Power Amplifier Derating
A. AMPS Band ELPA
The present AMPS band version of ELPA may contain two, three, or four ELPA modules,
depending on the site or sector power requirement.
The four-module AMPS band ELPA can provide up to 120 Watts of output power at the output of
the ELPA Frame for either 1 CDMA carrier or up to 20 analog carriers. When more than 20 ana-
log carriers or more than 1 CDMA carrier are being amplified, the output power specification fol-
lows a derating curve from 120 Watts to about 109 Watts for a very large number of analog and
CDMA carriers. This is due to the increasing peak to average power ratio of the composite signal.
There are similar derating curves when three or two modules are installed.
For purposes of determining the derated power specification of the ELPA amplifier in system
planning scenarios, each CDMA carrier is counted as 20 equivalent analog carriers (EAC). For
example, if the ELPA is going to be used to amplify 36 analog carriers and 3 CDMA carriers, it
will be expected to handle 96 equivalent analog carriers.
The derating equations for all the possible four-module ELPA configurations follow:
The derating equation for two ELPA modules installed is:

EAC = equivalent analog carriers
EAC = (# of analog carriers) + 20 * (# of CDMA carriers)
Pout = ELPA maximum output power rating
if EAC = 20:
Pout = 60 Watts
if EAC > 20
Pout = 54.55 + (72 / EAC) + (720 / (EAC)^2) Watts
The derating equation for three ELPA modules installed is:
if EAC = 20:
Pout = 90 Watts
if EAC > 20
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The derating equation for four ELPA modules installed is:
if EAC = 20:
Pout = 120 Watts
if EAC > 20
Four installed modules in an ELPA with 96 EAC has a Pout rating of 110.8 Watts. Four installed
modules with 40 EAC (1 CDMA & 20 Analog Carriers) has a Pout rating of 113.6 W. Four
installed modules with 35 EAC (1 CDMA & 15 Analog Carriers) has a Pout rating of 114.4 W.
This power is available to be divided between the analog and CDMA carriers with any ratio.
Valid examples follow for 96 EAC:
Three 25 Watt CDMA carriers and Thirty-six 0.99 Watt analog carriers = 110.6 Watts.
Three 10 Watt CDMA carriers and Thirty-six 2.24 Watt analog carriers = 110.6 Watts.
Three 1.6 Watt CDMA carriers and Thirty-six 2.94 Watt analog carriers = 110.6 Watts.
B. Combined-Shelf AMPS Band ELPA
Higher power output is available from the combined-shelf ELPA models. Within these ELPA
Frames, two four-module ELPA shelves are combined. The number of ELPA modules in each
four-module ELPA shelf must be the same, i.e., two, three, or four. The resulting combinations
therefore consist of four, six, or eight ELPA modules.
An eight-module AMPS band ELPA can provide up to 200 Watts of output power at the output of
the ELPA Frame for either 1 CDMA carrier or up to 20 analog carriers. When more than 20 ana-
log carriers or more than 1 CDMA carrier are being amplified, the output power specification fol-
lows a derating curve from 200 Watts to about 182 Watts for a very large number of analog and
CDMA carriers. This is due to the increasing peak to average power ratio of the composite signal.
There are similar derating curves for the cases when six or four modules are installed.
For purposes of determining the derated power specification of the ELPA amplifier in system
planning scenarios, each CDMA carrier is counted as 20 equivalent analog carriers (EAC). For
example, if the ELPA is going to be used to amplify 36 analog carriers and 3 CDMA carriers, it
will be expected to handle 96 equivalent analog carriers.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The derating equations for all the possible combined ELPA configurations follow:

if EAC = 20:
Pout = 100 Watts
if EAC > 20
The derating equation for six ELPA modules installed is:
if EAC = 20:
Pout = 150 Watts
if EAC > 20
Pout = 136.4+ (180 / EAC) + (1800 / (EAC)^2) Watts
The derating equation for eight ELPA modules installed is:
if EAC = 20:
Pout = 200 Watts
if EAC > 20
Eight installed modules in a combined ELPA with 96 EAC has a Pout rating of 184.6 Watts. Eight
installed modules with 40 EAC (1 CDMA & 20 Analog Carriers) has a Pout rating of 189.3 W.
Eight installed modules with 35 EAC (1 CDMA & 15 Analog Carriers) has a Pout rating of 190.6
W.
This power is available to be divided between the analog and CDMA carriers with any ratio.
Valid examples follow for 156 EAC (6 CDMA carriers and 36 analog carriers) which has a Pout
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
rating of 183.4 Watts:
Six 25 Watt CDMA carriers and Thirty-six 0.92 Watt analog carriers = 183.1 Watts.
Six 10 Watt CDMA carriers and Thirty-six 3.42 Watt analog carriers = 183.1 Watts.
Six 0.9 Watt CDMA carriers and Thirty-six 4.94 Watt analog carriers = 183.2 Watts.
C. AMPS Band LPA
The derating equation for the standard power (70 Watt) LPA is:
For 5 or less EAC: Pout = 110 Watts
For more than 5 EAC:Pout = 64 + 80/EAC + 800/(EAC)^2 Watts
The derating equation for the high power (125 Watt) LPA is:
For 12 or less EAC: Pout = 140 Watts
For more than 12 EAC: Pout = 114.2 + 144/EAC + 1440/(EAC)^2 Watts
D. Other Linear Power Amplifiers
Other LPA and ELPA models may have different power derating equations, or may require no
derating at all. This information should be available from the literature for the product of interest.
6.2.1.1.4.3 Example of a Mixed-Mode Site with Rate Set 1
In this example of a mixed-mode SC9600 type of site, a sector is being planned to have one
CDMA carrier and 20 AMPS/NAMPS carriers; the equivalent number of analog carriers is there-
fore 40. Under these conditions, the power output rating of a four-module AMPS band ELPA at
the top of the ELPA frame is determined as follows:
EAC = 40
Pout = 109.1 + (144 / 40) + (1440 / (40)^2) Watts
Pout = 113.6 Watts
Note that the power rating given above is at the output of the AMPS Band ELPA Frame. At
the output of the Site Interface Frame (SIF), this power level will be reduced by the insertion loss
of the cables and hardware in the transmit path. The maximum value for this loss is about 1.5 dB
(about 71% remaining power). Using this value, the resulting maximum available power level at
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
the output of the SIF would be:
Pout(sif) = 80.4 Watts (worst loss)
Alternatively, the actual measured loss from the ELPA frame output to the SIF frame output may
be used to determine the maximum available power level at the output of the SIF. Doing so will
result in a slightly higher output power.
In this example, the CDMA carrier will have Rate Set 1 voice Traffic Channels (for Rate Set 1,
the maximum bit rate of each voice Traffic Channel is 9.6 Kbps). Also let us assume that for sec-
tor coverage reasons, the required Pilot Power of the CDMA carrier has been determined to be 2
Watts. The approximation of the CDMA carrier power is as follows:
P(cdma) = 1.85 x Ppilot + Nfl x 0.15 x Ppilot
Ppilot = 2 Watts
P(cdma) = 1.85 x 2 Watts + Nfl x 0.15 x 2 Watts
P(cdma) = 3.7 Watts + Nfl x 0.3 Watts
An estimate of the maximum number of Forward Links (Traffic Channels) expected on the
CDMA carrier is required to complete this calculation.
Nfl = N(2%) x (SSHOF)
For a multi-Sector site, a conservative value for the Soft Plus Softer Handoff Factor is:
SSHOF = 2
Therefore,
Nfl = N(2%) x 2
The maximum value for the number of Erlangs on a heavily loaded sector during Busy Hour is:
N(Erlangs) = 14
The number of Traffic Channels required to handle this traffic load with 2% Blocked Call Grade
of Service (Erlang B) is:
N(2%) = 21
Including the Traffic Channels that are in Soft or Softer Handoff, the maximum number of For-
ward Links required on this CDMA carrier (with 14 Erlangs, 2% GOS, & SSHOF=2) is expected
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
to be:
Nfl = 42
Note that under no circumstances can this number exceed the number of available Walsh Codes
(i.e. 42 Walsh Codes for R6).
The power required by the CDMA carrier is therefore:
P(cdma) = 3.7 Watts + 42 x 0.3 Watts
P(cdma) = 3.7 Watts + 12.6 Watts
P(cdma) = 16.3 Watts
In a conservative mixed-mode site design, the total power available for the analog carriers is:
P(analog) = Pout(sif) - P(cdma)
P(analog) = 80.4 Watts - 16.3 Watts
P(analog) = 64.1 Watts
If there are 20 analog carriers, the power available for each one is:
Ptch(analog) = 3.21 Watts
If the power needed for each analog channel is higher than 3.21 Watts, the maximum number of
analog channels will be less than 20. For example, if each analog carrier is required to be 6.41
Watts, the analog carrier capacity would be reduced to a maximum of 10.
Of equal importance, if the CDMA Busy Hour traffic load was higher than 14 Erlangs (if it was
possible), this would cause the CDMA carrier to consume more than its allocated share of the
power available from the ELPA.
In the presence of all 20 analog carriers, excessively high CDMA power can result in activation of
the ELPA RF Overdrive Protection (approximately 20 dB ELPA gain reduction). The combina-
tion can also cause distortion of the CDMA signal (poor voice quality and dropped calls), genera-
tion of higher than normal CDMA sidebands, interference to the adjacent analog cellular
channels, and excessive thermal stress on the ELPA.
If an increased traffic load on the CDMA carrier is expected to be possible, then either the power
allocated to each analog carrier or the maximum number of analog carriers must be reduced.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.2 Common Receive Antenna(s)
6.2.1.2.1 HDII Multicoupler (Receive Outputs Serving SC
TM
CDMA BTS)
Four options are available for the HDII multi-carrier. The first option uses the SC9600-D Modem
Frame, the second option uses the SC9600 BTS Frame, the third option uses the SC2400 BTS
Frame, and the fourth option uses the SC4812 800 MHz BTS Frame.
Option 1: (SC
TM
9600-D Modem Frame)
The SC
TM
9600-D configuration provides SC
TM
9600 CDMA capability into an existing HDII an-
alog cell site that presently has enough reserve power in the LPA(s) to support a CDMA carrier.
Since the existing HDII filter rack and LPA frames are reused, this configuration provides a cost
effective way of implementing a CDMA overlay into an existing HDII system.
Figure 6-4: SC
TM
9600-D CDMA-AMPS Configuration, Shared Sector HDII Multicoupler
Notes for Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5:
1. Consult field/systems engineering for proper attenuators used in the CDMA receive
path. Values shown are typical.
2. No change to the HDII receive path is required.
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
RX
2:1
4:1
MULTI
3 dB
PAD
HDII SITE FILTER RACK
6:1
SRF2140B
XCVR
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY

Preselector
5dB
COUPLER
EXTENDER
MATRIX
RX
MATRIX
XCVR BAY
RX
MATRIX
PAD
SRF2290C
Preselector
SGRF1009A
(OR 7 dB
PAD)
7dB
PAD
BBX
SC
TM
9600-D CDMA MF
MPC
2:1
2:1
2:1
3 dB
PAD
BBX
SC
TM
9600-D CDMA MF
MPC
2:1
2:1
2:1
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 6-5: SC
TM
9600-D CDMA-AMPS Configuration, Shared Omni HDII Multicoupler
Option 2: (SC
TM
9600 BTS Frames)
This implementation requires the use of a SC
TM
9600 SIF which accepts the CDMA receiver feeds
(main and diversity) from available outputs of the HDII multicoupler. This assures no need to re-
optimize the HDII receiver path, as well as balanced delay, noise figure, and RF levels for CDMA.
This configuration is recommended for field trial systems. Identification of any degradations to the
performance of the CDMA system are to be exposed by site engineering evaluation.
Eliminating redundant portions of the SIF (filters, etc.) suggests the use of a unique SIF frame (not
available), and is not supported at this time.
6:1
6:1
SRF2140B
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
4:1
4:1
2:1
XCVR
4:1
4:1
Preselector
SGRF1009A
XCVR BAY
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY
7 dB
PAD
0-3 dB
PAD
BBX
SC
TM
9600-D CDMA MF
MPC
2:1
2:1
BBX
SC
TM
9600-D CDMA MF
MPC
2:1
2:1
2:1
2:1
Preselector
SRF2290C
5 dB
PAD
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 6-6: SC
TM
9600 CDMA-AMPS Configuration, Shared Sector HDII Multicoupler
Figure 6-7: SC
TM
9600 CDMA-AMPS Configuration, Shared Omni HDII Multicoupler
BBX
SC
TM
9600 CDMA MF
SC Preselector
SC
TM
9600 SIF
5 dB
PAD
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
RX
4:1
MULTI
5 dB
PAD
SC Multicoupler
6:1
SRF2140B
XCVR
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY

2:1
2:1
2:1
COUPLER
EXTENDER
MATRIX
RX
MATRIX
XCVR BAY
RX
MATRIX
(OR 7 dB
PAD)
2:1
Preselector
SRF2290C
Preselector
SGRF1009A
5 dB
PAD
6:1
6:1
SRF2140B
BBX
SC
TM
9600 CDMA MF
SC Preselector
2:1
2:1
2:1
SC
TM
9600 SIF
SC Multicoupler
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
4:1
4:1
XCVR
4:1
4:1
5 dB
PAD
5 dB
PAD
XCVR BAY
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY
2:1
Preselector
SGRF1009A
Preselector
SRF2290C
5 dB
PAD
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Option 3: (SC
TM
2400 BTS Frame)
Figure 6-8: SC
TM
Figure 6-9: : SC
TM
BBX
SC
TM
2400 CDMA MF
Preselector I/O
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
RX
4:1
MULTI
MPC
6:1
SRF2140B
XCVR
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY

COUPLER
EXTENDER
MATRIX
RX
MATRIX
XCVR BAY
RX
MATRIX
(OR 7 dB
PAD)
2:1
2:1
2:1
2:1
2:1
7 dB
PAD
2:1
Preselector
SRF2290C
Preselector
SGRF1009A
5 dB
PAD
3 dB
Option B
3 dB
Option A
6:1
6:1
SRF2140B
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
4:1
4:1
XCVR
4:1
4:1
XCVR BAY
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY
BBX
SC
TM
2400 CDMA MF
Preselector I/O
MPC
2:1
2:1
2:1
2:1
2:1
10 dB
PAD
2:1
Preselector
SGRF1009A
Preselector
SRF2290C
5 dB
PAD
Option B
Option A
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Option 4: (SC
TM
4812 800 MHz BTS Frame)
Figure 6-10: SC
TM
3. The SC
TM
4812 800 MHz BTS is configured as a stand-alone product. This
configuration does not support TX antenna sharing.
Figure 6-11: SC
TM
HDII Site
Filter Rack
(Omni)
SC4812
BTS
rx exp.
rx
6:1
6:1
10 dB pad
tx
HDII Site
Filter Rack
(Sector)
SC4812
BTS
rx exp.
rx
6:1
4:1
10 dB pad
tx
rx exp.
Multicoupler
extender
3 dB pad
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.2.2 SC
TM
9600 SIF (Receive Outputs Serving HDII)
Figure 6-12: CDMA-AMPS Config., Shared SC
TM
9600 SIF frame, AMPS/NAMPS Sector Rx
1. Consult field/systems engineering for proper attenuators used in the analog receive
bays.
2. Re-optimization is required for analog operation.
Figure 6-13: CDMA-AMPS Config., Shared SC
TM
9600 SIF Frame, AMPS/NAMPS Omni Rx
4:1
RX M/C
4:1
4:1
SC
TM
9600 SIF
4:1
SC Multicoupler
BBX
SC
TM
9600 CDMA MF
SC Preselector
XCVR
20 CHANNEL

XCVR

2:1
2:1
2:1
EXTENDER
7 dB
PAD
XCVR BAY
RX
MATRIX
RX
MATRIX
Preselector
SRF2290B
7 dB
PAD
7 dB
PAD
3 dB
PAD
2:1

RX
MATRIX
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY
Preselector
SRF2290B
SC
TM
9600 SIF
SC Multicoupler
4:1
BBX
SC
TM
9600 CDMA MF
SC Preselector
4:1
4:1
XCVR
20 CHANNEL
XCVR
4:1
2:1
2:1
2:1
RX M/C
EXTENDER
3 dB
PAD
7 dB
PAD
2:1
7 dB
PAD
7 dB
PAD
4:1
XCVR BAY
4:1
4:1
4:1
10 CHANNEL XCVR BAY
Preselector
SRF2290B
Preselector
SRF2290B
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.3 Duplexed Antennas
The use of duplexers implies zero isolation between a family of transmit carriers and a family of
receive carriers. Under these conditions, any transmit IM spurs created by non-linearities, in active
or passive components, in the common path might produce significant interferers in the receive
band. Duplexers can be made to work in some applications under ideal conditions; but any imper-
fections introduced by aging, lightning, thermal cycling, bi-metallic interaction or other common
stresses can reduce system performance to below acceptable levels.
Motorola does not recommend the use of duplexers for AMPS/CDMA systems at 800 MHz, how-
ever certain situations may require their use. Intermodulation products introduced by the duplexed
antenna system may degrade either the CDMA or the analog system depending upon the duplexing
scheme implemented. For further clarification, refer to Figure 7.3 and the accompanying text.
Duplexing a 800 MHz CDMA system has been broken down into three options. These are the only
options that are considered to be acceptable at this time. Any duplexing configurations that are dif-
ferent from what is shown below would require evaluation of its acceptability. The following table
and figure illustrate three possible configurations where duplexers could be used with CDMA and
AMPS carriers and the acceptability of each:
Figure 6-14: CDMA Duplexing Options
Option 1: Duplexing One CDMA Transmit Carrier with CDMA and/or AMPS Receive.
Table 6-1: Possible Duplexed Configurations
CDMA TX AMPS TX CDMA & AMPS TX
CDMA
&
AMPS
RX
Option #1: Unconditionally
acceptable for one CDMA car-
rier. Conditionally acceptable
for multiple CDMA carriers.
Option #2: Unconditionally
acceptable for SIG only. Condi-
tionally acceptable for multiple
AMPS carriers. NOT accept-
able for multiple AMPS carri-
ers including SIG.
Option #3: Conditionally
acceptable for one or multiple
CDMA and AMPS SIG only.
NOT acceptable for CDMA and
multiple AMPS voice carriers.
Option #1 Option #2 Option #3
CDMA
Tx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
CDMA
& AMPS SIG
CDMA
&
Rx
AMPS
CDMA
&
Rx
AMPS
CDMA
&
Rx
AMPS
AMPS
Voice or SIG
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
This is the recommended implementation. Duplexing multiple CDMA transmit carriers with
CDMA and/or AMPS receive may be acceptable if the proper IM prevention site engineering, fre-
quency planning, and maintenance techniques are employed.
Option 2: Duplexing One AMPS SIG Channel (control channel) with CDMA and/or
AMPS Receive.
This is an acceptable configuration. Duplexing multiple AMPS voice transmit carriers with CDMA
and/or AMPS receive may be acceptable with proper IM prevention site engineering, frequency
planning, and maintenance techniques. This is the least desired option due to the complexity of im-
plementing and maintaining the proper IM frequency planning techniques for the multiple AMPS
carriers. Duplexing multiple AMPS voice and SIG carriers with CDMA and/or AMPS receive is
not acceptable.
Option 3: Duplexing One or Multiple CDMA and AMPS SIG Carriers with CDMA and/
or AMPS Receive
This may be an acceptable configuration if the proper IM prevention site engineering, frequency
planning, and maintenance techniques are employed. Duplexing one or multiple CDMA and mul-
tiple AMPS voice carriers with CDMA and/or AMPS receive is not acceptable.
The only inherently acceptable application of a duplexed CDMA system is to duplex the TX of one
CDMA carrier or one AMPS SIG carrier with the RX of CDMA and/or AMPS. This is always ac-
ceptable because there is no transmitter generated receive band IM for one carrier.
Configurations that are inherently not acceptable are multiple AMPS carriers, including signalling
channels, combined with CDMA carriers. These configurations are considered unacceptable be-
cause there is a potential problem of in-band intermodulation generation with difficult spurious fre-
quency location prediction. The IM frequency planning mentioned above refers to planning the
transmit frequencies into the duplexer such that high energy, low order IM products, do not inter-
fere with the planned receive frequencies of the duplexer. The potential for interference and diffi-
culty in spurious location prediction increases significantly when using EAMPS and NAMPS
channels due to the increased number of carriers used in such configurations. The increase of fre-
quency spacing of EAMPS channels also allows IM products, as low as fifth order for non-wireline
systems, and seventh order for wireline systems to potentially exist (non-expanded AMPS systems
only had potential for eleventh order IM products and higher).
Combined analog and CDMA systems, that are considered conditionally acceptable, require site
engineering and preventative maintenance in order to provide acceptable system performance.
Some of the guidelines for site engineering and preventative maintenance are presented in Section
6.2.1.4.
6.2.1.4 Proper Installation and Maintenance of Duplexed Antennas
The comments below are intended to show proper installation and component selection in systems
where duplexer use cannot be avoided.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.4.1 Equipment Recommendations
All RF components in the cell site common receive/transmit path must be certified by the equip-
ment manufacturer for IM performance. A typical (derived from GSM) IM specification is that all
transmit intermodulation products appearing in the receive band should be less than -110 dBm for
two input transmit carriers, at a power level of 25 Watts per carrier. In addition, a regularly sched-
uled Preventative Maintenance Inspection (PMI) plan should be developed to verify that system
IM performance has not been degraded and to ensure component integrity. Typical requirements
for a PMI plan are described below.
The following components at the site would require IM certification:
Coax - Standard Heliax type coax is considered to have acceptable IM performance if undam-
aged and unkinked. Other types of coax would have to be individually tested and certified. Cable
installation should include visual inspections for cable damage and electrical measurements to ver-
ify performance. Provisions for strain relief to minimize stress on cables and maintain proper bend
radii should be made. Cables should be mounted securely so as to prevent vibration and movement
per vender specifications.
Connectors - The connectors in the common transmit/receive path are the most likely cause of sys-
tem IM problems. System planning should attempt to minimize the number of connections in this
path in order to prevent IM problems from occurring. Connectors with good IM properties have
silver plating and mechanical rigidity. 7/16 type connectors have been optimized for IM perfor-
mance and should be used, if possible, in all paths with potential for IM problems. Assembly and
installation instructions should be provided by the manufacturer and should include torque speci-
fications. All connectors should be thoroughly cleaned, prior to installation, and waterproofed, if
exposed to outdoor elements. Care should be taken when mating and unmating connectors to pre-
vent contamination and to maintain plating integrity. Connectors should be regularly inspected for
damage and proper torque.
Lightning Arrestors - Certification of lightning arrestors is the same as that of connectors. In ad-
dition, lightning arrestor performance will degrade if a lightning strike has been taken by the an-
tenna. Verification of component performance should be made regularly.
Duplexers - Considerable effort has been made by duplexer manufacturers to improve IM perfor-
mance of duplexers. A duplexer that has been certified for its IM performance should include ad-
equate silver plating of components and 7/16 type connectors. Accelerated life testing should be
performed as part of the certification process. Only IM certified duplexers should be used in a du-
plexed system.
Antennas - Each antenna installed in a cell site should be tested and certified for IM performance.
This is due to the additional potential IM risk of contamination of the material used for the radiating
elements (no ferromagnetic materials). Proper care in installation should be used to prevent anten-
na damage and to verify that there are no metallic objects in the radiation paths close enough to re-
radiate back into the receiver (the rusty bolt effect). Mechanical stability should be provided to
protect from exposure and wind effects. Inspection and electrical verification should be made on a
regular basis, especially after a lightning strike or other unusual weather occurrence.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.2.1.4.2 Installation Recommendations
Antennas - Care should be taken in installation to maintain proper distances from any other radi-
ators or other obstruction on the same tower.
Cable Lashing - All cables should be prevented from movement. A major source of IM is the
movement of the cable at any connector. In addition, damage may result to the cable at a connector
from continued movement.
Cable Bends - Care should be taken to prevent any excessive bends in cabling. Slack and service
loops should be provided in cable runs to prevent stress to cables.
Water Proofing - All external connectors should be waterproofed and regularly inspected for her-
meticism. External components should be installed to prevent internal water capture. Components
should be removed from any areas with potential standing water.
6.2.1.4.3 Maintenance
A Preventative Maintenance Inspection (PMI) plan should be developed and followed in order to
maintain the IM performance of a cell site. A PMI should include a complete visual inspection of
the cell site for obvious component damage or misapplication and an RF two tone test to verify
system performance is satisfactory. Figure 6-15: Two Tone IM Test Set Up (800 MHz) is a dia-
gram of the two tone test setup and is shown below.
The low noise amplifiers combined with the spectrum analyzer in the above diagram should be sen-
sitive enough to measure IM products at -120 dBm or lower. The frequencies of the CW tones
should be such that the spurious product of interest should fall within the passband of the receive
path. All measured IM products should be below -110 dBm.
If any anomalies are observed, a sweep of the transmit path using a Time Domain Reflectometer
(TDR) or equivalent should be performed. A TDR will identify the existence and location of sig-
nificant RF discontinuity in the signal path.
Monitoring cell site received signal strength indicator statistics for consistent foreign carriers is
also a good indication of IM problems and should be part of a PMI plan. Monitoring the receiver
port in the cell site with a spectrum analyzer for foreign carriers should also be performed. The port
should be monitored with the transmit carriers keyed and unkeyed to verify whether interference
is internally or externally generated.
6
C
D
M
A

R
F

P
l
a
n
n
i
n
g

G
u
i
d
e
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

6
:

R
F

A
n
t
e
n
n
a

S
y
s
t
e
m
s

-

P
a
r
t

1
6

-

2
3
M
o
t
o
r
o
l
a

C
o
n
f
i
d
e
n
t
i
a
l

P
r
o
p
r
i
e
t
a
r
y
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

M
o
t
o
r
o
l
a

1
9
9
3

-

1
9
9
8
V
e
r
s
i
o
n

2
.
1
1
2
/
1
8
/
9
8
F
i
g
u
r
e

6
-
1
5
:

T
w
o

T
o
n
e

I
M

T
e
s
t

S
e
t

U
p

(
8
0
0

M
H
z
)
(27V)
(24V)
HP8657B
SIG GEN
HP8657B
SIG GEN
DUPLEXER
ANT.
Rx.
Tx.
ANT. Tx.
Rx.
ANT. Tx.
Rx.
LOW IM LOAD CABLE
(150-200 ft. of RG-393
Cable with silver plated
type N-connector on one
end and other end open.
Approx. 7.6 dB loss/100 ft.
of RG-393 cable.)
LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR
MINICIRCUITS
(Mod.No. 15542)
0 deg.
COMBINER
ANT.
Rx.
Tx.
MOTOROLA
Tx/Rx FREQ.
DIPLEXER
JANEL
LNA
SRF
2140
LNA
3 dB
pad
OUT IN
HP8591A
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
HP6024A
POWER
SUPPLY
HP6653A
POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 6-8: Two tone IM test set up
The shaded region represents the system under test
which will be replaced with the customer's duplexer
and antenna system. (Care should be taken to ensure
the amplifiers do not go unterminated.)
(27V,10A)
(24V,1A)
FILTRONICS LOW IM
DUPLEXERS CM035-F2
UNTERMINATED
Note:
equipment. Equivalent, more compact, less expensive items may be available.
Equipment part numbers are for reference only and are not
intended as a recommendation to purchase a particular manufacturer's
FERROCOM
(Mod. No. 5809866C01)
CIRCULATORS
w/50 ohm loads
NARDA
CDPD
MACOM
(Mod. No.
CPA-120-CBA)
A/B AMPS.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.3 Multiple Frame Antenna Sharing Configurations with SC
TM
BTS
Products
6.3.1 Multiple Frame Antenna Sharing with 800 MHz SC
TM
BTS Products
This section provides some of the multiple frame antenna sharing configurations for the SC
TM
BTS
product lines at 800 MHz that are currently supported.
Each 800 MHz SC
TM
4812 frame is capable of supporting up to two six-sector carriers or up to four
three-sector carriers. The SC
TM
4812 starter frame can currently support only one SC
TM
4812 ex-
pansion frame (see Figure 6-16). External low-loss cavity combing for transmit antenna sharing is
not supported. An optional duplexer can be used to share Tx and Rx antennas.
Figure 6-16: SC
TM
4812 to SC
TM
4812 Expansion Frame
Note: m = main, div = diversity, exp = expansion
The 800 MHz SC
TM
4812 frame can also share Rx antennas with some of the existing 4-digit 800
MHz BTS products, which includes the following.
SC
TM
2450 STPA
SC
TM
2400 with ELPA
SC
TM
9600 with LPA or ELPA
There are three versions of the SC
TM
4812 frame, a starter frame, an expansion frame, and a modem
frame. The general differences between the three different versions are as follows. A starter frame
SC4812 SC4812
exp. frame
opt. duplexer
D
D
rx exp.
tx tx
rx-m
rx-div
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
is a standard stand-alone BTS frame which is designed to amplify the Rx & Tx signals while con-
nected directly to the antenna feed line jumpers. An expansion frame shares the Rx signals from a
starter frame and thus it is designed with a lower Rx gain in the front end, since the starter frame
provides the first stage of amplification. The Tx signals of an expansion frame are independent
from that of the starter frame and are typically connected to their own antenna (unless some sort of
external combining technique is used). A modem frame is functionally similar to the SC
TM
9600
modem frame. In this case, the modem frame shares the Rx signals from another frame (typically
a SIF) as well as providing a low level Tx output signal which requires further amplification from
yet another frame (typically an LPA or ELPA frame). The following figures provide some of the
antenna sharing configurations for the various SC
TM
4812 frame versions as it shares the Rx anten-
nas from various 4-digit 800 MHz BTS products.
Figure 6-17: SC
TM
2450 to SC
TM
Each SC
TM
2450 or SC
TM
2400 starter frame is capable of supporting as many as three expansion
frames. The expansion frames can be of the SC
TM
24XX series or SC
TM
4812 expansion frames
(three-sector configuration only, see Figure 6-17 & Figure 6-18). There is no transmit antenna
sharing configurations that is currently supported between these frames. For expansion kit ordering
information refer to the latest version of the equipment planning guide or contact the Product Man-
agement group for more information.
SC2450
opt. duplexer
D
rx exp.
tx
tx
rx-m
10 dB pad
D
rx-div
SC4812
exp. frame
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 6-18: SC
TM
2400 ELPA to SC
TM
For the SC
TM
2400 frames using CDMA only, the Tx output from the ELPA can be duplexed with
the Rx antenna (this is not shown in Figure 6-18). Although it is typically not recommended, the
output signals from the SC
TM
2400 ELPA frame can also be duplexed for mixed mode analog and
CDMA frames onto the Rx antenna, but extreme care should be used in frequency planning to pre-
vent IM products from effecting system performance.
Figure 6-19: SC
TM
9600 SIF to SC
TM
The configuration in Figure 6-19 provides Rx antenna sharing between a SC
TM
9600 Site Interface
Frame (SIF) and an SC
TM
4812 expansion frame (three-sector only). Up to two SC
TM
4812 expan-
sion frames can be supported in this configuration. Each SC
TM
4812 expansion frame requires a
separate Tx antenna. For expansion kit ordering information refer to the latest version of the equip-
ment planning guide or contact the Product Management group for more information.
SC2400
ELPA
SC4812
exp. frame
rx exp.
tx
10 dB pad
rx-m
rx-div
SC9600
SIF
SC4812
exp. frame
rx exp.
tx
rx
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 6-20: SC
TM
9600 SIF & LPA with SC
TM
4812 Modem Frame
The SC
TM
4812 modem frame in Figure 6-20 is compatible to the existing SC
TM
9600 modem
frame (three-sector only). External combiners can be used for combining up to two SC
TM
4812 mo-
dem frames (or 8 carriers) in this configuration. For modem frame or expansion kit ordering infor-
mation refer to the latest version of the equipment planning guide or contact the Product
Management group for more information.
6.4 CDMA Cell Site Antenna Parameters (800 MHz)
For this version of the CDMA RF Planning Guide it is assumed that the CDMA antennas will be
co-located with existing AMPS antennas and will be sharing the same tower or roof top location.
For sites where the AMPS and CDMA systems are both omni-directional, it is assumed that the
receive antennas will be shared between the two systems. Motorola recommends that a separate
transmit antenna be installed for the CDMA system to simplify the system design. Motorola does
not generally recommend the use of duplexers to allow the AMPS and CDMA systems to share
common antennas. Please refer to Section 6.2.1.3 for more details on the subject of duplexed an-
tennas.
For sites where the AMPS and CDMA systems will both be sectorized, Motorola recommends that
whenever possible the CDMA system should have separate antennas from the AMPS system. In
fact, there are several CDMA system requirements which can only be satisfied by the use of sepa-
rate CDMA and AMPS antenna systems. For example, if the coverages of the AMPS and CDMA
systems at the site require different downtilt angles for their respective antennas, or if the CDMA
softer handoff considerations require a narrower horizontal beamwidth for the CDMA sector an-
tennas than for the AMPS sector antennas. Refer to the tower specifications to balance the weight
to height ratio (tower loading).
SC9600
SIF
SC4812
Modem
Frame
rx exp.
tx
rx
SC9600
LPA or
ELPA
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.4.1 Selecting Antenna Location and Type
6.4.1.1 CDMA Antenna Height
Motorola recommends that the separate CDMA sector antennas should be mounted on the tower
below the existing AMPS antennas so that the superior isolation provided by vertical spacing is
obtained. This approach leaves the AMPS antennas untouched. If, however, the separate CDMA
sector antennas must share the same tower platform or level, it is very likely that the existing
AMPS antennas must either be replaced with smaller antennas or relocated to provide sufficient
room for the additional CDMA antennas to be located at the same level on the tower.
6.4.1.2 CDMA Antenna Type
If an additional omni-directional type transmit antenna is required for the CDMA system, a type
similar to the existing AMPS transmit antennas should be more than adequate.
The requirements for the sector type directional CDMA antennas depend not only on the available
space but also on the desired beamwidths. If narrower horizontal beamwidths are desired for the
CDMA antennas than for the AMPS antennas, then appropriate types must be chosen. Sufficient
isolation between the transmit and receive CDMA antennas and the existing AMPS antennas
should be readily obtained if separate CDMA antennas are mounted at a lower level than the exist-
ing AMPS sector antennas. This applies to CDMA antenna types similar to the existing AMPS an-
tennas. However, if the CDMA and AMPS antennas must all be located at the same tower height,
then physically smaller antenna types may be required for not only the new CDMA units but also
as replacements for the existing AMPS antennas.
In general the log-periodic reflector type directional antennas have smaller height and width di-
mensions for the same forward gain than dipole panel antennas or collinear dipole reflector type
antennas. They, of course, have a larger dimension in the direction of maximum gain due to the
length of the log-periodic array(s) which form the overall antenna system. Because of the smaller
area occupied on the face of the tower or its platform, it should be possible to fit at least 7 of these
antennas in the same space originally allocated for the AMPS sector antennas.
Log-periodic reflector type antennas also appear to have excellent front-to-back and front-to-side
ratios. It appears that the isolation between adjacent antennas is significantly higher than for dipole
type directional antennas. This is based on measured data taken by Allgon System AB on their line
of log-periodic reflector antennas. This provides the same isolation with closer spacing than for
comparable gain panel antennas or greater isolation for the same spacing.
Special consideration should be given to the antenna bandwidth. If the use of duplexers is required
then a wideband antenna capable of supporting the primary and the secondary CDMA carriers
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
should be selected (see table below)
Table 6-2: CDMA Carrier Frequency Range
Frequency
Band
Primary CDMA Carrier -
Center Channel
(& Broadband Channel Range)
Frequency Range in MHz
(Base RX/TX)
A 283 (263-303) 832.89-834.09 / 877.89-879.09
B 384 (364-404) 835.92-837.12 / 880.92-882.12
Frequency
Band
Secondary CDMA Carrier -
Center Channel
(& Broadband Channel Range)
Frequency Range in MHz
(Base RX/TX)
A 691 (671-711) 845.13-846.33 / 890.13-891.33
B 777 (757-797) 847.71-848.91 / 892.71-893.91
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.5 Antenna Isolation Considerations (800/1900 MHz)
This sub-section describes the RF isolation requirements between the various transmit and receive
antennas of two or more separate radio systems which share a common tower/platform/rooftop lo-
cation. Typical examples of site sharing are an 800 MHz CDMA system overlayed on an existing
800 MHz AMPS system, or a 1900 MHz CDMA PCS system sharing the same tower/rooftop with
an existing 800 MHz AMPS/CDMA system. Table 6-3 summarizes the isolation requirements be-
tween two transmit antennas, two receive antennas, or a transmit and receive antenna pair which
share a common location and are operating in the 800 MHz Cellular and/or 1900 MHz PCS bands
and utilizing analog or CDMA technology.
The data in Table 6-3 is a summary of the detailed calculations that are included in the appendix.
Since the required isolation between the TX-TX, RX-RX, and TX-RX pairs of antennas is for the
most part identical for all of the combinations of both 800 MHz AMPS/CDMA and 1900 MHz
CDMA PCS systems, it is appropriate that a single set of isolation requirements should be adopted.
Therefore minimum TX-TX antenna isolations of 23 dB, minimum RX-RX antenna isolations of
20 dB, and minimum TX-RX antenna isolations of 34 dB, will be adopted for both bands and sys-
tem types covered by this section.
Also included in this section are several antenna placement examples as well as a discussion of
some typical isolations that can be expected between various combinations of 800 MHz and 1900
MHz antennas.
6.5.1 CDMA/AMPS Transmit/Receive Antenna Isolation Requirements
The antenna isolation requirements in Table 6-3 represent the port-to-port isolation between the
equipment end of the bottom jumper of one antenna system to the equipment end of the bottom
jumper of the other antenna system. Therefore, if the combined jumper and main transmission line
losses of the transmit and receive antenna systems are say 5 dB then the required isolation between
the two antennas themselves would only have to be 29 dB to achieve the required 34 dB port-to-
port isolation listed in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3: Antenna Isolation Requirements
Cellular Band (824-894 MHz) PCS Band (1.7-2.0 GHz)
TX-TX RX-RX TX-RX TX-TX RX-RX TX-RX
Cellular 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB
PCS 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.5.1.1 Measuring Port-to-Port Antenna Isolation
The TX-RX isolation can be measured by feeding a test signal into the transmit antenna bottom
jumper input (normally connected to the transmitter output port) and measuring the level of the sig-
nal at the output end of the receive antenna bottom jumper (normally connected to the receiver in-
put port).
A typical measurement setup for port-to-port isolation between two antennas is a signal generator
feeding the desired transmit frequency (at a level of about -20 dBm) into the transmit antenna bot-
tom jumper and a spectrum analyzer or calibrated test receiver (adjusted to measure the level of the
transmit test signal) connected to the receive antenna bottom jumper. The difference between the
received level and signal generator test level is the port-to-port isolation. For example, if the level
of the received signal is -60 dBm for a signal generator output level of -20 dBm, the port-to-port
isolation would be 40 dB.
6.5.1.2 Reducing the Required Antenna Isolation
Except for overload of the AMPS or CDMA receiver front ends by the AMPS or CDMA transmit
carriers, which require a minimum isolation between the transmit and receive antennas of 20 dB,
all of the isolation requirements above 20 dB outlined above are due to the effects of either the
noise energy or IM products that are produced in the AMPS or CDMA PAs/LPAs and which fall
in the receiver band.
If the receive band attenuation of the bandpass filter in the output of an 800 MHz LPA is increased
(or additional external receiver band filtering is added), the required antenna isolation may be re-
duced. However, transmitter IM products generated by hardware in the RF path following the
bandpass or added external filter may limit the amount of improvement that can be achieved.
6.5.2 Typical Antenna Isolation
For 800 MHz directional panel antennas it should be possible to achieve 25-30 dB of isolation with
0.45-0.6 meters of spacing and 35 dB or so at one meter of horizontal spacing. However, reflections
from the tower structure and coupling effects from other antennas may reduce the isolation obtain-
able. This is especially true for the advertised front-to-back ratios for many directional antennas
which do not have metal reflector panels on the back sides of the panel structures.
1900 MHz PCS directional panel antennas should be able to achieve isolation levels comparable
to similar 800 MHz types at spacings approaching half of the 800 MHz spacings. Because of this
the tower platform sizes at 1900 MHz can be significantly smaller than those at 800 MHz.
On the basis of limited testing by several of the antenna vendors it would appear that the cross band
isolation between 800 MHz and 1900 MHz antennas in close proximity can run 10-15 dB better
than the same band isolation would be for similar physical spacings.
Because of differences between various antenna types the actual antenna isolation of a proposed
site sharing configuration should be measured using the techniques in Section 6.4.1.1.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.5.2.1 CDMA Antenna Placement
Refer to the following figures for CDMA antenna placement examples using a shared platform
approach and a separate platform approach.
Figure 6-21: Antenna Placement - Shared Platform
Figure 6-22: Antenna Placement - Separate Platforms
AMPS
RX
(Main)
CDMA
RX
(Main)
CDMA
RX
(Diversity)
AMPS
RX
(Diversity)
CDMA
TX
20 dB of isolation
desirable
20 dB of isolation
desirable
23 dB of isolation
desirable
34 dB of isolation
required
34 dB of isolation
required
AMPS
TX
Notes: 1. Only 1 face of a 120
o
S/S implementation is shown here.
AMPS
RX
(Main)
CDMA
RX
(Main)
CDMA
RX
(Diversity)
AMPS
RX
(Diversity)
CDMA
TX
AMPS
TX
Notes: 1. Only 1 face of a 120
o
S/S implementation is shown here.
34 dB of isolation
required
34 dB of isolation
required
1 m min.
vertical
separation
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
6.5.2.2 Antenna Placement Considerations
With reference to Figure 6-21 the shared platform approach can be readily utilized for a 800 MHz
AMPS/CDMA configuration with shared receive antennas and one or two sets of separate transmit
antennas. An eight antenna configuration involving two receive and two transmit antennas for each
of the AMPS and CDMA systems, can get rather unwieldy, and the separate platform approach in
Figure 6-22 might be more appropriate.
For 800 MHz and 1900 MHz shared sites the separate platform approach would appear to be the
better choice, not that sufficient isolation could not be obtained with the single platform but be-
cause of the potential for conflicts should either of the systems want to change existing antennas
or add additional antennas. Any physical changes in the antennas for one system could impact the
other system because of a reduction in antenna isolations on the same platform. Separate platforms
will normally provide a higher degree of isolation between the two systems which reduces the pos-
sibility of "political problems" between the two systems when either system desires changes in
their antennas.
6.6 Conclusion
If various factors such as economics, zoning issues, tower loading, etc., result in a decision to share
hardware and/or antennas between CDMA equipment being added to an existing AMPS site then
one or more of the hardware approaches discussed in this section can be implemented. As dis-
cussed, however, a separate set of CDMA antennas on their own platform will avoid many of the
complications that hardware sharing can introduce.
The details on antenna isolation between the various transmit and receive antennas on a shared site
conclude that the required isolation is essentially the same, whether the antennas are in the 800
MHz or 1900 MHz bands, and whether they are associated with an analog or a CDMA system.
6
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.1 Introduction
This section will outline RF engineering considerations that should be incorporated into the design
of a 1,900 MHz CDMA antenna system. The antenna system is defined as those elements be-
tween the BTS equipment cabinet (top of rack) and the TX or RX antenna. In addition to a general
description of the antenna system, issues such as the potential for Inter-Modulation (IM), cavity
combining, antenna diversity and antenna isolation will be discussed. The guidelines below are in-
tended to assure the most efficient implementation of Motorolas CDMA system while minimizing
the risk to other fixed and mobile radio operators. Note that the term SC
TM
4850/E refers to both
the SC
TM
4850 and SC
TM
4850E PCS products.
7.2 The RF Elements of PCS Equipment
While this sub-section of the CDMA planning guide will provide an overview of the antenna sys-
tem, the system engineers should be fully aware of the BTS equipment implications of their RF
design. A description of individual RF board modules is considered outside the scope of this doc-
ument, however, the following figure and attached RF flow diagrams within the appendix will pro-
vide the system engineer with an appreciation of the BTS elements that should be considered when
designing the antenna system. The RF boards to be considered within the Motorola SC
TM
4850/E
and SC
TM
604 equipment cabinets include the following:
Table 7-1: RF Elements considered internal to PCS Equipment
Note that all equipment diagrams presented within this section are for information purposes only
and do not necessarily represent all redundant board configurations and/or equipment options.
SC
TM
4850/E SC
TM
604
Base Band Transceiver (BBX) Motorola Advanced Wideband Interface
(MAWI)
Base Band Distribution Card (BDC) Transmit Receive Transceiver (TRX)
Base Band Input / Output (BIO) Linear Power Amplifiers
CDMA LPA and PA Shelf Receive Distribution Card (RXDC)
Multicoupler Preselector Card (MPC) Duplexer & Directional Coupler (DDC)
Preselector I/O
Section
RF Antenna Systems -
Part 2
7
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.2.1 SC
TM
4850/E Diagram
The following figure outlines the RF flow of the SC
TM
4850/E principle elements outlined above:
Figure 7-1: The Principle RF Elements of the SC
TM
4850 /E
7.3 Duplexer
The duplexer for the SC
TM
4850/E is a standard, three port device, which allows for the combina-
tion of transmit and receive signals onto one antenna.
Figure 7-2: Duplexer
The duplexer does not incorporate a circulator. Therefore, port isolation is achieved through the
GLIQ
MCC-8
BDC
BBX
BIO
Preselector I/O
to other
SC 4850
Frames
MPC
CCP Shelf
CDMA PA
SC 4850
Modem
Frame
CSM
LFR
Clk/Sync
to MCC,
BDC,
BBX,
Dial-Up
Power
Converter
AMR
CDMA PA
Shelf
Common
Equipment
Shelf
Power Conv
GLIQ
TX Filters
RX Filters
Rx Input
Tx Output
Modem
ANT PORT
Rx PORT Tx PORT
Path 1 Path 2
Path 3
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
phasing of the two bandpass filters. The following table outlines the frequency response character-
istics for the duplexer.
Table 7-2: Duplexer Frequency response characteristics
The duplexer 3rd order intermodulation (IM) products between the TX port and RX port, for two
(10) Watt carriers in the transmit band (1,930 - 1,990 MHz) will be below -100 dBm and the fifth
order (and higher) IM products will be below -120 dBm.
The duplexer is physically included within the SC
TM
4850E and SC
TM
604 cabinets (please see
following DDC for SC
TM
604), but is not located within the SC
TM
4850 (indoor) product. The sen-
sitivity, noise and Eb/No figures for all three products are considered identical, assuming that the
duplexer is directly connected to the I/O port (top of rack) of the SC
TM
4850. Please refer to the
current Motorola B1 document for full equipment specifications.
7.3.1 SC
TM
604 Duplexer and Directional Coupler (DDC)
The SC
TM
604 product has integrated a number of elements from the SC
TM
4850 in order to
achieve a physically smaller size. One element of integration is the Duplexing and Directional
Coupler (DDC) functionality which is integral to the SC
TM
604 product.
7.3.2 Pre-Engineered Kits
Note that Motorola will be offering pre-engineered RF kits as part of its equipment offering for the
SC
TM
4850/E, these kits will include items such as duplexers and directional couplers.
7.3.3 Duplexers and Intermodulation
The use of duplexed antennas will allow the combination of transmit and receive signals onto a sin-
gle antenna via a duplexer. This solution may be considered desirable by a number of PCS opera-
tors in order to reduce the total number of antennas required per site. The Motorola PCS
infrastructure will be capable of supporting duplexed antenna configurations. The SC
TM
4850E
and the SC
TM
604 will include internal duplexing equipment.
The use of duplexers implies zero isolation at the antenna port between transmit and receive carri-
Antenna Port to
Receive Port
Transmit Port
to Antenna Port
Transmit Port to
Receive Port
Pass Band 1,850 - 1,910 MHz 1,930 - 1,990 MHz -
Stop Band DC to 1,770 MHz
& 1,990-4,000 MHz
3,860 - 5,970 MHz 1,850 - 1,910 MHz
1,930 - 1,990 MHz
Pass Band Insertion Loss 0.5 dB max 0.5 dB max -
Stop Band Isolation 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB minimum
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
ers. Under these conditions any transmit IM spurs created by non-linearities, in active or passive
components, in the common path, might produce significant interferers if they fall within the re-
ceive carrier band. Duplexers can be made to work, in some applications, under ideal conditions;
but any imperfections introduced by aging, lightning, thermal cycling, bi-metallic interaction or
other common stresses can reduce system performance to below acceptable levels.
With regard to duplexing at 1,900 MHz, it is useful to look at the potential for Intermodulation (IM)
in duplexer equipped installations and to compare it to some of the existing cellular technology sys-
tems. The following table examines the operation of AMPS/GSM/CDMA and outlines the mini-
mum IM order required to generate IM products in the RX band of each technology. The minimum
is calculated since the power generated by IM tends to fall off fairly quickly with increasing IM
order. Therefore, the majority of interference is generated by the lowest order products.
Note that the IM orders presented in the following table refer to the single PCS band case, operation
within multiple PCS bands at the same site may require further investigation.
Table 7-3: Minimum IM Orders.
It is clear from the table above that the 1,900 MHz CDMA systems have a significant advantage
from the combination of smaller channel grouping (no orphan extended bands) and the higher TX
to RX offset. Motorola believes that duplexers are a viable solution for PCS systems due to the fact
that only high order IM products will fall within the PCS band.
7.4 Multiple Carrier Cavity Combining
Combining is considered desirable by PCS operators in order to support multiple carriers at cell
sites with a minimum number of antennas. It is important to remember that the function of com-
bining will inherently add loss to the forward link. The following sub-section will therefore provide
the system engineer with general guidelines on how combining will be implemented within the
SC
TM
architecture (at 1,900 MHz).
7.4.1 Output Power Without Combining
The SC
TM
4850 will provide 20 Watts top of cabinet output power assuming that each carrier is
connected to a separate TX antenna (i.e. no combining). For PCS applications, Motorola assumes
that 13 Watts is sufficient to balance the uplink and downlink paths. The combining and associated
cabling supplied by Motorola will therefore have to provide no greater loss than 1.8 dB in order to
System
Operator
Bandwidth
TX-RX
Spacing
Min IM Order
AMPS A side 22.5 MHz 45 MHz 5th
AMPS B side 14.0 MHz 45 MHz 7th
GSM (best case) 12.5 MHz 45 MHz 7th
1,900 MHz CDMA 15.0 MHz 80 MHz 11th
1,900 MHz CDMA 5.0 MHz 80 MHz > 30th
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
achieve 13 Watts from a 20 Watt LPA input. Note that 20 Watts top of cabinet includes the 0.5
dB loss of the duplexer (for both the SC
TM
4850 & 4850 E) and therefore the 13 Watts output pow-
er will include the loss of both the duplexer and combiner.
The SC
TM
604 will provide 10 Watts top of cabinet output power. The reduced output power of
the SC
TM
604 will require a 1.1 dB (13 W to 10 W) offset in the link budget calculations in order
to balance the paths at 10 Watts. Expansion beyond 2 carriers (2 cabinets) for the SC
TM
604 is cur-
rently not supported due to the additional 1.8 dB loss required for cavity combining.
7.4.2 Type of Combining
Motorola will provide multiple pole cavity filter combiners, utilizing conventional phased trans-
mission line combining techniques, which are self contained within a cast housing. A maximum
of 4 branch combining will be supported allowing up to a maximum of 4 alternate carrier channels
to be combined per antenna/per sector (with duplexers). The insertion loss of the cavity combiners
and associated cabling will not exceed 1.8 dB in order to maintain 13 Watts output power for the
SC
TM
4850/E.
7.4.3 Multiple Carrier Scenarios
The SC
TM
4850 will support a maximum of 8 carriers per site, the SC
TM
4850 E will support a
maximum of 6 carriers per site, all carriers may be combined utilizing a single stage of 4 branch
cavity combining. Note that the difference in maximum carriers supported by the SC
TM
4850 and
SC
TM
4850E is due to the additional loss inherent in longer inter rack cabling required for SC
TM
4850 E outdoor installations. The maximum loss expected through one stage of cavity combining
is 1.8 dB. Motorola can therefore provide 13 Watts output power for all carriers (8 or 6) in a sector.
The minimum number of antennas required for either configuration (4850 or 4850 E) will be 6,
with each sector having two duplexed antennas.
The SC
TM
604 will support a single carrier with one enclosure (shared across three sectors) with
10 Watts at the top of rack output power. The SC
TM
604 can support a maximum configuration
of two carriers with two enclosures (shared across three sectors). Utilizing duplexers for each an-
tenna, a total of 6 antennas will be required for a 3 sector site (2 per sector).
The following figures provide a high level outline of the combining required to support two and
eight carriers with the SC
TM
4850 (note that a only a single sector is shown as all 3 sectors are iden-
tical). Please refer to the appendix for further examples of the RF flow in the SC
TM
4850/E and
SC
TM
604 products.
Assuming that the maximum number of antennas allowed at a cell site is 6, Figure 7-3 shows that
combining is not required for a two carrier configuration. If 6 duplexers are utilized, each antenna
within each sector can be duplexed to either carrier 1 or carrier 2. This configuration will allow for
balanced receive paths (i.e. no need for pads) and will allow for sufficient power (13 Watts) to bal-
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
ance the uplink. Provided that both carriers are duplexed in every sector, only 6 antennas will be
required for a 3 sector site.
Figure 7-3: 2 Carrier Configuration
The Figure 7-4 shows how the maximum configuration of 8 carriers for the SC
TM
4850 may be
combined onto 6 antennas. Note the following applies to SC
TM
4850:
1. Only a single stage of 4 branch cavity combining is required.
2. The use of alternate (non adjacent) frequencies is recommended.
3. Duplexers for each antenna are required.
The configuration of 8 carriers will require (4) SC
TM
4850 cabinets. The system engineer should,
therefore, ensure that the cavity combiners are installed in a centralized location to minimize the
cable lengths associated with multiple carrier/cabinet combining.
Tx1
Tx2
Antenna 1
(Sector 1)
Antenna 2
(Sector 1)
Duplexers
2 Carriers with 2 Duplexers (no combining)
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 7-4: 8 Carrier Configuration
7.5 Directional Couplers
A directional coupler is a power "sampler" with selective directivity, it is a relatively simple
waveguide device that is used to sample the power on a transmission line, both in the forward and
reverse directions. The sampling (or coupling) performed by the directional coupler is attenuated
at a level (typically 30 dB) as to not affect the power on the transmission line, (i.e) it is sampling
rather than splitting. In the Motorola antenna system, directional couplers are used for the connec-
tion of the RFDS (please refer to the following sub-section). For PCS applications the directional
couplers are connected in line with the transmission coax and may be mounted either at the
waveguide (cable entry window) or within a 19" rack.
7.6 RF Diagnostic System
The Motorola RF Diagnostic System (RFDS) is a self contained unit within the SC
TM
BTS archi-
tecture that monitors and tests the RF paths of the SC
TM
BTS site. The aim of the unit is to identify
faults or deteriorated conditions that are sufficient to impair the performance of the cell site RF
channels. For the SC
TM
4850 (indoor) product, the current RFDS is both wall and 19" rack mount-
able, the RFDS for the SC
TM
4850 E and SC
TM
604 will be incorporated into the products (within
the cabinet).
The RFDS connects to the RF paths of the cell site via pre-installed directional couplers (see above)
and the RFDS itself is comprised of the following equipment:
Tx1
Tx2
Tx3 Tx4
Tx5 Tx6
Tx7 Tx8
Antenna 1
(Sector 1)
Antenna 2
(Sector 1)
Duplexer Duplexer
To Rx A To Rx B
4 Branch
Cavity Combiners
4 Branch Cavity Combining for 8 Carriers
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Directional Couplers
Controller Card
A Test Subscriber Unit
Up to 2 Antenna Selector Units
The RFDS measurement unit consists of directional couplers which sense and couple test signals
to and from the RF system, an RF switch that connects "test equipment" to the RF path under test
and a controller which is used to setup/execute tests via the RGLI card. Access points are provided
to allow external measuring instruments to be connected, this means that tests not performed by
the RFDS may be conducted. Examples are transmitter frequency, in-band transmit spurious out-
put, transmit occupied bandwidth and adjacent channel leakage.
The RFDS will allow remote testing through interface connections to the Operations and Mainte-
nance Centre-Radio (OMC-R) and/or the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF). The first phase of
RFDS implementation (with initial SC
TM
installations) will support call termination loopback and
the following phases will include test features such as: call origination with mobile status reports,
forward (TX) pilot channel power, TX/RX antenna VSWR, and forward FER rate.
The RFDS can improve system performance by providing a quick and efficient method of detect-
ing faults and it will provide the operator with the earliest notification of degraded equipment per-
formance.
7.7 Surge (Lightning) Protectors
To compliment the existing internal and external grounding system (Please Reference: "Motoro-
las Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations" - 68P81150E62), all transmission ca-
bles entering the cell site must be protected by devices such as "grounding kits" and tube or MOV
protectors, commonly called "Surge or Lightning Protectors". Surge protectors are required in or-
der to dissipate surge energy that can be generated from a local lightning strikes or other energy
sources on the transmission lines.
A single surge protection unit is required (in addition to sufficient grounding equipment) for every
transmission cable entering the site (TX/RX/GPS). The following description outlines the Motor-
ola recommended surge protection unit. Please contact Motorola ancillary (dropship) for specific
PCS product part numbers.
Huber and Suhner 3400 Series: This protector consists of a coaxial transmission line and an opti-
mized 1/4-wave shorting stub which is located between the center conductor and outer conductor.
These protectors are designed as coaxial feedthroughs. A V-groove washer made of soft copper
ensures that a low contact resistance between protector body and the mounting wall is achieved.
7.8 Transmission Line
The standard type of transmission line used for PCS antenna systems is coaxial cable. There are a
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
number of factors that must be considered in the choice of coaxial cable both in terms of RF per-
formance and physical application.
7.8.1 RF Performance of Transmission Lines
For RF performance, the most important parameters in the choice of coaxial cable include, attenu-
ation loss for a given frequency/ambient temperature, the VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio),
return loss, power rating and insulation properties of the cable.
The loss of a coaxial cable will vary with frequency. Generally, the higher the frequency, the great-
er the loss for a fixed distance. Transmission line losses are incorporated into link budget calcula-
tions to determine the total loss of a path. As this "pathloss" will determine cell radius, the loss of
transmission cable should be kept to a minimum. Different types of coaxial cable are available and
those with superior electrical properties (lower loss) are normally both larger (thickness) and more
expensive (per meter).
The VSWR rating of a cable is the additional load allowed due to the mismatch of impedance, the
system engineer should ensure that a cable with a VSWR rating of between 1.01:1 and 1.15:1 is
ordered. A cable which allows higher VSWR and hence load (due to reflected power) will increase
the attenuation of the transmission line. Note that a VSWR of 1.15:1 equates to 23 dB return loss.
The return loss of a cable can be directly related to the VSWR rating. The return loss of a transmis-
sion cable can be considered the difference in power in the forward and reverse directions when
measured into a well matched load. All other things being equal, the higher the return loss the better
the cable. The system engineer should choose a transmission cable with a return loss of 23 dB or
better.
Please refer to the antenna parameter sub-section Section 7.10.4 Return Loss on page 206 for an
explanation on how to convert VSWR to return loss.
The peak power rating of a coaxial cable refers to the maximum amount of power that can be safely
sent over the coax, the power rating is determined by the type of insulation material and the struc-
ture between the inner and outer conductors of the cable (dielectric).
Power rating is not expected to be a problem for low powered CDMA PCS application as standard
cable power ratings are rarely reached even for multiple carrier cellular configurations.
7.8.2 Physical Characteristics
The physical characteristics of coaxial cable should not be overlooked in the choice of transmission
line. Although from a system perspective, the goal may be to limit loss, site specific installation
criteria may limit the type of coaxial cable that can be used. The system engineer should consider;
the cable length required, minimum bending radius allowed, the weight of multiple cables, the ef-
fects of wind loading, the ability to correctly mount/ground the cables and the cost of installation
and expansion.
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Generally, thicker cables allow less loss over a given distance but require more substantial hard-
ware for mounting and grounding. The system engineer should plan for an achievable transmission
line loss during initial system planning bearing in mind both the optimum cable performance and
the physical limitations of the cell site. During preliminary planning, it is recommended that the
system engineer plans for approximately 2-3 dB total transmission line loss (including transition
cables).
7.8.3 Choice of Transmission Line
The recommended type of transmission line for PCS applications in terms of performance versus
cost, is foam dialectric coaxial cable. The dielectric material used is a closed-cell, low density poly-
ethylene foam which prevents water penetration and allows for repeated bending. A solid corru-
gated outer conductor results in low loss, high power handling and continuous RF/EMI shielding.
The combination of both a solid inner and outer conductor minimizes the potential for intermodu-
lation generation.
The following table gives an example of typical foam dielectric cables and their respective attenu-
ation per 100 ft.
Table 7-4: Transmission Line Performance.
7.9 Transition Feeder Cables (Jumper Cables)
While the system engineer is considering the transmission line loss within the link budget, the loss
of transition cables or Jumpers that may be required both at the antenna and equipment hardware
also need to be included. These jumpers will generally be required due to the physical limitations
of low loss thicker cable (i.e. the bending radius). The length of these jumper cables should be kept
to within a few meters and the associated loss of both the cable and connectors should be calculat-
ed. The following table outlines a typical jumper cable type, Andrews 1/2" Superflex.
Characteristic
Andrews
LDF5-50A
(7/8")
Andrews
LDF6-50
(1-1/4")
Andrews
LDF7-50
(1-5/8")
Attenuation dB/100ft @ 1850 MHz 1.88 dB 1.38 dB 1.19 dB
Impedance (Ohms) 50 50 50
Peak Power Rating @ 1850 MHz
(kW)
1.45 2.20 2.96
DC Breakdown volts 6000 9000 11000
Diameter over jacket (mm) 28 39.4 50
Minimum bending radius (mm) 250 380 510
Cable Weight (kg/m) 0.49 0.98 1.36
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 7-5: Transition Cable Characteristics.
7.10 Antenna Parameters
This sub-section of the document will outline the main antenna parameters that the system engineer
should consider when choosing the optimum PCS antenna. Guidelines are provided where possi-
ble, although it is recognized that a number of issues are beyond the scope of this document and
may require site specific engineering.
7.10.1 Antenna Gain
This is often referred to as "power gain" and is the ratio of the maximum radiation in a given di-
rection to that of a reference antenna in the same direction for equal power input. Usually this gain
is referenced to either an isotropic antenna or a half wave dipole in free space at 0 degrees eleva-
tion.
Isotropic (dBi) generally refers to a theoretical antenna having a spherical radiation pattern with
equal gain in all directions. When used as a gain reference, the isotropic antenna has a power of 0
dBi. The halfwave dipole (dBd) is an antenna which is center fed as to have equal current distribu-
tion in both halves. When used as a theoretical reference antenna it has a power gain of 0 dBd,
which equates to a 2.14 dB difference compared to an Isotropic antenna. For a graphical represen-
tation of the different antenna patterns, please refer to the following figure.
dBi = dBd + 2.14 dBd = dBi - 2.14
Characteristic Andrews FSJ4-50B
Attenuation dB/100ft @ 1850 MHz 5.17 dB
Impedance (Ohms) 50
Peak Power Rating @ 1850 MHz (kW) 0.625
DC Breakdown volts 2500
Diameter over jacket (mm) 13.2
Minimum bending radius (mm) 32
Cable Weight (kg/m) 0.21
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 7-5: dBd Vs. dBi
The gain of the antenna will impact other antenna characteristics such as: size, weight, horizontal
beamwidth, vertical beamwidth, cost. The RF Engineer will need to select the appropriate antenna
for the particular situation. A trade-off will need to be made by the RF Engineer as to whether a
higher gain or lower gain antenna should be chosen. The higher gain antenna typically is physically
larger, more expensive and has a narrower vertical beamwidth than would a lower gain antenna.
The gain of an antenna has a direct interaction with other antenna parameters, (the technical depth
of which is beyond the scope of this document), the following paragraphs will provide the system
engineer with general guidelines:
Vertical Beamwidth - Generally, the greater the gain of the antenna, the narrower the vertical
beamwidth. The vertical beam can be used to focus coverage in some circumstances, but the engi-
neer should ensure that the optimum vertical beamwidth is used to prevent the creation of "nulls"
or coverage holes near to the site.
Physical Size - The size of an antenna will generally be greater as an antenna gain increases. This
is due to the greater number of dipole array and electrical elements required to reach the desired
gain. The system engineer should remember that PCS frequencies are approximately half the wave-
length of 800 MHz and therefore the antennas will typically be smaller for a common gain.
Height of Antenna - In general the 6 dB per octave rule will apply to the cell site antenna height
in a flat terrain, that is doubling the antenna height causes a gain increase of 6 dB. The system en-
gineer should compare this possible gain increase with the effects of doubling the transmission line
loss and the possible appearance of nulls close to the site.
Figure 7-6 shows the comparative number of cell sites required for a given area based upon differ-
ing base station antenna heights and the Cost-231 Hata propagation model (i.e. flat terrain only).
If 100 ft. (30 m) is considered as the reference point, the system engineer should note that by dou-
bling the antenna height to 200 ft., there is a reduction of 50% in cell sites required.
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 7-6: The Relationship of Antenna Height to Number of Cell Sites.
7.10.2 Antenna Beamwidth
Antenna beamwidth is measured in degrees between the half power points (3 dB) of the major lobe
of the antenna, Beamwidth can be expressed in terms of azimuth (horizontal or H-plane) and ele-
vation (vertical or E-plane).
The predominant type of antenna configuration within urban areas at PCS frequencies will be three
sectored. This implies that each sector should utilize an antenna with 120 degree horizontal beam-
width, however, it has been found through simulation that the use of 120 degree antennas provide
too much overlap. As the coverage of any sector within a CDMA system is directly affected by the
noise generated by its neighboring sectors and traffic within those sectors, the use of 120 degree
can lead to reduced coverage area through the rise in system noise. The excessive overlap of sectors
can also lead to increased softer handoff and therefore the reduction of call processing capability.
If narrow horizontal beamwidth antennas are used, for example 60 degrees, simulation has shown
that insufficient coverage (i.e. coverage holes) can exist between adjacent sectors. The use of 60
degree high gain antennas can also restrict the vertical beamwidth and can lead to coverage nulls
close to the cell site.
From current simulation, the optimum horizontal antenna beamwidth for PCS systems has been
found to be between 90 and 100 degrees. This beamwidth has been proven to minimize softer hand-
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
off while providing adequate coverage. However, before choosing an antenna of this beamwidth,
the system engineer should ensure that all factors outlined within this "Antenna Parameters" sub-
section have been identified.
7.10.3 Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) is another parameter used to describe an antenna perfor-
mance. It deals with the impedance match of the antenna feed point to the feed or transmission line.
The antenna input impedance establishes a load on the transmission line as well as on the radio link
transmitter and receiver. To have RF energy produced by the transmitter radiated with minimum
loss or the energy picked up by the antenna passed to the receiver with minimum loss, the input or
base impedance of the antenna must be matched to the characteristics of the transmission line. The
VSWR of a PCS antenna should be less than 1.5:1.
7.10.4 Return Loss
Return loss is the decibel difference between the power incident upon a mismatched continuity and
the power reflected from that discontinuity. Return loss can be related to the reflection coefficient
(VSWR) as follows;
RL
dB
= 20 log (1/p) Where p = VSWR-1/VSWR+1
VSWR = Vmax/Vmin
In other words, the return loss of an antenna can be considered as the difference in power in the
forward and reverse directions due to impedance mismatches in the antenna design.
All other things being equal, the higher the antenna return loss, the better the antenna. The system
engineer should choose an antenna with a return loss of 14 dB or better. Note that 14 dB corre-
sponds to a VSWR of 1.5:1 as per the following example;
VSWR = 1.5/1 = 1.5 p = 1.5 VSWR-1/VSWR+1 = 0.5/2.5 = 0.2
RL
dB
= 20log (1/0.2)
RL
dB
= 13.979 dB
7.10.5 Power Rating
The Power Rating of an antenna is the maximum power, normally expressed in Watts that the an-
tenna will pass without degraded performance. Typical values for the power rating of an antenna
are between 300 and 500 Watts. As PCS CDMA will employ a smaller number of carriers and due
to the losses associated with combining, the power rating of an antenna is not expected to be lim-
iting factor for antenna choice. Even so, when choosing an antenna, the system engineer should
consider system expansion and the theoretical maximum configuration of carriers that could be
placed onto a single antenna (please refer to Section 7.4 Multiple Carrier Cavity Combining on
page 196).
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.10.6 Front to Back Ratio
The front to back ratio of an antenna is an important measure of performance. It is the ratio of the
power radiated from the main ray beam forward to that radiated from the back lobe behind the an-
tenna. Front to back ratio is normally expressed in terms of dB, this means that a signal at the back
of the antenna should be X dB down on a signal at a mirror angle in front of the antenna. The front
to back ratio for a typical PCS antenna should be in the region of 25 dB.
7.10.7 Side Lobes & Back Lobes
Side and Back lobes are those undesirable directions where the chosen "directional" antenna may
present gain. The system engineer should pay particular attention to these characteristics when
downtilting an antenna, the mechanical downtilting of an antenna will directly affect the radiation
of both side and back lobes. The mounting of panel antennas on buildings or the use of antenna
with electronic down/up tilt are two possible ways to limit back lobe interference.
The system engineer should choose the optimum directivity and gain of an antenna while limiting
the number of side lobes and the strength of the back lobe (refer to previous paragraph - front to
back ratio).
7.10.8 Antenna Downtilting
Downtilting is the method of effectively adjusting the vertical radiation pattern of the antenna to
increase the amount of power radiated downwards. Downtilting can be used to increase the amount
of coverage close to the site where "nulls" (holes) may exist due to the effective height of the an-
tenna. Downtilting can also be used to reduce "pilot pollution" caused by reflections or undesired
RF propagation beyond a pre-determined footprint. There are principally two types of antenna
downtilting possible, mechanical and electronic.
Mechanical downtilting can be achieved through the mechanical adjustment of an antennas phys-
ical position. The main advantage of the mechanical type of downtilting is the ease (dependent
upon location) of mechanically adjusting the antennas direction following system optimization.
Note that any cellular or PCS network will require some degree of system optimization based upon
site specific variables. The adjustment of antenna downtilt has historically been one of the principle
methods of tuning system performance, therefore the system engineer should consider if the chosen
antenna can be downtilted and if so, by how much?
The second method of downtilting that can used for Cellular/PCS applications is Electronic down-
tilt. This is the only way to implement downtilt for an Omni directional antenna. The level of elec-
tronic downtilt for an antenna is normally pre-set and ordered directly from the antenna
manufacturer. The system engineer should be aware that as electrical antenna downtilt is pre-set,
the field adjustment of downtilt and therefore vertical radiation can not normally be reduced.
The system engineer should also remember that the amount of gain in the antenna will also have a
direct affect both on the physical size of the antenna and the vertical beamwidth. If a low gain an-
tenna is utilized, the vertical beamwidth will be relatively broad and therefore the benefits of down-
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
tilting will be minimal.
7.11 Antenna Isolation
(For 1900 MHz CDMA antenna isolation requirements, refer to Table 6-3 in Sub-Section
6.4.1)
The following recommendations are general guidelines on the isolation required between own
system antennas. Motorola are currently defining specific isolation values for both own system
CDMA antenna isolation and foreign system antenna isolation. The foreign system could perceiv-
ably be one of the following;
In-Band CDMA (1,900 MHz) on adjacent or non adjacent spectrum
Out-of-Band CDMA (800 MHz)
In-Band "other" PCS technology on adjacent or non adjacent spectrum
Out-of-Band "other" cellular/MIRS technology on adjacent or non adjacent spectrum
TX Antenna to TX Antenna: There must be sufficient isolation between any two transmit antennas
to attenuate the signals from one antenna sufficiently before they enter another transmit antenna
and create transmitter IM products in the associated transmitters that are strong enough to cause a
problem for the system.
RX Antenna to RX Antenna: For adequate receive diversity performance there must be sufficient
spacing between the two antennas to achieve the desired degree of de-correlation of the two receiv-
er feeds for the signals being received.
TX Antenna to RX Antenna: The isolation between the PCS transmit and receive antennas at a cell
site must be high enough to provide sufficient attenuation to eliminate the following three potential
problems:
1. Receiver overload caused by the high level transmit carriers being picked up by the
receive antennas and causing receiver desensitization and/or generating IM products
within the receiver which interfere with the reception of the desired signals.
2. Interference with the reception of the desired signals caused by transmitter sideband
noise and/or spurious signals generated in the transmitter which fall in the receive band
and whose energy is radiated from the transmit antennas and picked up by the receive
antennas.
3. Interference with the reception of the desired signals caused by transmit IM products
falling in the receive band that are generated in the transmit antenna systems consisting
of feed line and jumper connectors and/or the transmit antennas themselves. These IM
products are produced after the transmitter output filtering and therefore cannot be
eliminated by any transmitter filtering. These IM products will be radiated by the
transmit antennas and picked up by the receive antennas.
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.12 Antenna Diversity (Spacial)
The CDMA system employs time, space and frequency diversity. Spatial diversity is implemented
through the use of two receive antennas at the base station, commonly called "Antenna Diversity".
Receive antenna diversity is employed at the base site to improve the uplink by approximately 3 to
5 dB. The gain obtained by spatial diversity is based on the assumption that the signals received by
the two separated antennas are not correlated or have a low degree of correlation, the affects of fad-
ing on one path will therefore be independent from the second. The 3 to 5 dB improvement is al-
ready incorporated into the equipment Eb/No receiver sensitivity specification. Note that if
horizontal diversity is not utilized the equipment performance may degrade.
7.12.1 Horizontal Antenna Diversity and Recommended Separation
The conventional method for determining the minimum separation for horizontal antennas to
achieve non correlation is normally expressed as a factor of the frequency wavelength (speed of
light/frequency). The recommendation for standard cellular implementation (800 MHz) has gener-
ally been accepted as 10 times the frequency wavelength (lambda). This figure should only be con-
sidered as an average distance as the level of correlation for horizontal diversity can also be
affected by a number of variables, for example; the height of the antennas, the type of surrounding
clutter (i.e. the level of multipath) and the typical angular arrival of the signals (i.e. are the antennas
mounted perpendicular to a highway).
As the wavelength of PCS frequencies is approximately half that of conventional cellular, it seems
fair to assume that the diversity antenna separation for PCS will effectively be half that of 800 MHz
systems. At this time, the antenna separation of 10 lambda at the base site is considered sufficient
for the non correlation of uplink signals within an urban environment (obviously greater than 10
lambda will provide even less correlation).
Note that Lees equation utilizes the antenna height in addition to frequency to determine the min-
imum horizontal diversity separation. This equation can be used as a more accurate planning guide-
line where the antenna height is known.
Frequency: 1,850 MHz Wavelength: 16 cm Diversity distance (x10): 1.6 m (5.3 ft.)
Lees Equation: d = 77.27*h/f
Where d = Rx antenna separation, h = Rx antenna height (ft.), f = frequency (MHz)
Example (1,850 MHz @ 100 ft.)d = 77.27*100/1,850
d = 4.2 ft.
It is believed that the horizontal separation of 5.3 (ft.) is an achievable separation distance for PCS
cell site installations. Field trials and performance tests on initial PCS systems will determine if
this minimum separation can be reduced under certain conditions.
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.12.2 Vertical Antenna Diversity
The vertical separation of two diversity antennas could be an appealing alternative for PCS
operators where the location of two horizontally separated antennas is hard to achieve.
Unfortunately, the system engineer should be aware that the vertical separation of antennas
provides poor diversity performance. This is due to a higher degree of correlation for a given
distance compared to horizontal separation. In other words, the vertical separation distance
required between two base site antennas is much larger than the horizontal separation required to
gain the same correlation coefficient of two received branches.
The preferred method of implementing diversity at a base site is horizontal diversity. While vertical
separation of receive antennas will provide a degree of non correlation, the performance of vertical
diversity is not considered as effective as horizontal diversity.
7.13 GPS Antennas
The installation of a GPS antenna and associated cabling is discussed later in this document. As the
recommendations for GPS antenna mounting (etc) are common for both 800 MHz and 1,900 MHz
no further guidelines will be proposed here.
7.14 Equipment Recommendations
All RF components in the cell site common receive/transmit path must be certified by the equip-
ment manufacturer for IM performance. A typical (derived from GSM) IM specification is that all
transmit intermodulation products appearing in the receive band should be less than -110 dBm for
two input transmit carriers at a power level of 25 Watts per carrier.
In addition, a regularly scheduled Preventative Maintenance Inspection (PMI) plan should be de-
veloped to verify that system IM performance has not been degraded and to ensure component in-
tegrity. Typical requirements for a PMI plan are described below. The following components at the
site would require IM certification:
Coax - Standard Heliax type coax is considered to have acceptable IM performance if undam-
aged and unkinked. Other types of coax would have to be individually tested and certified. Cable
installation should include visual inspections for cable damage and electrical measurements to ver-
ify performance.
Provisions for strain relief to minimize stress on cables and maintain proper bend radii should be
made. Cables should be mounted securely so as to prevent vibration and movement per vender
specifications.
Connectors - The connectors in the common transmit/receive path are the most likely cause of sys-
tem IM problems. System planning should attempt to minimize the number of connections in this
path in order to prevent IM problems from occurring. Connectors with good IM properties have
silver plating and mechanical rigidity. 7/16 type connectors have been optimized for IM perfor-
mance and should be used if possible in all paths with potential for IM problems. Assembly and
installation instructions should be provided by the manufacturer and should include torque speci-
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
fications. All connectors should be thoroughly cleaned prior to installation and waterproofed, if ex-
posed to outdoor elements. Care should be taken when mating and unmating connectors to prevent
contamination and to maintain plating integrity. Connectors should be regularly inspected for dam-
age and proper torque.
Lightning Arrestors -Certification of lightning arrestors is the same as that of connectors. In ad-
dition, lightning arrestor performance will degrade if a lightning strike has been taken by the an-
tenna. Verification of component performance should be made regularly.
Duplexers - Considerable effort has been made by duplexer manufacturers to improve IM perfor-
mance of duplexers. A duplexer that has been certified for its IM performance should include ad-
equate silver plating of components. Accelerated life testing should be performed as part of the
certification process. Only IM certified duplexers should be used in a duplexed system.
Antennas - Each antenna installed in a cell site should be tested and certified for IM performance.
This is due to the additional potential IM risk of contamination of the material used for the radiating
elements (no ferromagnetic materials). Proper care in installation should be used to prevent anten-
na damage and to verify that there are no metallic objects in the radiation paths close enough to
radiate back into the receiver (the rusty bolt effect). Mechanical stability should be provided to
protect from exposure and wind effects. Inspection and electrical verification should be made on a
regular basis, especially after a lightning strike or other unusual weather occurrence.
7.14.1 Installation Recommendations
Antennas - Care should be taken in installation to maintain proper distances from any other radi-
ator or other obstruction on the same tower.
Cable Lashing - All cables should be prevented from movement. A major source of IM is the
movement of the cable at any connector. In addition, damage may result to the cable at a connector
from continued movement.
Cable Bends - Care should be taken to prevent any excessive bends in cabling. Slack and service
loops should be provided in cable runs to prevent stress to cables.
Water Proofing - All external connectors should be waterproofed and regularly inspected for her-
meticism. External components should be installed so as to prevent internal water capture. Com-
ponents should be removed from any areas with potential standing water.
7.14.2 Maintenance
A Preventative Maintenance Inspection (PMI) plan should be developed and followed in order to
maintain the IM performance of a cell site. A PMI should include a complete visual inspection of
the cell site for obvious component damage or misapplication.
7
Version 2.1
12/18/98
7.15 Conclusion
Although antennas are designed for a specific band of operation, standard procedures for mounting
and PMI should be followed. The greatest difference lies in the calculations required for diversity,
losses, and placements. These new calculations are, obviously, due to the frequency spectrum it-
self, and also the physical make-up of antennas which radiate at the PCS frequencies (i.e. usually
smaller and lighter).
Antennas radiate the RF signal. It is therefore imperative, in CDMA, that antennas are properly in-
stalled (including verifying azimuth, height and tilt) and the correct antenna type (beamwidth etc.)
is selected to minimize noise and maximize capacity.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
8.1 Introduction
A CDMA spread spectrum digital cellular system requires a much higher degree of synchroniza-
tion between base stations which is not normally required with other cellular technologies. As de-
fined in the Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System standard (EIA/TIA/IS-95), CDMA base
stations must contain a time base reference from which all time critical transmissions, including
pilot PN sequences, frames, and Walsh functions, must be derived. This time base reference must
be time-aligned to CDMA System Time and must provide a means to maintain time alignment in
the event that the external source of system time is lost.
This section describes the clock / synchronization sub-system specifically developed to achieve the
required level of synchronization and provide a high degree of redundancy for the Motorola
CDMA Base Station product. Information contained in this document may be covered under sev-
eral patents which have either been granted or are currently pending.
8.2 Nomenclature
The following nomenclature has been followed throughout this section:
Shall and shall not identify requirements to be followed strictly to conform to a
standard and from which no deviation is permitted.
Should and should not identify a certain course of action which is preferred but not
necessarily required; or (in the negative form) that a certain possibility or course of
action is discouraged but not prohibited.
CDMA System Time Defined to begin on January 6, 1980 00:00:00 UTC, which coin-
cides with the start of GPS time, but does not incorporate UTC leap second corrections
to system time clocks (i.e. GPS time).
8.3 Cell-Site Synchronization
8.3.1 Applicable EIA/TIA Specifications
The following items are the key specifications which influence the design of the clock / synchro-
nization sub-system for CDMA cell-site equipment. They originate from the EIA/TIA/IS-95 stan-
dard entitled Mobile Station - Base Station Compatibility Standard Dual-Mode Wideband Spread
Spectrum Cellular System".
Section
Synchronization of the
CDMA System
8
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
8.3.1.1 CDMA System Time: 1.2
Origin: System Synchronization
Requirement: All base station digital transmissions shall be referenced to a common
CDMA system-wide time scale that uses the Global Positioning System
(GPS) time scale, which is traceable to and synchronous with Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC).
8.3.1.2 Frequency Tolerance: 7.1.1.2
Origin: RF Spectrum Allocation
Requirement: The RF spectrum allocation shall not exceed +0.05 ppm of the CDMA
frequency assignment.
8.3.1.3 Timing Reference Source: 7.1.5.1
Origin: Synchronization/Redundancy
Requirements: Time-aligned to CDMA System Time shall maintain time alignment
when the external source of system time is lost
8.3.1.4 Base Station Transmission Time: 7.1.5.2
Origin: Mobile Search Window
Requirements: Generation of the pilot PN sequence with respect to CDMA System Time
shall not exceed + 1 S for CDMA Channels from same base station,
should not exceed + 3 S between base stations (i.e. GPS Operational),
and shall not exceed + 10 S between base stations (i.e. GPS Failure).
8.3.2 Approach
IS-95 section 7.1.5.2 specifies that all CDMA base stations should transmit their pilot sequence
within +3 S of CDMA system time. CDMA System Time is equivalent to GPS time. The primary
method of providing this degree of synchronization and absolute time information is through the
use of the GPS satellite network using a GPS receiver. To maintain system synchronization, should
there be a GPS failure, an alternative source must be available at all base stations in the network.
This source must keep a site within the + 10 S specified to restrict the maximum window size over
which a mobile must search. Depending upon geographical location, Low Frequency Navigational
Broadcasts are an excellent source which can be used to provide indefinite redundancy for a GPS
failure. A Free Running Rubidium oscillator is an option which provides limited redundancy,
since a base station will eventually drift out of synchronization due to tolerances. Clock extraction
from the cell-site span lines is another potential frequency source but is even further restricted in
its application. These sources are graphically depicted in Figure 8-1, which shows the synchroni-
zation architecture for a CDMA cell-site.
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 8-1: CDMA Cell site Synchronization Architecture
Spanline Interface
CDMA base station 1
LF
Receiver
GPS
Receiver
Spanline Interface
CDMA base station 2
LF
Receiver
GPS
Receiver
GPS
Sat.
1
GPS
Sat.
N
f
c
= 1.57 GHz N = 6 MAX
f
c
= 100 kHz
M = 6 MAX
LF
BROADCAST
TRANSMITTER
LF
BROADCAST
TRANSMITTER
Rubidium
Oscillator
Rubidium
Oscillator
M
S
C
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
8.4 Synchronization Sources
There are four types of synchronization sources GPS, LF (Low Frequency) Standard, High Stabil-
ity Oscillator, and Spanline Clocks, which offer various degrees of base station synchronization.
The first three sources are supported by the Motorola clock/synchronization sub-system.
8.4.1 Global Positioning System
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a radio-navigation system that employs RF transmitters
in 24 satellites. The satellite configuration when completed will guarantee that a GPS receiver lo-
cated anywhere on earth can receive RF signals from at least four satellites 24 hours a day (with
unobstructed visibility). For commercial use, each satellite transmits unique bi-phase pseudo-ran-
dom-noise codes on the L-band carrier frequency of 1.57542 GHz. A GPS receiver decodes the
spread-spectrum modulations and uses triangulation techniques on the signals to calculate precise
latitude, longitude, altitude and timing information from a position on earth. GPS, officially known
as the NAVSTAR GPS (NAVigation System with Timing and Ranging Global Positioning Sys-
tem) is operated by the Department of Defense (DoD). It consists of 21 operational satellites and
3 spares circling the earth once every 12 hours.
The GPS receiver when used as a synchronization source for a CDMA cell-site, offers several sig-
nificant advantages over the other alternatives. The system provides world-wide coverage, abso-
lute system time information, excellent accuracy, and all at a relatively low cost. There are however
some limitations associated with the use of GPS which prevent it from being the total system so-
lution for base station synchronization. The requirement for an unobstructed view of the satellite
orbits force several restrictions on antenna placement and cabling at a cell-site (see Installation
Section).
Several environmental factors (i.e. snow, sleet, debris, RF interference) can severely degrade re-
ceiver performance. Field tests have shown that some receivers can be jammed by intentional or
non-intentional low power interference sources over a fairly wide range (1 Watt up to 14 miles).
Since the entire network is under DoD control and has important military significance, the uninter-
rupted availability of the system can also be cause for concern. Selective Availability (SA) can de-
grade the accuracy of the GPS system for civilian use, by intentionally introducing random jitter
into the timing signals being transmitted. For normal levels of SA, the GPS system with proper fil-
tering can still provide acceptable accuracies to satisfy CDMA base station timing requirements.
Accuracies of +150 S without and +400 S with SA are typical.
8.4.2 Low Frequency Radio Band
Transmissions within the Low Frequency (LF) radio band are primarily ground based waves which
are not affected by changes in the ionosphere level. This is why LF radio frequencies (30 kHz to
300 kHz) exhibit only minor phase variations over time. For this reason, the LF band has been pri-
marily used for standard time and navigation broadcasts. There are many LF broadcasts (LORAN-
C, WWVB, MSF) which could be considered suitable for a synchronization source.
LORAN-C (LOng RAnge Navigation-C) is perhaps the most practical LF broadcast for this pur-
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
pose. This is due to the wide coverage and accurate timing signals transmitted by LORAN-C.
There are currently more than fifty transmitters throughout the world, providing coverage over
most of the northern hemisphere. A LORAN-C transmitter's useful coverage can extend from ap-
proximately 1500 to 2000 miles. The domestic transmitters are run off of three Cesium clocks at
each transmitter site, with 18 transmitters organized into 6 chains across the continental U.S (some
transmitters are dual rated).
While LORAN-C does not broadcast UTC information, its signal is traceable to UTC. The use of
this transmission requires that initial synchronization be achieved by some other means. LORAN-
C does provide much greater coverage and is less prone to atmospheric disturbances as compared
to other LF sources which are UTC based (i.e. WWVB).
By phase locking to the pulse train transmitted by a LORAN-C station, it is possible to synthesize
a clock having a stability of 1 X 10
-11
. A precisely timed interval is broadcasted by these stations
that is within +200 S of its prescribed time. By measuring this period with an operational GPS
receiver and correlating it to current GPS time, LORAN-C provides a widely available central syn-
chronization source that can easily maintain base station synchronization for a CDMA cellular net-
work. While there is presently little coverage in the southern hemisphere, chains are being
considered for South America and other potential CDMA markets.
8.4.3 High Stability Oscillator (HSO)
The High Stability Oscillator (HSO) is an optional card that provides backup for the GPS. The
HSO module is an alternate source of the synchronization and absolute time information that is re-
quired at a CDMA BTS. It provides a precise oscillator as the backup source for timing reference
when there is a loss of the GPS signal, a GPS receiver failure, or a primary CSM failure. The out-
puts of the HSO card are routed to each of the CSM modules (CSM1 and CSM 2). The HSO is
capable of maintaining the synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for up
to 24 hours.
8.4.4 Span Line
A Mobile Switching Center (MSC) typically incorporates centralized Cesium-based technology
which allows the interconnecting span lines to have extremely stable clock rates. The potential
therefore exists to recover these span line clocks for a cost effective frequency reference for cell-
site equipment. This method however, typically encounters many problems. Most networks re-
frame data which can introduce inconsistent path delays. Networks having multiple jitter attenua-
tors, essentially convert jitter into wander, which cannot be effectively filtered. For those networks
that have relatively clean span lines, this scheme could be utilized as a cost effective alternative for
synchronization redundancy to the primary GPS source. This capability, while designed into the
Motorola Clock/Synchronization Sub-System hardware, has such limited applications that it is not
presently available as a product offering.
8.5 Redundancy
As has been previously stated, the GPS receiver is the primary synchronization source for the
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
CDMA base station equipment because of its many distinctive advantages. A multi-chain linear
averaging digital LORAN-C receiver provides the secondary source for synchronization. This con-
figuration under control of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) provides an extremely ro-
bust synchronization sub-system and the two uniquely different technologies have advantages and
disadvantages which compliment each other extremely well. This insures that base station synchro-
nization can be maintained indefinitely in the event of a failure in either source.
The following list summarize some of the more important strengths and limitations of the systems
and highlight the complementary nature of these synchronization sources.
8.5.1 GPS Failure
In the event of a local GPS (base site receiver, antenna, etc.) failure one of the alternative sources
described above are needed to maintain synchronization. In this situation the base station is receiv-
ing synchronization from a different source than other base stations within the network. It is there-
fore possible for the base station to drift out of synchronization should the source not be
synchronized to GPS time. In this case a minimum accuracy must be provided to allow sufficient
time to service the failed GPS equipment. A synchronization source providing +1 x 10
-10
accuracy,
GPS Strength:
World-wide coverage
System time information accu-
rate to within + 1S
Signal unaffected by electrical
storms
Unaffected by Low Frequency
jamming sources
GPS Limitations:
Military significance (and con-
trol)
Unobstructed view of satellites
required
Signal maybe significantly
attenuated by snow, sleet or
heavy rain
Jamming on carrier frequency
possible
LORAN-C Strength:
Non-military system
Line of site view of transmitter is not
required
Reception is not affected by snow, sleet
or heavy rain
Unaffected by High Frequency jamming
sources
Capable of maintaining network syn-
chronization indefinitely
LORAN-C Limitations:
Poor coverage in southern hemisphere
Synchronous to UTC but no encoded
time standard
Signal may be affected by extreme elec-
trical storms.
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
like a rubidium oscillator, can maintain base station synchronization for a minimum of 20 hours
(i.e. 0.8 days).
Synchronization Loss Time(minimum) = (10S - 3S) / Clock Accuracy
= 7S / 1 x 10
-10

= 19.4 hours for a Rubidium Oscillator
Using LORAN-C, which is traceable to UTC, as is GPS time, system synchronization can be main-
tained indefinitely. Since the LORAN-C transmitting network is not directly connected to the GPS
network (which makes it a better redundancy option) minor differences can exist between them and
GPS time. Any such tolerances are characterized by the Clock / Synchronization Manager (CSM)
while the GPS receiver is operational and corrections are made to minimize these effects during
redundant operation.
8.5.2 GPS Network Failure
In the event of a GPS network failure in which multiple base stations within a network cannot re-
ceive an update of absolute time information, a rubidium source can only guarantee network syn-
chronization for a minimum of 10 hours (1/2 of local GPS failure time). LORAN-C will maintain
synchronization indefinitely, but an unsynchronized site cannot be brought on-line during the fail-
ure, since there is no way to obtain precise CDMA System Time for cell-site initialization. (One
possible technique under consideration is CBSC message passing)
8.6 Synchronization Source Antenna Planning and Installation
This section is intended to provide some initial guidance for the system engineering activities
which will be required to properly install the synchronization antennas at a cell-site. These are gen-
eral suggestions and should not be considered absolute requirements (unless so indicated). Motor-
ola expects that these initial suggestions and requirements which have been established for the pre-
production (trial system) equipment will be refined as Motorola gains field experience and obtains
a better understanding of common installation problems.
It is recommended that the GPS and LFR antennas be rooftop mounted. For optimum performance,
both antennas should have a clear view within 20
o
of the horizon in all directions. It is also rec-
ommended that the GPS and LFR antennas be located as far as possible from the main cell-site an-
tenna tower. This will minimize tower shadowing and reduce the possibility of receiver overload
due to the strong fields present in close proximity to the transmitter antennas. While this configu-
ration is optimum, variations are still possible for a particular site. A site survey maybe the most
practical means for determining if a particular location with questionable surroundings will pro-
vide acceptable performance.
8.6.1 GPS Antenna/Pre-Amplifier
The GPS Antenna/Pre-amplifier unit is an active micro-strip patch which obtains power through a
DC bias on the coaxial cable. It is recommended that the GPS antenna be pole mounted to help
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
reduce shadowing and signal attenuation due to potential snow buildup or blown debris. The sur-
face of the disc shaped antenna, must be mounted parallel with the horizon. For optimum perfor-
mance, a clear view to within 10
o
of the horizon is desirable. Any reduction in the view may result
in reduced satellite coverage, degrading receiver performance and in extreme cases temporary loss
of the GPS timing signal.
For an antenna location to be considered acceptable for cell-site synchronization, a 24 hour survey
should show performance levels which exceed the following criterion:
4-6 Satellites Signal Strength > 60 (as measured by GPSR)
1 Satellite absolute minimum for periods not to exceed 1 minute
8.6.1.1 Specifications
Power Requirements: 5 V DC @ 25 mA (dc bias supplied through coax by GPSR)
Altitude: < 5 km
Operating Temperature: -40
C to +100
C
Humidity: 0-100% (when properly mounted)
Physical Dimensions: 4.01 in. dia. X 0.89 in. H.
Weight: 4.8 oz. (without mounting hardware)
8.6.1.2 Cabling Requirements
Selection and installation of the cable for the GPS antenna should be handled in the same manner
as the other external RF cabling required at a cell-site. The following items should help guide the
selection of the RF cable type and connectors which will be needed for a particular cell-site instal-
lation.
Impedance: 50 Coaxial Cable
Maximum Loss: < 4.5 dB loss @ 1575 MHz (Antenna OSX to Modem Frame Type-N
connector)
The following summarizes the maximum suggested cable lengths for three common coaxial cable
types and associated connectors.
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
RG-393U (with adapter cable & connectors) will accommodate distances up to 41 ft.
Andrew LDF4-50A Heliax (with adapter cable & connectors) can accommodate dis-
tances up to 120 ft.
Andrew LDF5-50A Heliax (with adapter cable & connectors) can accommodate dis-
Andrew LDF7-50A Heliax (with adapter cable & connectors) will accommodate dis-
The key parameter here is that a maximum loss budget of 4.5 dB is available for all cabling and
connections between the GPS Antenna (OSX) and the Modem Frame (Type-N).
Note: The Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) located in the Motorola SC
TM
modem
frame has the capability to compensate for the time delays introduced by the cable
propagation characteristics. For sites requiring long cable runs it maybe desirable to
compensate for this delay, so the installer should record total cable length and the
propagation factor for the cable type used.
Additional lightning protection maybe required at the cable entry point into the building if local
codes or operator policies warrant (this device must be included in loss calculation). A protection
device should be selected using the following guidelines:
Carrier Frequency: 1575 MHz
Bandwidth: > 20.5 MHz + dc
Clamping Voltage: > 7 V dc
8.6.1.3 Calculations of the GPS Cable Losses
Some typical cable loss calculations which are necessary in order to determine the type of cable
required for a particular installation are shown below. Variations from the provided example are
possible depending on the cell site requirements (connections to a patch panel, additional lighting
protection, etc.). The calculations are based upon the loss criterion which was defined in the pre-
vious sub-section.
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Loss budget = 4.5 dB >L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 + L5 + L6
L1=L3=L4=L6=0.15 dB
L5 = 0.23 dB (12" of RG58)
Main antenna cable loss = L2 = N x length
N = Loss/foot (dB)
length = cable length (feet)
Loss budget (RG393U)=0.15 dB + L2 + 0.15 dB + 0.15 dB + 0.23 dB + 0.15 dB = L2 + 0.83 dB
N(RG393U) = 0.090 dB/ft
Main antenna cable length (RG393) < (4.5 dB - 0.83 dB) / 0.090 dB/ft
maximum length (RG393) < 41 feet
Cable type Loss/ft (N)
Maximum cable length
(ft)
RG393U 0.090 dB 41
Andrew LDF4-50A
(1/2 in. Heliax)
0.030 dB 120
Andrew LDF5-50A
(7/8 in. Heliax)
0.017 dB 215
Andrew LDF7-50A
(1.625 in Heliax)
0.011 dB 330
length
MFI/O PANEL
Cable Connector (L1)
(Type N)
(Type N)
Main antenna cable (L2)
(Type N)
Antenna Connector (L6)
(OSX)
Antenna Adapter
Cable (L5)
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
8.6.1.4 Multiple Frame GPS Cabling
For most applications, one GPS antenna can feed up to 4 BTS frames with a 4:1 distribution am-
plifier that can be ordered through drop ship. Since the 4:1 distribution amplifier is designed for
zero gain, the maximum total cable loss from the GPS antenna to any BTS frame in a multiple
frame configuration is the same as that which is specified in Section 8.6.1.2. There are two versions
of the 4:1 distribution amplifier, one that has 1 DC port and one that has 4 DC ports. For the first
version, the 4:1 distribution amplifier will have 1 antenna port, 1 DC port, and 3 AC coupled ports.
The antenna port would connect to the GPS antenna and the one DC port must be connected to the
first frame which provides DC power to the antenna. The other three AC ports would connect to
additional BTS frames or terminated to 50 ohm loads if not used. For the second version, the 4:1
distribution amplifier will have 1 antenna port, and 4 DC coupled ports. The antenna port would
connect to the GPS antenna, the first DC port would connect to the first BTS frame, and the other
DC ports would connect to additional BTS frames or terminated to 50 ohm loads if not used. The
multiple DC ports provides a redundant source of DC power to the GPS antenna such that any of
the BTS frames connected to the distribution amplifier can be the source of the DC power. For or-
dering information refer to the latest version of the equipment planning guide or contact the Prod-
uct Management group for more information.
8.6.2 Remote GPS Antenna/Receiver
The Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) head consists of a GPS antenna, GPS receiver, and
a digital interface enclosed in an outdoor rated enclosure. The function of the RGPS head is to re-
ceive the GPS satellite signals, process them and output accurate timing information (GPS & UTC)
based on the received GPS satellite signals. The major difference between a RGPS installation and
a traditional GPS installation is the interface that is used to span the distance between the antenna
and the target equipment (either a BTS or pilot beacon). In a traditional RF GPS setup the distance
is spanned with coax connecting the GPS antenna to the GPS Receiver. With Remote GPS, the dis-
tance is spanned with a digital interface between the GPS Receiver and the target equipment. The
digital interface is less distance sensitive than the coaxial interface. The overall function of the
RGPS head is the same as that of a traditional RF GPS installation. The RGPS head has an addi-
tional feature to measure and compensate for the greater cable lengths (delays) possible with
RGPS. This circuit can be used to automatically determine the time delay of the cable between the
RGPS head and the target equipment.
It is recommended that the RGPS head be pole mounted to help reduce shadowing and signal at-
tenuation due to potential snow buildup or blown debris. The surface of the antenna must be
mounted parallel with the horizon. For optimum performance, a clear view to within 10
o
of the ho-
rizon is desirable. Any reduction in the view may result in reduced satellite coverage, degrading
receiver performance and in extreme cases temporary loss of the GPS timing signal. For an antenna
location to be considered acceptable for cell-site synchronization, a 24 hour survey should show
performance levels which exceed the following criteria:
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
1 Satellite absolute minimum for periods not to exceed 1 minute
Power Requirements: Voltage Range +36 to +8 VDC @ 2.0 Watts
Altitude: < 5 km
C to +75
C
Humidity: 0-100%
Physical Dimensions: 4.125" length, 3.5" width, 3.25" height
Weight: 13 oz. (without mounting hardware)
Mounting: Threaded Pole Mount (3/4" standard pipe thread)
The typical cabling requirements for the RGPS uses 6 twisted pair, 22 gauge. The cable which con-
nects the RGPS head to the target equipment (either a BTS or pilot beacon) should have an appro-
priate mating connector compatible to the RGPS head (see Figure 8-2) on one end and bare wires
on the other end. The typical interface into the BTS goes through a punch block or wire terminal
type of connection which will provide the primary surge protection for the BTS. For punch block
terminations, a solid conductor (single strand) twisted pair wire should be used. For outdoor rated
BTS products, the primary surge protection is built into the RGPS interface of the BTS. For indoor
BTS products which support the RGPS feature, the primary surge protection must be provided ex-
ternally, prior to interfacing into the BTS.
Connector:
The 12 pin connector attached to the pigtail of the RGPS head is a Deutsch MMP21C-2212P1. The
12 pin connector attached to cable which connects the RGPS head to the BTS/shelter is a Deutsch
MMP26C-2212S1. A diagram of the BTS to RGPS cable mating connector is shown in Figure 8-2.
BTS to RGPS Cable:
Conductors: 6 twisted pair (12 conductor), 22 gauge, solid conductor
Maximum cable length: 2000 feet
The maximum cable length from the RGPS head to the BTS or pilot beacon is 2000 feet. There are
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
a few additional requirements when the RGPS is used to feed multiple frames. See the multiple
frame RGPS cabling requirements shown in section Figure 8.6.2.3.
The BTS to RGPS cable wiring definitions (pin out, wire colors, and signal description) are pro-
vided in Table 8-1.
Figure 8-2: BTS to RGPS Cable Connector Diagram
Table 8-1: BTS to RGPS Cable Wiring Definitions
RGPS Interface into BTS
RGPS
1
Connector
Pin #
BTS to RGPS
Twisted Pair
Wire Colors
BTS to RGPS Cable
Signal Description
Outdoor
SC6xx/
SAPB
3
Punchblock #
Indoor
SC4812
4
Pin #
Indoor
SAPB
5
Pin #
1
9
Blue
Blue/Black
2
Power 1
Return 1
17T
17R
8
15
61
59
10
8
Yellow
Yellow/Black
2
Power 2
Return 2
18T
18R
7
14
62
60
5
4
Green
Green/Black
2
+ Rx Data to BTS (Tx from RGPS)
- Rx Data to BTS (Tx from RGPS)
19T
19R
1
9
52
51
3
2
White
White/Black
2
+ Tx Data from BTS (Rx to RGPS)
- Tx Data from BTS (Rx to RGPS)
20T
20R
4
12
54
53
11
12
Brown
Brown/Black
2
1 PPS Timing +
1 PPS Timing -
22T
22R
2
10
58
57
N/A
N/A
Red
Red/Black
2
+ TDR
- TDR
21T
21R
N/A
N/A
56
55
N/A N/A Frame Ground (cable drain) N/A 13 N/A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
12 11
RGPS Cable Connector (Sockets)
Mating Surface View
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Notes for Table 8-1:
1. Pin outs for the cable connector (see Figure 8-2) which connects to the RGPS head.
2. Each black wire is specifically paired to a particular colored wire or it may be the same color
wire but with a black stripe.
3. The BTS to RGPS cable can connect directly to the punchblock of a SC6xx or Stand Alone Pilot
Beacon (SAPB) product. Lightning/surge protection is provided after the punchblock interface.
4. The RGPS interface to the indoor SC4812 BTS is via a 15 pin Sub-D type connector. Lightning/
surge protection must be provided prior to this connection. The TDR signals are not used and pin
13 provides a cable drain to frame ground.
5. The Indoor Stand Alone Pilot Beacon (SAPB) also requires that lightning/surge protection be
provided prior to this connection.
Power 1 and Power 2 are the positive supply connections to the RGPS head relative to the Return
1 and Return 2 connections which are the negative supply connections. Power 1 & 2 have a low
impedance connection between them, so that they can be effectively considered as one node for the
purposes of suppling power to the RGPS head. The same is true for the Return 1 & 2 connections.
The TDR pair of wires are connected to the BTS/SAPB but are not connected at the connector end
of the cable which connects to the RGPS head. The TDR wires are not used by the RGPS head but
they are used by the particular BTS/SAPB to measure the distance (time delay) from the BTS to
the RGPS head. The SC4812 product does not use the TDR wires. It uses a different design to mea-
sure the distance (time delay) from the BTS to the RGPS head.
8.6.2.3 Multiple Frame RGPS Cabling
Daisy Chain Configuration:
Some products (i.e. the SC61x and the stand alone pilot beacon) can support a daisy chain method
to connect one RGPS unit to multiple target equipment at one location (see the latest product doc-
umentation for the product of interest for this type of feature support). In this configuration, the
RGPS connects to the first frame, the second frame is connected to the first frame, and the third
frame is connected to the second frame, etc. In this configuration, the maximum cable length from
the RGPS head to the last frame in the daisy chain is still 2000 feet. There is also a maximum limit
of 1000 feet from the first BTS to the last BTS or pilot beacon in the chain. The maximum number
of loads in a multiple frame timing chain configuration should not exceed 10. Different products
have different loading requirements associated with them. For example, the SC614T product con-
sumes 2 loads per BTS in this daisy chain configuration, while the SC611 and the stand alone pilot
beacon will only consume one load per unit. Under this guideline, two SC614Ts and six stand alone
pilot beacons would be a valid configuration (see Figure 8-3).
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 8-3: Remote GPS Daisy Chain Diagram
Remote GPS Distribution (RGD) box:
The other BTS products which support the remote GPS feature but do not support the daisy chain
method can use the Remote GPS Distribution (RGD) box to feed multiple BTS products at one lo-
cation. An important note: typically a BTS product that is designed for the remote GPS daisy chain
configuration is NOT compatible with the RGD box. It is possible to connect one pilot beacon unit
to the RGD box using a special wiring configuration (details of this unique configuration is not dis-
cussed in this document). Refer to the latest BTS product installation documentation or contact the
Product Management group for more information regarding the remote GPS feature support re-
quirements for your particular BTS product. With a standard RGD box configuration, there is still
a 2000 feet maximum cable length limit from the RGPS head (through the RGD box) to the BTS.
See Figure 8-4 for a diagram and the following notes for additional requirements associated with
this configuration.
Figure 8-4: Remote GPS Distribution Box Diagram
SC614T
Remote
GPS
Head
2000 Max.
(2 loads)
SC614T
(2 loads)
Beacon #1
(1 load)
Beacon #6
(1 load)
1000 Max.
BTS-1
Remote
GPS
Head
Remote
GPS
Dist.
Box
BTS-2
BTS-3
BTS-4
B1
B2
B3
B4
A
2000 Max.
50 Max.(see notes below)
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Notes for Figure 8-4:
The maximum distance from the RGPS head to the BTS is 2000 feet (i.e. A + B4 above).
The maximum recommended difference between BTSs (i.e. B4 - B1 above) is less than
50 feet for the CSM to automatically compensate for all cable delays. If the difference is
greater than 50 feet, then a delay parameter will need to be configured in the MM data
base for each BTS.
The SC4812T has an RGD function incorporated into the top of the frame. Thus, the
maximum cable length for an expansion BTS is 50 feet for automatic delay compensa-
tion.
Surge protection is required at the building entry point for the cable of the remote GPS
head prior to the connection of the remote GPS distribution box.
8.6.3 LFR Antenna / Pre-Amplifier
It is important to select an antenna location which will not degrade the performance of the Low
Frequency Receiver. Since line of sight reception is not required for satisfactory performance at
LORAN frequencies, the installation of the antenna and pre-amplifier can be accomplished quite
easily, provided some basic concerns are addressed.
The ideal location for the LFR Antenna/Pre-Amplifier unit should be free of very large
obstructions at an angle of 30
o
above the horizon. For best performance, it is recommended to
mount the LFR antenna at least 10 feet above ground level and approximately 50 feet away from
any co-located high tension power distribution lines. The unit should be near an earth referenced
metal structure (building framework) which can be used to provide proper antenna grounding. A
four (4) conductor shielded cable connects the Antenna Pre-amplifier unit to the Modem Frame's
MFIO panel within the cell-site building.
A site survey which measures performance levels which exceed the following criterion, can be a
useful way to determine whether a specific location will provide acceptable performance:
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Primary Station: Signal Strength > -8 dB (as measured by the LFR)
Alternative Stations: Signal Strength > -8 dB (minimum of 2 additional as measured by
the LFR)
Power Requirements: 12 V DC @ 10 mA (DC bias supplied through differential pair by
LFR)
Altitude: < 5 km
o
C to +85
o
C
Humidity: 0-100%
Physical Dimensions: 3.5" X 3.24" base; 26.25" overall height
Weight: 52 oz. (including mounting bracket & hardware)
The cabling requirements for the LFR antenna are much simpler due to the low frequency nature
of this signal. The differential signal requires one twisted connection. A DC bias on this pair pro-
vides power to the pre-amplifier unit. A second twisted pair connection allows pre-amplifier cali-
bration and fault detection capability. While the standard LFR kit includes a 150 foot terminated
cable assembly, the following information is provided when variations are necessary for particular
installations.
Cable:
Impedance: ~100 differential
Conductors: 2 twisted pairs 24 AWG with individual shields
Belden Cable Type: 9729
Maximum Length: 300 feet
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Connectors:
To Modem Frame: 9 pin Sub-miniature D Plug (male pins) (i.e. AMP 747952-1)
To Antenna / Pre-amplifier: 5 pin circular (i.e. TAJIMI TC1108-12A10-5M(8.6))
Grounding:
In order to insure a dependable ground path for proper signal reception, a corrosion resistant con-
nection must be attached to a conductive metal structure leading to a common earth ground. In cas-
es where metal structures at the antenna site may be struck by lightning Motorola grounding
guidelines (Grounding Guidelines for Cellular Radio Installations.) must be followed to assure
maximum safety of personnel and equipment. The following wire size is recommended for differ-
ent grounding lengths.
14 gauge for runs < 40 feet
12 gauge for runs < 100 feet
Additional lightning protection maybe added at the cable entry point into the building if local codes
mandate it. A protection device should be selected using the following guidelines:
Pin Number Wire Color Signal Description
1 Red Antenna+ (Power & Signal)
6 Black (paired with Red) Antenna- (Power & Signal)
5 White Calibrator+
9 Black (paired with White) Calibrator-
3 Bare Drain (from shield)
Pin Number Wire Color Signal Description
D Red Antenna+ (Power & Signal)
E Black (paired with Red) Antenna- (Power & Signal)
A White Calibrator+
B Black (paired with White) Calibrator-
C Bare Drain (from shield)
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Carrier Frequency: 100 kHz
Bandwidth: >>35 kHz + dc
Differential Signals: 2
Clamping Voltage: > 15 V DC
8.7 Conclusion
CDMA is based on a 1.2288 MHz per second chip rate. If this rate is offset by even a single chip,
code translation will be impossible. Synchronization is, therefore, the basis of a CDMA system.
This chapter emphasizes the reliance CDMA has on the GPS system and what backup timing tech-
nology is available. Signal delays are accounted for by the software, mainly by awaiting frames
and counting chips. Timing is truly the heartbeat to CDMA.
8
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Version 2.1
12/18/98
9.1 Introduction
Capacity and coverage in CDMA systems are, in part, a function of the background thermal and
man-made interference noise levels. For the 1.23 MHz CDMA channel, the background thermal
noise is approximately -113 dBm. Man-made interference includes automobile ignition noise and
spurious emissions from radio and other electronic equipment.
The background man-made noise will vary from site to site depending on the number and proxim-
ity to the cell of interference sources. In order to insure the optimal operation of each of the CDMA
cell sites, Motorola recommends that noise floor measurements are considered as a part of the site
selection process for CDMA systems.
9.2 Suggested Measurement Method
Interference is random in nature, with amplitude and frequency varying over time. Due to the ran-
dom nature of the background noise, Motorola suggests that a data logging system be employed to
measure the noise floor over some period of time. Statistical analysis of the collected data can then
be performed to determine an average and cumulative distribution function of the noise floor rise.
The cumulative distribution function indicates the amount of time the background noise rise ex-
ceeds some specified limit.
9.2.1 Test System Functional Description
A possible configuration of a noise floor test system is shown in Figure 9-1. The band-pass filter
is used to attenuate out-of-band signals, which otherwise could create in-band intermodulation
products. The low noise amplifiers are used to improve the system noise figure and provide enough
gain to allow for the measurement of very low level signals. The step attenuator between the am-
plifiers is used to limit the system gain, again, to reduce the level of possible intermodulation prod-
ucts. The output of the final amplifier is then split using a two-way splitter. The two equal outputs
of the splitter are used as inputs to two spectrum analyzers. Spectrum analyzer 1 operates in the
manual mode. This spectrum analyzer is equipped with a tracking generator which is used for the
system gain calibration. This spectrum analyzer is also used to make noise floor plots and to inves-
tigate the nature of interference as it appears on the screen. Spectrum analyzer 2 is under computer
control. Measurement traces are collected with this spectrum analyzer and are stored to disk for
later processing. A hard drive with at least 100 Mb of storage space is recommended. Up to two
spectrum analyzer traces per second can be recorded for the described system. The noise source is
used to measure the system noise figure. The measured system noise figure is used when process-
ing the collected data into the desired cumulative distribution plots.
Background Noise
Measurements
Section
9
9
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 9-1: Suggested CDMA noise floor measurement system
9.2.2 Test System Calibration
The test system gain and noise figure must be measured before data collection begins. The mea-
sured gain and noise figure are used to make adjustments to the collected data, during the data anal-
ysis operation. The system gain is measured using the tracking generator provided in spectrum
analyzer 1. The system noise figure is determined by first measuring the noise floor with the system
Calibration Point (input) terminated in 50 ohms and then measuring the noise floor with the system
Calibration Point connected to the calibrated noise source. The noise figure is then calculated from
the two measurements and the noise source ENR rating as follows:
[EQ 9-1]
where,
ENR = the equivalent noise ratio of the calibrated noise source (linear ratio)
P
on
= the noise floor measurement with the noise source connected to the system input (Watts)
P
off
= the noise floor measurement with the system input terminated in 50 ohms (Watts)
NF = the collection system noise figure (dB)
x
Cal
Point
Bandpass
Filter
Plotter
Amplifier
NF = 1 dB
G = 15 dB
IPi = 4 dBm
Amplifier
NF = 2 dB
G = 25 dB
IPi = 0 dBm
+28 vdc
+28 vdc
+28 vdc
Step
Atten.
Spectrum
Analyzer 1
NF = 26 dB
IP=16 dBm
w/tracker
Spectrum
Analyzer 2
NF = 26 dB
IP = 21 dBm
100 Mb
Hard Drive
50 ohm
termination
Noise
Source
ENR = 15 dB
IEEE
488
NF 10Log
ENR
Pon
Poff 1
------------------------
,

_
------------------------------
,

_
=
9
Version 2.1
12/18/98
9.3 Test Procedures
It is expected that the CDMA trial systems and many CDMA commercial systems will be deployed
in areas where analog coverage currently exists. Two methods of co-existence between analog and
CDMA systems have been proposed. One implementation is to clear all analog co-channels within
the CDMA band on a system wide basis. Another possibility is to only clear the analog co-channels
from cells which are near the CDMA cells. Analog co-channels to the CDMA band are then re-
used at distant analog cells. Before noise floor testing can begin, analog co-channel clearing, per
the chosen implementation plan, must be completed. This is necessary because analog channels
within the CDMA band will appear as interference in the collected data.
Once the system has been cleared of analog co-channels, noise floor testing can proceed. For best
results, the data should be logged at various times of the day and night at each cell site. This is nec-
essary because varying traffic patterns throughout the day will effect the noise levels present at the
cell site.
9.4 Data Analysis
The collected data must be scaled to account for the measurement system gain, noise figure, and
bandwidth before the statistical analysis is performed. Once the data is properly scaled, a statistics
software package can be used to calculate the average noise floor rise and cumulative distribution
functions. The noise floor rise cumulative distribution plots can then be used to make a judgement
on the effect of background interference to CDMA performance at each cell site. Plots can also be
produced which show the amplitude and frequency of interferers as a function of time. These plots
can be used to help identify the source of interferers, which can lead to methods of interference
reduction.
9.5 Conclusion
System interference, or in particular, the noise floor, directly impacts CDMA capacity and quality.
Due to the nature of CDMA, capacity alone will influence the noise level, therefore, it is imperative
that noise is kept to a minimum and that procedures are in place to monitor the system for spurious
emissions.
9
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.1 Introduction
The purpose of this section is to provide systems engineers/planners with a basic understanding of
several inter-system interference issues that can have an affect on CDMA system deployments.
Currently covered in this section are cellular/PCS inter-system interference and 1,900 MHz
CDMA & Microwave interference. Additional intersystem interference scenarios will be ad-
dressed in later versions of this document, as necessary.
10.2 Cellular/PCS Inter-System Interference
In real world situations, the frequency spectrum is the most limited resource for cellular radio tele-
communications system implementation or expansion. As cellular service continues to migrate
from the use of analog technologies to digital technologies such as CDMA, operators are often
faced with choosing one of two options for deployment of their systems:
Spectrum clearing, involving CDMA system deployment in the same cellular frequency
band allocation
1
through the clearing of spectrum being used by other existing cellular
technologies. Examples of such deployments could include the clearance of AMPS ana-
log spectrum for use with co-existing 800 MHz CDMA systems and the clearance of
TACS analog spectrum for use with co-existing 900 MHz CDMA systems.
Deployment in an alternate cellular frequency band allocation, previously unused for
cellular. Examples of this deployment strategy could include the use of the AMPS band
for CDMA in an area already using TACS and/or GSM spectrum and the use of the
PCS1900 band for CDMA in an area already using DCS1800 spectrum.
Associated with each of the above deployment options is the potential for interference between the
system being deployed and currently existing, co-located cellular system(s). The severity of this
interference, and whom will be affected, will depend mainly on how frequency spectrum is as-
signed to all cellular systems to co-exist in a given coverage area. The interference can basically
be divided into two categories which, for the purposes of this discussion, will be referred to as intra-
band and inter-band. Intra-band interference corresponds to interference between co-existing sys-
tems that share the same cellular frequency band allocations, such as AMPS and TACS. Inter-band
interference corresponds to interference between co-existing systems that utilize multiple cellular
frequency band allocations, such as: 1) AMPS with TACS and GSM and 2) DCS1800 with
PCS1900.
1. For this discussion, the phrase cellular frequency band allocation will refer to the standardized AMPS,
TACS, GSM, DCS1800 and PCS1900 cellular system frequency bands.
Inter-System
Interference (ISI)
Section
10
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.2.1 Intra-Band Interference
Many cellular operators are installing CDMA as the next generation technology which will allow
for continued capacity expansion in their currently existing AMPS or TACS analog markets. In
these markets, both CDMA and the currently operating analog system must exist simultaneously
and in some cases even share the same spectrum. As a result, in addition to the possibility of in-
creased blocking on the existing analog cellular system (due to spectrum clearing), there exists the
potential threat of inter-system interference between the co-existing, co-frequency-band-allocation
systems. This interference, referred to as intra-band inter-system interference, exists typically be-
tween the base stations of one system and the mobile stations of the other, co-existing system (Fig-
ure 10-1).
Figure 10-1: Intra-Band Interference
The interference is basically a consequence of the near-far effect, an example of which would be
where a nearby base station transmitter serving one system captures the receiver of a subscriber
unit being served by an other-system base station that is significantly further away. The closer, in-
terfering base station transmitter is able to capture the victim mobile unit receiver because of the
small propagation path loss between them. This interference phenomenon can have a significant
effect in new systems being deployed with fewer cell sites than those which may exist with the pre-
existing, co-band system. An example of this situation, reflecting a 3:1 cell site ratio, is crudely
depicted in Figure 10-2. Here mobiles being served by system A could potentially be threatened
with intra-band interference from cells in the co-existing system B. As indicated in the diagram,
the interference to the system A mobile could potentially be at its worst at the edges of cells in sys-
tem A that lie close to the centers of the cells from system B. Conversely, note that, if close enough
to a non-co-located system B cell site, a system A mobile could also potentially cause interference
to the cell site if transmitting at a high enough level.
System B System A System A
Cell Mobile Cell
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-2: Example of a 3:1 Overlay
Depending on the actual overlay of the two co-existing systems, there exists the potential for four
different interference scenarios:
System A mobile(s) interfering with System B base station
System A base station interfering with System B mobile station(s)
System B mobile(s) interfering with System A base station
System B base station interfering with System A mobile station(s)
The above four scenarios are discussed in more detail in the following sections, using a co-located
AMPS and 800 MHz CDMA system as an example. Note that intra-band interference is not a prob-
lem unique to CDMA, as it is a radio-systems issue. The same issues will occur with a GSM system
if overlaid on a TACS system in the same frequency band. All technologies have the same set of
contributing factors. Some key variables for the interfering transmitter are: ERP (directed towards
the receive antenna), transmit nominal power and sideband emissions. A few key variables for a
potential victim receiver are: IM (intercept point) of the receiver, filter protection available and
gain of the receive antenna system.
After the potential for interference has been assessed, corrective action, if required, can then be tak-
en. Corrective action can be in the form of improving the filtering at the receive site, or it can be
related to any of the other variables noted above; improve Tx sideband emissions, adjust ERP, fre-
quency planning, etc. In all cases, the potential for interference, and the best corrective action, are
site specific. There is no generic solution and site engineering is required. Recommendations for
corrective action is addressed where deemed appropriate.
One additional note, rogue transmitters are rare and illegal occurrences. If they are high enough in
power, they may cause problems to one or more sectors of a CDMA system. In some cases, sur-
rounding CDMA cells will increase in size to mitigate the problem.
System A
System B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X - Potential Interference
Areas
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.2.1.1 AMPS Cells to CDMA Mobiles
There are several potential intersystem interference mechanisms, but the dominant problem is an
interference product resulting from strong AMPS base station signals mixing in the front end of a
subscriber receiver which creates unwanted signals appearing inside the CDMA subscriber receiv-
er passband. The subscriber receiver intermodulation performance is essentially identical for all
technologies.
This phenomena requires that the CDMA subscriber be physically close to the AMPS base trans-
mitter site, and that the AMPS transmitter frequencies provide a third order mix, and that the de-
sired CDMA received signal be relatively weak.
The easiest way to prevent this particular interference problem is to make sure that there is a
CDMA base-station located at each of the AMPS transmitter sites. In this configuration, the undes-
ired mix products will still occur, but the desired CDMA signal from the local transmitter will al-
ways be stronger than the mix products, preventing a problem. An overlay with a CDMA base at
every AMPS site would be called a 1:1 (one-to-one) overlay.
The problem may appear when an operator, usually during the initial entry of CDMA into a market,
tries to deploy CDMA at fewer sites than every AMPS site. The operator may try to put CDMA
base stations at one third of the AMPS sites, to save initial system deployment costs. This would
be called a 1:3 overlay (Figure 10-3).
Figure 10-3: AMPS system with a larger CDMA site overlay
(cells marked a are potential CDMA sites)
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
In this case, two-thirds of the AMPS sites would not have a co-located CDMA transmitter, and it
would be possible for the CDMA mobiles, when in the vicinity of a AMPS site without a co-located
CDMA transmitter, to be exposed to strong local AMPS signals, with the desired CDMA signal
being received from a distance. In fact, if the system is on a regular grid, with a 1:3 overlay, the
AMPS sites without co-located CDMA transmitters will be exactly halfway between the CDMA
sites, putting the AMPS sites into the weakest CDMA signal areas.
It should be noted that a 1:1 deployment is a fix for interference between an operators AMPS base
stations and his own CDMA system. There is still the possibility that a CDMA subscriber could be
in the vicinity of the other operators cell site in an area with a weak CDMA desired signal, and
still experience this type of interference. As a practical matter, high traffic areas will attract cells
from both operators, such that high traffic areas will have strong CDMA signal coverage, prevent-
ing most problems, even with AMPS sites present.
When there is an AMPS site without co-located CDMA, whether or not a subscriber will experi-
ence noticeable interference depends on the number, level and frequency of the AMPS carriers, and
the CDMA signal strength. Using a few simplifying assumptions, Figure 10-4 shows the relation-
ship between the signal levels at which the interference will appear for an un-modified IS-98 sub-
scriber receiver, and two proposed subscriber changes which are a switchable attenuator, or a
continuously variable attenuator.
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-4: Required CDMA Signal Strength vs. Interfering AMPS Signal Strength
As can be seen from the chart, the interference can be mitigated by either dropping the AMPS sig-
nal level, or raising the CDMA signal level. The most likely way of increasing CDMA signal levels
would be to add CDMA transmitter sites in the immediate vicinity of any potential interfering
AMPS transmitters.
Recently a specification change for IS-98A has been proposed that addresses the need for improved
IM performance in the mobile. As the graph above shows, the proposed change allows for a mobile
with either wider front end dynamic range, or a switchable attenuator in the front end that results
in approximately 20 dB of attenuation when operating in a strong signal environment (for example
if the received CDMA signal strength were greater than -79 dBm). The operator will still have to
manage minimum CDMA signal strength in accordance with the anticipated interference levels
that are to be potentially encountered.
-120
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
-45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5
IS-98 spec (1% FER)
IS-98A spec (1% FER) w/ variable attenuator
IS-98A spec w/ step attenuator
MA signal strength
Interfering AMPS signal Strength
(per carrier for 2 carriers)
JSR 2/7/96
IS-98A; Step Attenuator
IS-98 Spec Level
IS-98A; Variable attenuator
R
e
q
u
i
r
e
d

C
D
M
A

S
i
g
n
a
l

S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The Motorola CDMA Simulator has been modified to include an interference zone simulation and
prediction.
This specific intersystem interference problem is not expected to be a serious issue at 1,900 MHz,
because the power levels at 1,900 MHz. are generally lower, path losses higher, and the environ-
ment will not be one of an unbalanced overlay. There may still have to be some interference control
engineering at the 1,900 MHz band edges, where two different operators meet on different site
grids. This situation will not be unique to CDMA, as the subscriber receiver intermodulation per-
formance is essentially identical for all technologies.
In summary, the most desirable way to design a CDMA overlay is a 1:1 deployment, although it
will still be necessary to review AMPS site placement in weaker CDMA coverage areas. If the op-
erator chooses to initially implement a lower density deployment, with something less than a 1:1
deployment, then both side designs will need to be very carefully engineered for interference con-
trol. If a lower cost of initial deployment is a major concern, a system utilizing a 1:1 deployment
with omni cells is preferred over a system using 1:3 or higher deployments. This would result in a
system with the same number of sectors deployed, but not susceptible to same system interference.
10.2.1.2 AMPS Mobiles to CDMA Cells
Narrow band AMPS mobiles are not viewed as a problem to CDMA cells. Out of band AMPS mo-
bile TX sideband emissions are not significant across the recommended 9 AMPS channels CDMA
guard band. In-band AMPS mobiles must be geographically separated by a guard zone of sufficient
pathloss.
10.2.1.3 CDMA Cells to AMPS Mobiles
Although CDMA cells will have a lower Tx ERP, CDMA cells may still interfere with AMPS mo-
biles which are far from an AMPS cell. The interference is caused by CDMA cell TX sideband
emissions, which do not roll off as fast as those associated with a narrow band AMPS transmitter.
Note that this should not cause same system interference since the CDMA sites will be co-located
with same system AMPS sites.
10.2.1.4 CDMA Mobiles to AMPS Cells
The CDMA mobile TX power is typically low which provides low sideband emission power.
However, a 3:1 overlay will significantly increase the probability of interference from CDMA mo-
biles because all AMPS-only cells are located near the edge of the CDMA cells. CDMA users near
the AMPS sites will be at the higher power levels and offset in frequency by as little as 900 KHz
from the center of the CDMA channel. Depending on the pathloss from the CDMA mobiles to the
AMPS Rx cell sites, the CDMA mobiles might cause interference to the AMPS receive signal.
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.2.2 Inter-Band Interference
To introduce digital cellular technologies into their systems, operators are considering deployment
of systems such as CDMA in alternate cellular frequency band allocations, previously unused for
cellular. Examples of this deployment strategy could involve the use of the AMPS band for CDMA
in an area already using TACS and/or GSM spectrum, use of the TACS band for CDMA in an area
already using AMPS spectrum and use of the PCS1900 band for CDMA in an area already using
DCS1800 spectrum. While such an implementation would allow for an easier deployment of a new
cellular system (e.g. little to no effect on the traffic performance of the existing analog systems),
there may be an increased threat of inter-system interference between the co-existing systems de-
pending on what operating spectrum is being used for each of the systems. Both in the AMPS/
TACS/GSM and DCS1800/PCS1900 bands, spectrum has been assigned by North American
(ANSI/EIA/TIA) and European (ETSI) telecommunications standards bodies in such a way that
the presence of this interference, referred to here as inter-band inter-system interference, will de-
pend on what cellular specifications are being used for systems in the area. Unlike the aforemen-
tioned intra-band interference, inter-band interference typically occurs between the base stations
and/or between the mobile stations of two or more co-existing systems (Figure 10-5).
Figure 10-5: Inter-Band Interference
While inter-band inter-system interference is a radio-systems issue that is not unique to a particular
cellular technology and has been dealt with previously, what may be different with current deploy-
ments is how eager some operators are in attempting to co-locate multiple-band cellular technolo-
gies affected by these issues. Such ambitious system deployments result in: 1) less guardband
available between co-existing systems, 2) smaller antenna separation (and therefore smaller isola-
tion) between co-existing systems due to larger system densities and 3) more aggressive antenna
sharing requirements between different technologies through the use of combiners, duplexers, etc.
As a result, it is imperative that proper consideration be given to the threat of these interference
phenomena and that proper measures are taken to prevent any potential system performance deg-
radation, such as a reduction in system capacity or RF link quality/reliability. It is the goal of this
section to provide such consideration.
As was mentioned previously, the threat and severity of inter-band interference between two or
more co-existing cellular systems using multiple frequency bands will depend on what spectrum is
assigned to each system. Table 10-1 provides some examples of spectrum allocation as assigned
by each cellular standards body.
System B System A System B System A
Cell Mobile Mobile Cell
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
In the 800/900 MHz band, extended bands EAMPS and ETACS overlap by as much as 22 MHz.
The end of the standard AMPS band at 890 MHz is also the beginning of the standard TACS band
(Figure 10-6).
Figure 10-6: AMPS/TACS/GSM Spectrum
Likewise, the DCS1800 band overlaps the PCS1900 spectrum by as much as 30 Mhz (Figure 10-7).
Table 10-1: Cellular Spectrum Allocation
Standards
Body
Cellular Band
BS Tx/MS Rx
Operating
Band (MHz)
MS Tx/BS Rx
Operating
Band (MHz)
ANSI/ AMPS 869-894 824-849
EIA/TIA PCS1900 1930-1990 1850-1910
TACS/ETACS 917-960 872-915
ETSI GSM 935-960 890-915
DCS1800 1805-1880 1710-1785
8
6
9
8
7
0
8
8
0
8
9
0
8
9
1
.
5
8
9
4
9
1
7
9
2
5
9
3
5
9
4
2
.
5
9
5
0
9
6
0
8
7
2
8
8
0
8
9
0
8
9
7
.
5
9
0
5
9
1
5
8
2
4
8
2
5
8
3
5
8
4
5
8
4
6
.
5
8
4
9
B A A
A
M
P
S

A
A
M
P
S

B
E
T
A
C
S

B
T
A
C
S

B
/
T
A
C
S

A
/
E
T
A
C
S

A
A
M
P
S

A
A
M
P
S

B
B A A
T
A
C
S
R
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
/
G
S
M
G
S
M
G
S
M
E
T
A
C
S

B
T
A
C
S

B
/
T
A
C
S

A
/
E
T
A
C
S

A
T
A
C
S
R
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
/
G
S
M
G
S
M
G
S
M
BASE Rx/
MS Tx
BASE Tx/
MS Rx
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-7: DCS1800/PCS1900 Spectrum
A summary of the various interference scenarios resulting from this spectrum allocation is provid-
ed in Table 10-2.
While the use of overlapping operating bands in co-existing systems would be unacceptable due to
the threat of co-channel interference, use of adjacent operating bands has already been implement-
ed in or is being considered for some markets. Due to the typical wideband nature of cellular base
station and mobile station receivers, inter-system interference is also a threat in this scenario.
There are four predominant inter-band interference mechanisms:
Table 10-2: Inter-Band Interference Scenarios
Interferer Victim
AMPS-Band
Base Station
TACS/GSM-Band
Base Station
TACS/GSM-Band
Mobile Station
AMPS-Band
Mobile Station
DCS1800-Band
Base Station
PCS 1900-Band
Base Station
PCS 1900-Band
Mobile Station
DCS 1800-Band
Mobile Station
D EF
1
9
3
0
1
9
9
0
1
8
5
0
1
9
1
0
A B C
A B C
1
8
8
0
1
8
0
5
1
7
8
5
1
7
1
0
D EF
DCS1800
DCS1800
PCS1900
PCS1900
BASE Rx/
MS Tx
BASE Tx/
MS Rx
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Interfering transmitter sideband emissions landing on-channel in a victim receivers Rx
frequency band.
Interfering transmitter intermodulation (IM) products landing in a victim receivers Rx
frequency band.
Victim receiver desensitization from an interfering transmit carrier.
Victim receiver intermodulation from two or more interfering transmit carriers.
10.2.2.1 Preventative Measures: BS-to-BS Interference
There are several options available to help prevent the occurrence of inter-band interference be-
tween base stations. Some examples include:
1) Providing ample guardband between the co-existing systems. In this case, base station transmit-
ter equipment specifications for the interfering system and base station receiver equipment speci-
fications for the victim system would provide enough protection from potential interference.
2) Separating interfering and victim base station antennas as much as possible, both horizontally
and vertically, to provide the necessary isolation.
3) Providing adequate filtering of the interfering base station transmitter and/or victim base station
receiver to achieve additional isolation. Tx filters would aid in attenuating transmitter intermodu-
lation and/or sideband emissions to levels low enough so that they would not cause interference to
and/or desensitization of the victim base station receiver. Rx filters would aid in attenuating off-
channel signals that pose a threat of either receiver desensitization or receiver intermodulation.
4) Modifying the frequency plan of either the interfering or affected system on a site-by-site basis
to minimize the possibility of interference.
5) Reducing interfering base station power.
10.2.2.1.1 BS-to-BS Interference Analysis Procedure
The first step in the analysis procedure is to determine the minimum isolation required between co-
existing base stations when just considering relevant equipment specifications. The minimum re-
quired isolation between an interfering base station Tx antenna and a victim base station Rx anten-
na can be approximated by using simple calculations that take into consideration various
transmitter and receiver specifications (as provided in Section 10.2.2.1.2), antenna gains, free
space pathloss, etc. Typically, up to four such calculations are required, one with respect to each
of the aforementioned potential interference scenarios: interfering transmitter sideband emissions,
interfering transmitter IM, receiver desensitization and receiver IM.
Which calculations to use for a given interference analysis will depend on what type of interference
is possible and where the potential interference may fall with respect to the victim BS receivers
operating spectrum. For example, if it is determined that no interfering Tx carrier frequencies fall
within or near the wide passband of a cellular victim receiver, then the receiver desensitization cal-
culation may not be required. Furthermore, if 1) an interfering system utilizes just a single Tx car-
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
rier (as is possible with CDMA) and 2) there are no other interfering Tx carriers present to mix with
it to create IM products potentially falling within a victim receivers passband, then the transmitter
IM and receiver IM calculations would not be required
2
.
Each of the four interference mechanisms are each discussed below.
Transmitter Sideband Emissions
Transmitter sideband emissions primarily occur in either the speech amplifier, oscillator and/or
modulator of the transmitter. When sideband emissions fall within the passband of a sensitive com-
munications receiver, it creates interference. This could be a problem for transmitters operating
near receivers with adjacent passbands. The effect on the victim receiver is that of a reduction to
the usable sensitivity for desired channel performance. See Figure10-8.
Figure 10-8: Interfering Transmit Carrier and Sideband Emission Spectrum
Emission profiles vary between different transmitter designs but, in general, have an energy (de-
picted in the above figure as I
sideband
), that is some specified level below the carriers power level,
(I
out
). Table 10-3 and Table 10-4 in the following section provide Tx sideband emission specifica-
tions for relevant technologies, listed both as defined values and as a function of I
out
. The transmit
sideband emission level must be received at the victim base station receiver below a maximum al-
lowable interference level (V
INT
), which results in a certain tolerable degradation in receiver sen-
sitivity. For example, most cellular/PCS receiver equipment specifications allow for a maximum
degradation in receiver sensitivity of 3 dB, which corresponds to a maximum on-channel interfer-
ence level equal to that of the receivers thermal noise floor
3
(kTBF). In this case, interfering trans-
mit sideband emission levels would then need to be received by a victim receiver at a level below
its thermal noise floor (e.g. V
INT
= kTBF). For example, tolerating a 3-dB sensitivity degradation,
a GSM receiver having a noise figure (F) of 4 dB and a channel bandwidth (B) of 200 kHz would
2. Where appropriate, it is recommended that consideration be given to the possibility for future expansion
of the interfering system (resulting in the allocation of additional Tx carriers) when determining isolation re-
quirements in order to prevent any future interference scenarios.
3. For more information on the relationship between receiver sensitivity degradation and receiver thermal
noise floor, refer to section VIII.
I
out
= Interfering BS RF equipment Tx
Interfering BS Tx Sideband Emissions Performance (dBc)
I
sideband
(dBm)
F
Tx
F
Rx

output power level (top of frame) in dBm
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
have a maximum tolerable interference level of -117 dBm:
V
INT,GSM
= GSM Rx thermal noise floor = kTBF
GSM
= -174 dBm/Hz + 10 * log(200 * 10
3
) dB-Hz + 4 dB = -117 dBm
In addition to I
sideband
and V
INT
, the following must also be accounted for in order to determine the
isolation required to avoid sideband emissions interference to a victim base station receiver:
Interfering base station feeder loss (I
feeder
) and antenna gain (I
ant
, equal to 0 dBi if co-
located w/victim base station antenna).
Victim base station antenna gain (V
ant
, equal to 0 dBi if co-located w/interfering base
station antenna), feeder loss (V
feeder
), receiver multicoupler/preselector loss/gain
4

(V
RMC
), receiver bandwidth adjustment factor
5
(V
BWA
) and receiver sensitivity (V
sens
).
The following relationship shows the minimum isolation, PL
min,Sideband
, required between an in-
terfering base station transmit antenna and a victim base station receive antenna to prevent side-
band emission interference:
[EQ 10-1]
Transmitter IM
Conducted transmit intermodulation (IM) is the effect of frequency mixing in the final amplifier
stage of one interfering carrier transmitter with the outputs of others. The result is that unwanted
channel power may be generated in the interfering transmitter and land in the victim receivers Rx
band. When transmitter IM products fall within the passband of a sensitive communications receiv-
er, it creates interference. The effect on the victim receiver (desensitization) is that of a reduction
to the usable sensitivity for desired channel performance. See Figure 10-9.
4. The amount of available multicoupler/preselector loss (V
RMC
) will depend on the amount of guardband be-
tween the two systems. It is expected that for most cases this loss will be minimal considering the very gradual
roll-off attributed to these normally wideband filters. In fact, some multicouplers and preselectors contain
LNAs that may have gain rather than loss in-band. In those cases, V
RMC
would have a negative value.
5. The V
BWA
term is necessary to adjust the sideband emission power specification, I
sideband
(listed in Table
10-3 and Table 10-4 in units of dBm/30 kHz), to that of the channel bandwidth of the victim receiver. For
example, V
BWA
for a CDMA receiver would be equal to 10*log(1228800/30000) = 16.12 dB.
PL
min Sideband dB ( ) ,
I
sideband dBm 30kHz ( )
I
feeder dB ( )
I
ant dBi ( )
V
ant dBi ( )
+ + =
V
feeder dB ( )
V
RMC dB ( )
V
BWA dB ( )
V
INT dBm ( )
+
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-9: Interfering Transmit Carriers and Intermodulation Spectrum
Power levels of potential transmitter IM products vary between different transmitter designs but,
in general, have an energy (depicted in the above figure as I
IM
), that is some specified level below
the Tx carriers power level (I
out
). As with transmitter sideband emissions, all transmitter IM prod-
ucts falling within a victim base station receivers passband must be received at a level below a
maximum allowable interference level (V
INT
), which results in a certain tolerable degradation in
receiver sensitivity. Table 10-3 and Table 10-4 in the following section provide Tx IM specifica-
tions for relevant technologies, listed both as defined values and as a function of I
out
.
In addition to I
IM
and V
INT
, the following must also be accounted for in the calculation:
Interfering base station feeder loss (I
feeder
ant
, equal to 0 dBi if co-
located w/victim base station antenna).
ant
feeder
) and receiver multicoupler/preselector loss/gain
(V
RMC
).
min,TxIM
, required between an inter-
fering base station transmit antenna and a victim base station receive antenna to prevent Tx IM in-
terference:
[EQ 10-2]
Receiver Desensitization
Receiver desensitization may result when strong off-channel interfering signal(s) that fall within
or just outside the passband of a victim receiver reduce the sensitivity of the victim receiver to the
desired receive signal. The result is that certain victim receiver stages may change bias conditions
and lose gain and sensitivity. The ability of a receiver to receive an intended signal in the presence
of these interfering signals is measured by its desensitization or blocking level specification. As-
sociated with this level, is an allowable degradation in Rx sensitivity, usually 3 dB. See Figure 10-
10.
I
IM
(dBm)
F3
Tx
X X =
F1
Tx
F2
Tx
F
Rx
I
out
= Interfering BS RF equipment Tx
output power level (top of frame) in dBm
Interfering BS Tx IM Performance (dBc)
PL
mi n TxIM dB ( ) ,
I
IM dBm ( )
I
feeder dB ( )
I
ant dBi ( )
V
ant dBi ( )
V
f eeder dB ( )
V
RMC dB ( )
V
INT dBm ( )
+ + =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-10: Victim Receiver Out-of-Band Desensitization
Desensitization levels vary between different receiver designs but, in general, have an energy (de-
picted in the above figure as V
block
), that is some specified level above the receivers Rx sensitivity,
V
sens
. Off-channel interfering signal(s) must be received at the victim base station receiver at a lev-
el below V
block
.
The Rx sensitivity level, V
sens
, is a certain number of dB above or below the receivers thermal
noise floor (kTBF) and is a function of the receivers required S/N ratio (Eb/No, C/I, etc.) and pro-
cessing gain (CDMA only). Processing gain is equivalent to the receivers channel bandwidth in
Hz (B) divided by the Rx data rate in Hz (R). An example calculation for 8 kbps CDMA with an
Eb/No (S/N) of 7 dB and a receiver noise figure (F) of 6 dB is provided below:
V
sens,CDMA
= kT (dBm/Hz) + 10*log(B
CDMA
) (dB) + F

(dB) + S/N
CDMA
(dB) - 10*log(B
CDMA
/R
CDMA
) (dB)
= -174 + 10*log(1.2288*10
6
) + 6 + 7 -10*log(1.2288*10
6
/9600) = -121.2 dBm
Table 10-5, Table 10-6 and Table 10-7 in the following section provide desensitization specifica-
tions for relevant technologies, listed both as defined values and as a function of V
sens
.
In addition to V
block
and V
sens
Interfering BS RF equipment Tx output (top of frame) power level (I
out
), feeder loss
(I
feeder
ant
, equal to 0 dBi if co-located w/victim base station
antenna).
ant
feeder
(V
RMC
).
min,Desense
fering base station transmit antenna and a victim base station receive antenna to prevent receiver
desensitization as a result of the presence of strong off-channel signals:
[EQ 10-3]
V
block
= Victim Max Allowable BS Receiver
V
sens
= Victim BS Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
F
Tx
F
Rx
Blocking/Desense Level (dBm)
= kTBF + S/N - Processing Gain
*
* if applicable
PL
mi n Desense dB ( ) ,
I
out dBm ( )
I
feeder dB ( )
I +
ant dBi ( )
V
ant dBi ( )
V
f eeder dB ( )
V
RMC dB ( )
V
bl ock dBm ( )
+ =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Receiver Intermodulation
The nonlinear nature of the electronic devices commonly used in receiver amplification and mixing
circuits leads to the production of undesired responses, such as IM, in addition to the desired re-
sponse. If one or more of the victim receiver-produced IM products falls on or near a frequency to
which the victim receiver is tuned, the effect is that the product will be an interferer to the desired
receive channel. Since the receiver is most sensitive to this in-band product, the IM must be re-
duced at this point by reduction of one or more of the mixing frequencies. See Figure 10-11.
Figure 10-11: Victim Receiver Out-of-Band Intermodulation
Tolerance to receiver IM will vary between different receiver designs. In general, performance will
be limited by a maximum allowable interfering (e.g. receiver IM-producing) signal level as re-
ceived at the victim receiver (depicted in the above figure as V
IMR
), which is some specified level
above the receivers Rx sensitivity, V
sens
. Interfering signal levels must be received at the victim
base station receiver at a level which is less than V
IMR
. Table 10-5, Table 10-6 and Table 10-7 in
the following section provide receiver IM specifications for relevant technologies, listed both as a
defined value and as a function of V
sens
.
In addition to V
IMR
and V
sens
Interfering BS RF equipment Tx output (top of frame) power level (I
out
), feeder loss
(I
feeder
ant
, equal to 0 dBi if co-located w/victim base station
antenna).
ant
feeder
(V
RMC
).
min,RxIM
fering base station transmit antenna and a victim base station receive antenna to prevent receiver
IM:
[EQ 10-4]
X =
F1
Tx
F2
Tx
F
Rx
V
IMR
= BS Max Allowable Out-of-band, Receiver
Victim BS Receiver IM Rejection Performance (dB)
V
sens
= Victim BS Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
= kTBF + S/N - Processing Gain
*
* if applicable
IM-Producing Rx Signal Level (dBm)
PL
mi n RxIM , dB ( )
I
out dBm ( )
I
f eeder dB ( )
I +
ant dBi ( )
V
ant dBi ( )
V
f eeder dB ( )
V
RMC dB ( )
V
IMR dBm ( )
+ =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The resulting isolation requirements can be achieved through both antenna separation and filtering
of the interfering transmitter(s) and affected receiver(s). The second step in the analysis process is
to take the largest isolation requirement as determined by the above equations and determine if it
is reasonable to achieve it solely through antenna separation. Required antenna separation for a
given isolation value can be approximated using free space pathloss equations:
S
H
=[10
((PLmin - 32.44-20*(log(f)))/20)
]*1000 [EQ 10-5]
S
V
=10
(PLmin - 28)/40
* 300/f [EQ 10-6]
where:
S
H
= Minimum horizontal antenna separation, in meters, for use with non-co-located sites.
S
V
= Minimum vertical antenna separation, in meters, for use with co-located sites
6
.
PL
min
= Minimum required isolation
f = Interfering base station transmit frequency, in MHz
Note that while other pathloss models can be used to approximate antenna separation (such as Hata,
Okumura etc.), it is recommended to use the above pathloss equations as a worse-case scenario.
If it turns out that the required antenna separation requirements are not reasonable between the co-
existing systems (e.g. too large), then appropriate filtering may be considered to provide the re-
maining isolation. The amount of isolation provided from filtering will depend on the amount of
guardband available between interfering systems and the amount of attenuation needed in the fil-
ters stopband. The transmitter sideband emission and transmitter IM isolation calculations are to
be used with respect to any Tx filter requirements. The receiver desensitization and receiver IM
isolation calculations are to be used with respect to any Rx filter requirements.
If required, filter quantities should be ordered as follows. As a guide, order one set of Tx filters per
interfering base station, where the quantity of filters in a set would depend on the number of inter-
fering base station antennas present at the site. If Rx filters are required, order one set of Rx filters
for each affected base station that is either co-located or directly adjacent to an interfering base sta-
tion. Note that the need for Rx filters at a given affected base station may need to be determined
on a site-by-site basis considering actual antenna separation distances and the amount of pathloss
between them.
6. NOTE: The vertical spacing decoupling equation (Equation 10-6) provides a rough estimate of required
antenna separation and does not consider near-field effects that can alter the actual isolation provided. It is
strongly recommended that appropriate on-site testing be completed to verify the actual isolation achieved by
vertical antenna separation.
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.2.2.1.2 Equipment Specifications
I
sideband
, I
IM
, V
block
and V
IMR
will vary with equipment type. Typical values, based on standard
equipment specifications are provided in Table 10-3 through Table 10-7 below.
Table 10-3: Applicable Base Station Transmitter Specifications
Technology
(Specificatio
n)
Maximum Transmitter Sideband
Emission Level, I
sideband
(dBm/30 kHz)
Maximum Transmitter
IM Power Level, I
IM
(dBm)
AMPS
(IS-20A)
< Larger of -31 or (I
out
- 78)
@ |f-f
c
| > 90 kHz
< (I
out
- 60 dB)
800 MHz
CDMA
(IS-97A)
< (I
out
- 45)
@ 1.98 > |f-f
c
| > 0.75 MHz
< (I
out
- 60)
@ |f - f
c
| > 1.98 MHz
< (I
out
- 45)
@ 1.98 > |f-f
c
| > 0.75 MHz
< (I
out
- 60)
@ |f - f
c
| > 1.98 MHz
Table 10-4: DCS1800 Base Station Transmitter Specifications (GSM 05.05)
Offset Range
From Tx Carrier
(kHz)
Maximum Transmitter
Sideband Emission Level,
I
sideband

(dBm/30 kHz)
Maximum Transmitter
IM Power Level, I
IM
(dBm)
200 < (I
out
- 30) < (I
out
- 30)
250 < (I
out
- 33) < (I
out
- 33)
400 < (I
out
- 60) < (I
out
- 60)
600 to <1200 < -27 <-27
1200 to <1800 < -30 <-30
1800 to <6000 < -37.2
a
a. AMPS IS-20A lists a sideband emission level in dBm/300 Hz. GSM5.05 lists sideband emission levels
in dBm/100 kHz for frequency offset ranges > 1800 kHz. A conversion to dBm/30 kHz is used here to be
consistent with units used for other specification values.
<-32
> 6000 (I
out
- 85.2)
a
< Larger of -36 or (I
out
- 70)
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 10-5: Applicable Base Station Receiver Specifications
Technology
(Specification)
Maximum Receiver
IM Level, V
IMR
(dBm)
Maximum Receiver
Desense/Blocking Level, V
block

(dBm)
TACS > (V
sens
+ 65)
> -50
(for signals falling within TACS A band)
> -23
(for signals falling within TACS B band)
900 MHz GSM
(GSM 5.05)
> - 43 (See Tables 3-6 and 3-7)
900 MHz CDMA
(China IS-97A) > (V
sens
+ 72)
> (V
sens
+ 50)
@ 0.9 > |f-f
c
| > 0.75 MHz
> (V
sens
+ 87)
@ |f-f
c
| > 0.9 MHz
PCS1900 CDMA
(J-STD-019)
> (V
sens
+ 72)
> (V
sens
+ 50)
@ 0.9 > |f-f
c
| > 0.75 MHz
> (V
sens
+ 87)
@ |f-f
c
| > 0.9 MHz
Table 10-6: In-Band GSM Base Station Receiver Blocking Specifications (GSM 05.05)
Offset Range
From Intended Rx
Carrier
(kHz)
Maximum Receiver
block

(dBm)
600 to <800 > -26
800 to <3000 > -16
Table 10-7: Out-of-Band GSM Base Station Receiver Blocking Specifications (GSM 5.05)
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Maximum Receiver
block

(dBm)
0.1 to <915 > 8
980 to <12750 > 8
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Note that the values in the above tables are worst case and are based solely on the methods of mea-
surement as outlined in each technologys specification documentation. Actual values may vary
according to both base station equipment manufacturer and desired quality of service (SINAD, Eb/
No, BER, FER, data rate, etc.). With this in mind, the reader is encouraged to consult vendor-spe-
cific documentation and system design constraints to determine more accurate and/or appropriate
data for a given interference analysis.
10.2.2.2 Preventative Measures: MS-to-MS Interference
Since both the interfering transmitters and affected receivers are moving with respect to one anoth-
er and in random positions, the severity of interference between mobile stations will depend on the
subscriber densities of each system involved and the distances between them. The likelihood of in-
terference will also depend on the power control capabilities of the interfering mobile station
unit(s) and the performance quality of both the interfering mobile transmitter(s) and affected mo-
bile station receiver(s).
As Table 10-8 illustrates, interference between mobile stations is generally less of a problem than
between base stations.
Table 10-8: Inter-Band Interference Comparison
Mobile Station-to-
Mobile Station
Base Station-to-
Base Station
Antenna
Separation
Distance
Variable Fixed
Path Loss
Variable Fixed
# of Distinct Tx
Frequencies-
FDMA/TDMA
Systems
1 per mobile
(narrow-band carrier)
> 1 per
Base Station
# of Distinct Tx
Frequencies-
CDMA Systems
1 per mobile
(wide-band carrier)
> 1 per
Base Station
Power/channel
Low High
Antenna Cross
Polarization Loss
Variable Fixed
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Since intermodulation requires two or more interfering signals at precise frequency spacing, the
probability of any resulting interference could therefore be very low. As a result, MS-to-MS inter-
ference is typically the result of Tx sideband emissions. In areas subject to a high density of pedes-
trian subscriber traffic (in a shopping mall, subway station, etc.), this interference could be
significant enough to affect or cause a dropped call.
Unfortunately, there is little that can be done to prevent MS-to-MS interference other than to ad-
dress the potential for interference in the actual physical design of both the interfering and victim
subscriber units so that sufficient isolation is provided. This, however, seems to be an unlikely pos-
sibility as subscriber performance requirements (again, generated by distinctly different standards
bodies--ANSI/EIA/TIA and ETSI) typically do not address inter-band interference issues of this
nature.
Note that, depending on the technologies involved, frequency plans could also be modified to help
prevent interference in certain areas. However, in areas of the most concern, high traffic areas, fre-
quency plan flexibility may be limited.
10.3 PCS and Microwave Interference
Within the US 1,900 MHz band, there are over 4,500 microwave links, the majority of which are
5 MHz (300 channel) or 10 MHz (600 channel) analog FM-FDM systems. The chart below illus-
trates where these links are centered with respect to the PCS MTA and BTA license bands.
Figure 10-12: The PCS Spectrum
10.3.1 PCS to Microwave Interference
PCS license requirements essentially dictate that any PCS system may not cause any harmful in-
terference into incumbent microwave systems. Detailed interference analysis is needed to deter-
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
mine the interference potential of PCS into microwave systems.
Recommendations and guidelines for analysis of interference into microwave systems are provided
in the Telecommunications Industry Associations (TIA) Bulletin, TSB-10-F. The four main con-
siderations detailed in TSB-10-F are:
Coordination Distances
Propagation Models
Power Aggregation
Microwave Receiver Interference Criteria
These considerations must incorporate interference from subscriber unit as well as base station
sources. The term PCS transmitter will, therefore, refer to a base station or subscriber unit. Please
refer to the Bulletin for more information.
The following sections will summarize the four main considerations.
10.3.1.1 Coordination Distances
It is necessary to determine a search area around each PCS transmitter within which the process of
interference analysis needs to be undertaken. This is known as the Coordination Distance. The pri-
mary factors governing the coordination distance for a PCS transmitter are its antenna height and
EIRP. In general, the PCS base station transmitter will define the coordination distance.
The minimum Coordination Distance is calculated by using the following formula set:
; [EQ 10-7]
[EQ 10-8]
[EQ 10-9]
[EQ 10-10]
[EQ 10-11]
where:
D = Coordination distance
P = EIRP (dBm)
DLT 2.56 HT ( ) =
DL 10
51.87 P +
20
-----------------------
,
_
=
DD
65 1.85DLT P + +
0.106 DLT 33.6 + ( ) 0.899 + log
------------------------------------------------------------------------ =
DS
19.9 0.12 DLT P + +
0.1156 5.6
5
10 DLT
----------------------------------------------------------- =
D min DL max D DS , ( ) , ( ) =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
H
T
= Transmitting antenna height above average terrain (m)
D
L
= Free Space distance (km)
D
D
= Diffraction distance (km)
D
LT
= Distance to horizon (km)
For example, a typical PCS BTS with an antenna height of 30 m and an EIRP of 100 Watts requires
a coordination distance of 275 km.
The following graph shows the coordination distances for a PCS transmitter with 30 and 90 meter
antenna heights, over a wide range of EIRP values.
Figure 10-13: Example Coordination Distances
As can be seen, the distances involved are substantial and may even extend beyond the MTA/BTA
(Major Trading Area / Basic Trading Area) license boundary.
10.3.1.2 Propagation Models
To determine the level of interference into a microwave system, it is necessary to calculate the sig-
nal strength of the PCS signal at the microwave receiver. In traditional microwave systems, the free
space path loss calculation is used in link planning. However, with the lower antenna heights of
PCS transmitters, the effects of local clutter must be considered. For this reason, the Hata model
with suburban correction is used as the base propagation model. In addition, because of the large
coordination distances, propagation beyond the transhorizon (the point at which line of sight com-
munications between two fixed antennas is no longer possible) must also be considered. The for-
ward scatter loss model is used for propagation beyond the horizon.
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
The Hata and forward scatter loss models are used for both the subscriber unit and the base station
path loss calculations. However, different correction factors are set to account for differences in
antenna heights.
10.3.1.2.1 Basic Propagation Models
Free Space Path Loss
The free space path loss calculation is represented by the following equation:
[EQ 10-12]
where:
d = distance (km)
f = frequency (MHz)
Hata Model
The Hata based propagation model (suburban area) is represented by the following equation:
[EQ 10-13]
where:
L
pcs
= Loss between PCS and MW antennas using the modified Hata model.
= PCS antenna height correction factor
Forward Scatter Loss (Troposcatter) Model
The actual distance to the transhorizon is calculated by using the smooth earth transition method
which specifies the receiver and transmitter antenna heights above the average elevation along the
path. Assuming no clutter or terrain obstacles, the smooth earth transition distance (transhorizon)
is represented by the following formula:
[EQ 10-14]
where:
d
h
= Transition distance (km)
h
pcs
= PCS antenna height above average terrain (m)
L
fs
32.44 20 d ( ) log 20 f ( ) log + + =
L
pcs
69.5 26.16 f ( ) 13.82 h
mw
( ) 44.9 6.55 h
mw
( ) log [ ] d ( ) h
pcs
( ) 2
f
28
------
,
_
log
2
5.4 log + log log + =
h
pcs
( )
dh 4.123 hpcs hmw + ( ) =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
h
mw
= Microwave antenna height above average terrain (m)
The recommended equation for forward scatter loss, adjusted for hourly median loss, is as follows:
[EQ 10-15]
where:
L
50
= Hourly median transmission loss 50% of the time(dB)
f = Frequency (MHz)
d = Path length (km)
[EQ 10-16]
d
h
= Smooth Earth Transition Distance
[EQ 10-17]
where:
[EQ 10-18]
[EQ 10-19]
[EQ 10-20]
10.3.1.2.2 PCS Base Station Correction Factors
The same basic Hata model is used for path loss calculations for both subscriber unit and base sta-
tion sources. However, a correction set is applied to account for differences in antenna heights. The
Hata model from above and the following correction factors should be used for microwave anten-
nas below 180 m and PCS antennas below 60 m.
For PCS antennas below 9 m (ground level subscriber unit sources), the following Hata suburban
correction factor equation is used:
[EQ 10-21]
For PCS antennas between 9 m and 60 m (base station sources), the Hata large city correction fac-
tor equation is as follows:
L50 29.73 30 f ( ) 10 d ( ) 30 ( ) N H h , ( ) + log + log + log + =
d dh ( )
8.5
------------------- milliradian ( ) =
N H h , ( ) 20 5 h + ( ) 4.343h + log =
H
d
4000
------------ =
h 1.063
3
10
2
=
0.27 =
hpcs ( ) 1.1 f ( ) log 0.7 [ ] hpcs 1.56 f ( ) log 0.8 [ ] =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
[EQ 10-22]
Outside of these ranges, the free space path loss formula should be used to predict the propagation
loss to the transhorizon. The following graph shows the relationship between the three propagation
models at both PCS downlink frequencies. As previously mentioned, the local clutter has the effect
of increasing the propagation loss above that of free space path loss. This in turn results in the tran-
sition from the Hata model to the troposcatter model occurring further out than the transhorizon
distance.
Figure 10-14: Propagation Curves for High PCS Antennas
Downlink PCS Frequency = 1960 MHz
10.3.1.2.3 PCS Subscriber Unit Correction Factors
Mobile transmissions will be a significant factor in the interference analysis as, unlike the base sta-
tion, the subscriber unit is not fixed and will try to access the PCS system in various locations. For
PCS subscriber units on the street, the recommended loss model is the mean Hata suburban model
(Eq 10-7) with the suburban correction factor as stated in Eq 10-15. Refer to the following figure.
hpcs ( ) 3.2 11.75 hpcs ( ) log [ ]
2
4.97 =
Transition Point
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-15: Propagation Curves for Low PCS Antennas
Uplink PCS Frequency = 1880 MHz
One of the most significant issues of interference into microwave systems is line of sight situations.
The most common occurrence of this will be from a subscriber unit located in a high rise building
or on a balcony. In this case, path loss figures approaching free space loss may be experienced be-
tween the subscriber unit and microwave antennas.
It is possible for this situation that the subscriber units interfering signal will be stronger than the
aggregated powers of many base station transmissions at the microwave receiver. In urban envi-
ronments, the probability of an elevated subscriber unit is greater. Thus, the impact of the subscrib-
er unit interference sources on the microwave receiver will be more substantial than in residential
areas.
TSB-10-F, section F-4.4.1.1 provides statistical adjustments to the mean Hata suburban model to
account for the above effects.
10.3.1.3 Power Aggregation
When considering the interference level into a microwave receiver, the combined effect of all the
PCS transmitters in a service area must be considered. The aggregated power will be a function of
the total number of PCS transmitters (both base station and subscriber units) included within the
service area.
Transition Point
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-16: Example Aggregated Service Area
Statistical methods for aggregating the PCS transmitter powers may used to determine the expected
spatial PCS distribution within the service area. As a default, uniform distribution of powers should
be assumed. From the specified distribution, the aggregated interference signal can be determined
using either analytical techniques or by Monte Carlo simulation methods.
10.3.1.4 Microwave Receiver Interference Criteria
Three interference criteria exist to determine if a PCS system will interfere with microwave:
1. - Carrier to Interference
2. - Threshold Degradation
3. - Reliability
All three forms of interference criteria should be assessed within the analysis procedure in order to
determine which microwave systems require relocation and demonstrate non-interference into the
other microwave systems within the coordination distance.
10.3.1.4.1 Carrier to Interference
The principle of the Carrier to Interference ratio criteria is to specify the threshold at which an un-
wanted signal will cause harmful interference upon the wanted signal. For single frequency trans-
mission systems, a single C/I ratio may be quoted for the receiver. However, with multi-channel
microwave systems, the C/I criteria is expressed in terms of a curve representing the allowable C/
I ratio at a specific frequency separation from the center of the microwave carrier.
The C/I curves are calculated based on the transmit power spectral densities of both the microwave
and PCS systems, as well as the receiver selectivity of the microwave system. The power spectral
density, the number of channels, the modulation type, and the bandwidth play an important role in
determining the shape of the curve. The following graph is an example of such a curve for both
GSM and CDMA carriers as interferers.
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure 10-17: Example C/I Curves for a 10 MHz Microwave Receiver
10.3.1.4.2 Threshold Degradation
Threshold degradation is the reduction in the microwave receiver sensitivity caused by an interfer-
ing PCS signal. TSB-10-F states that the maximum interfering signal level for analog receiver
threshold degradation in FM-FDM links can be represented by the following equation:
[EQ 10-23]
where:
I
max
= maximum interfering signal level, dBm
R
t
= receiver threshold, dBm
F
= the difference between the operating fade margin and that required to meet the outage
objective, dB
S
e
= effective selectivity of the victim receiver to the interfering signal, dB
(f
s
) = interfering signal frequency at which S
e
is defined
For example, if the microwave receiver sensitivity is -80 dBm, then the co-channel interfering PCS
signal must be -90 dBm or less to avoid degrading the sensitivity of the receiver (assuming no deg-
radation due to fade margin).
10.3.1.4.3 Reliability
Reliability within a microwave link may be expressed in two main forms: availability (quoted as a
percentile such as 5 nines [99.999%] or 6 nines [99.9999%]), or annual outage time (seconds). For
I
max
R
t
F
S
e
f
s
( ) 10 + + =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
most microwave links, the operator defines a minimum required reliability. Reliability within a mi-
crowave link is, in fact, a function of the fade margin allocated for the link. A reduction in the fade
margin will reduce the availability and increase the outage time per year. It is not uncommon for
the microwave link to have been over-engineered, which means that the fade margin allocated is
in excess of the reliability required. Thus, a 1 dB degradation or more caused by a PCS interferer
may not always compromise the minimum required reliability.
Calculating Outage Time
[EQ 10-24]
where:
T = annual outage time (seconds)
r = fade occurrence factor
T
o
= (t/50)(8*10
6
)=length of fade season (seconds)
t = average annual temperature in
o
F
CFM = Fade Margin (dB)
I
o
= Space Diversity Improvement Factor = 1 for non-diversity, > 1 for diversity
Calculating Availability
[EQ 10-25]
where:
A = annual availability (%)
T = annual outage time (seconds)
T
rTo
CFM
10
-------------
,
_
10
Io
----------------------------------- =
A
31.4496
6
10 T
31.4496
6
10
----------------------------------------
,

_
100 =
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.3.1.5 PCS to Microwave Interference Summary
The methods and procedures required to perform microwave interference analysis are complex.
Thus, this section serves to demonstrate the fundamental aspects of the process. A full guide de-
tailing all scenarios is beyond the scope of this document. Therefore, it is recommended that TSB-
10-F be used as a reference when considering any in-depth PCS to Microwave interference analy-
sis.
Note: Detailed analysis is best performed with the use of an automated microwave interference
analysis tool.
10.3.2 Microwave to PCS Interference
In contrast to PCS to microwave interference, there are no recommendations or guidelines present-
ed by the TIA for the calculation of microwave interference into PCS systems. The PCS system
supplier must therefore determine the appropriate method and levels.
The relocation of microwave links degraded by the PCS systems will naturally remove the majority
of sources of microwave to PCS interference. However, it should not be assumed that no interfer-
ence will occur.
10.3.2.1 General Consideration
Interference to PCS base stations is best considered as a degradation to the receiver noise figure.
The degradation to the noise figure produces an effective noise figure, which must then be used in
the link budget for the effected cell or sector. The reason interference can be treated as noise is that
the de-spreading following receiver filtering will result in the widening of the interferers spectrum
such that it is seen as a noise rise.
The procedure for calculating the effects of microwave interference on PCS base stations can also
be applied in the calculation of the effects of microwave interference on PCS subscriber units. It
must be remembered that the subscriber unit has a higher noise figure and its selectivity is differ-
ent to that of the base station. The calculations should reflect these differences.
10.3.2.2 Calculation of Nominal Noise Floor
The nominal noise floor is set by the bandwidth of the receiver and its noise figure. For the SC4850
and SC604, the noise figure of the receivers is designed to be 6 dB. The noise bandwidth of the
receiver is approximately 1.25 MHz.
Given:
Nominal Noise=N
nom
,
Thermal Noise=Nth(dB)= -174 dBm/Hz,
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Noise Figure= NF(dB)= 6 dB,
Noise Bandwidth=fnb= 1.25 MHz.
The nominal noise is the linear sum of these three parameters in dB:
Nnom(dB)= Nth(dB) + NF(dB) + 10 Log (fnb)
= -174 dBm/Hz + 6 dB + 61 dB Hz
= -107 dBm.
To calculate the nominal noise floor in a subscriber unit, the appropriate noise figure for the par-
ticular unit type must be substituted for the noise figure quoted for the base station. All compliant
subscriber units guarantee a noise figure of 10 dB, which compares to 6 dB for the base station.
This results in a noise floor of the subscriber unit being 4 dB higher than that of the base station.
10.3.2.3 Calculation of Effective Interference Power
The receiver filtering and the spectrum of the interferer establishes the effective interference pow-
er. The receiver filtering can be determined by the receiver desense curve. Since the desense spec-
ification includes the effects of processing gain and receiver E
b
/N
o
, these must be removed as the
first step in the process. This is easy to do as their effect is equal to the desense at 0 Hz channel
offset, which is nominally 14 dB. Define the following:
Receiver Filtering = |H(f)| = - (Desense(f) - Desense(0)),
where:
f = frequency offset from the carrier frequency in Hz.
Note, the minus sign in the above equation is due to the fact that desense is a positive quantity. The
spectrum of the interfering signal must also be known,
Interferer Power = G(f).
Effective interference power is calculated as the integrated product:
Effective Interference Power=I
eff

= .
Performing rectangular integration is adequate in most cases, allowing the calculation to be com-
pleted by using a summation of the products.
H f ( )
2
G f ( ) f d
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.3.2.4 Calculation of Effective Noise Figure
The effective noise in the receiver's bandwidth is the sum of the nominal noise power and the ef-
fective interference power, i.e.
Effective Noise=N
eff

= N
nom
+ I
eff
Expressed in dB:
Effective Noise (dB)=N
eff
(dB)
= 10 log (N
nom
+ I
eff
).
The ratio of the effective noise and the nominal noise is the effective noise figure:
Effective NF= NF
eff

= N
eff
/N
nom
Expressed in dB:
Effective NF (dB)=10 log [(N
nom
+ I
eff
) / N
nom
]
If I
eff
= N
nom
, the Effective NF is increased by 3 dB.
10.3.2.5 Microwave to PCS Interference Summary
Any interference in-band to the 1.25 MHz channel will directly add to the nominal noise power of
either base station or subscriber unit. Therefore, with a 4dB higher receiver noise floor, the sub-
scriber unit is less sensitive than the base station. If it is assumed that a interfering signal 10dB be-
low the receiver sensitivity will cause a 1dB increase in the signal to noise ratio, then the interfering
signal at the subscriber unit must be 4dB greater than that at the base station to cause an equivalent
effect.
Whether the base station or subscriber unit is degraded more by a microwave interferer is deter-
mined on an individual case basis depending on the location of the microwave transmitter in rela-
tion to the PCS system coverage area and the height of both base and subscriber unit antennas.
10
Version 2.1
12/18/98
10.4 References
1. ANSI IS-20A, Recommended Minimum Standards for 800-MHz Cellular Land
Stations, May, 1988, Sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.4.
2. ANSI J-STD-019, Base Station Compatibility Requirements for 1.8 to 2.0 Ghz Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Personal Communications Systems, August, 1995.
3. Clapp, Scott (Motorola), Inter-band Interference Control, August 15, 1998.
4. EIA/TIA IS-97-A, Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for Base Stations
Supporting Dual-Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular Mobile Stations, June,
1996, Sections 9.4.3, 9.4.4 and 10.5.1.
5. ETSI/GSM 05.05, Digital Cellular Telecommunications System Radio Transmission
and Reception, July, 1996, Sections 2, 4.2.1, 4.7.2, 5.3 and 6.2.
6. Leonard, Terry (Motorola), CDMA to GSM Base Station Interference Control, May 5,
1997.
7. Tajaddini, Mohammad (Motorola), Analysis of AMPS B Band and GSM Systems
Interference in Co-Located Sites, December 15, 1993.
8. United Kingdom Total Access Communication System Mobile Station - Land Station
Compatibility Specification, Issue 4, Amendment 2, February, 1995, Sections A.7 and
A.8.
9. Wilcox, Gordon (Motorola), Radio Frequency Interference in Two-Way Radio
Systems, November, 1975.
I. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
1. EIA/TIA/IS-95-A, Mobile Station - Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-
Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular Systems, 1995, Sections 2.1.1.1, 2.2.1.1,
3.1.1.1, 3.2.1.1, 6.1.1.1, 6.2.1.1, 7.1.1.1, Tables 2.1.1.1-1, 6.1.1.1-1, 6.1.1.1-2.
2. ANSI J-STD-008, Personal Station-Base Station Compatibility Requirements for 1.8
to 2.0 GHz Code Division Multiple Access Personal Communications, March 24,
1995, Section 2.1.1.1, Tables 2.1.1.1-1, 2.1.1.1-2, 2.1.1.1-3 and 2.1.1.1-4.
3. CFR 47 (Telecommunications), Office of the Federal Register National Archives and
Records Administration, October 1, 1997.
4. FCC Web Page (Wireless Telecommunications Bureau): http://www.fcc.gov/wtb/
National Archives and Records Administration (CFR Search Engine): http://
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/index.html
5. Lee, William C.Y. "Mobile Cellular Telecommunications Systems", McGraw-Hill
Book Company, Second Edition 1995, figure 4.3, p. 110.
6. A. Viterbi & Viterbi, "Erlang Capacity of a Power_Controlled CDMA System", IEEE
Selected Areas in Communications, August 1993, pp. 892-900.
7. A. Viterbi, "CDMA Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication", Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, Copyright 1995.
8. R. Padovani, "Reverse Link Performance of IS-95 Based Cellular Systems", IEEE
Personal Communications Third Quarter 1994, page 28-34.
9. TIA/EIA/IS-95A, Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard for Dual-Mode
Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular System, version 0.07, 6.1.5.1, 6.6.6.1.2,
6.6.6.2.1, 6.6.6.2.4.
10. Qualcomm, "The CDMA Network Engineering Handbook", March 1, 1993, 9.1.1,
9.2.3, 9.4.
11. Scott M. Hall (Motorola), "Simple CDMA PN Search Windows", January 5, 1995.
12. Chu Rui Chang, Jane Zhen Wan and Meng F. Lee (NORTEL Wireless Engineering
Services), "PN offset planning strategies for non-uniform CDMA networks",1997
IEEE 47th Vehicular Technology Conference, May 4-7, 1997.
13. Jin Yang, Derek Bao and Mo Ali (Airtouch Cellular), "PN offset planning in IS-95
based CDMA systems", 1997 IEEE 47th Vehicular Technology Conference, May 4-7,
1997.
14. "Fixed Wireless Terminal Description and Installation", 68P64113A02-O, Motorola
Technical Education Documentation
15. Turkmani, Parsons and Lewis, "Measurement of building penetration loss on radio
signals at 441, 900 and 1400 MHz", Journal of the Institution of Electronic and Radio
Engineers, Vol. 58, No. 6 (Supplement), pp. S169-S174, September-December 1988
References
Appendix
I.
Section I.: References
I. - 2 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
16. Turkmani and Toledo, "Modelling of radio transmissions into and within multistorey
buildings at 900, 1800 and 2300 MHz", IEEE Proceedings-I, Vol. 140, No. 6,
December 1993
17. Aguirre, "Radio Propagation Into Buildings at 912, 1920, and 5990 MHz Using
Microcells", 0-7803-1823-4/94 IEEE, session 1.6 & 1.7, pp. 129-134
18. Lee, William C.Y. "Mobile Communications Engineering", Copyright 1982,
McGraw-Hill Inc. pg. 33-40.
19. Jakes, W.C., "Microwave Mobile Communications", IEEE Press Reissue 1993,
(Wiley, New York, 1974), pp. 125-127
20. Okumura, Y., Ohmori, E., Kawano, T., Fukada, K.: "Field strength and ITs Variability
in VHF and UHF Land-Mobile Radio Service", Rev. Elec. Commun. Lab., 16 (1968),
pp. 825-873
21. Hata, M.: "Empirical formula for propagation loss in land mobile radio services",
IEEE Trans. on Vehicular and Technology, VT-29 (1980), pp. 317-325
22. COST 231 - UHF Propagation, "Urban transmission loss models for mobile radio in
the 900- and 1,800- MHz bands", COST 231 TD (91) 73 The Hagne, September, 1991
23. Parsons, David, "The Mobile Radio Propagation Channel", Copyright 1992, Reprinted
1996 by John Wiley & Sons Ltd.
24. Rappaport, Theodore S., "Wireless Communications Principles & Practices",
Copyright 1996 by Prentice Hall PTR
26. ANSI IS-20A, Recommended Minimum Standards for 800-MHz Cellular Land
Stations, May, 1988, Sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.4.
27. ANSI J-STD-019, Base Station Compatibility Requirements for 1.8 to 2.0 Ghz Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Personal Communications Systems, August, 1995.
28. Clapp, Scott (Motorola), Inter-band Interference Control, August 15, 1998.
29. EIA/TIA IS-97-A, Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for Base Stations
Supporting Dual-Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular Mobile Stations, June,
1996, Sections 9.4.3, 9.4.4 and 10.5.1.
30. ETSI/GSM 05.05, Digital Cellular Telecommunications System Radio Transmission
and Reception, July, 1996, Sections 2, 4.2.1, 4.7.2, 5.3 and 6.2.
31. Leonard, Terry (Motorola), CDMA to GSM Base Station Interference Control, May
5, 1997.
32. Tajaddini, Mohammad (Motorola), Analysis of AMPS B Band and GSM Systems
Interference in Co-Located Sites, December 15, 1993.
33. United Kingdom Total Access Communication System Mobile Station - Land Station
Compatibility Specification, Issue 4, Amendment 2, February, 1995, Sections A.7 and
A.8.
34. Wilcox, Gordon (Motorola), Radio Frequency Interference in Two-Way Radio
Systems, November, 1975.
II. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
AGC - Automatic Gain Control
AMR - Alarm, Monitoring and Reporting Card
AMPS - Advanced Mobile Phone System/Service
ARP - Average Rated Power
ATCH - Actual Traffic CHannels (incl. SHO)
BBX - Broad Band Transceiver card
BBX I/O - BBX Input Output card
BDC - Baseband Distribution Card
BHCA - Busy Hour Call Attempts, the number of call attempts during the busiest hour of the day
BSC - See CBSC
BSS - The Base Station System consists of one BSC and its associated BTSs
BTA - Basic Trading Area
BTS - The Base Transceiver Sub-System includes the equipment necessary to implement a CDMA Digital
Cellular Base Station
BTS Cluster - A group of BTSs controlled by a single BSC
BTS Site - The location where a particular BTS resides
CCP - CDMA Channel Processor
CDMA - Code Division Multiple Access
CBSC - The Centralized Base Site Controller consists of the Mobility Manager and Transcoder
CCITT - International Consultative Committee for Telegraph and Telephony is a standards committee that
recommends specific implementations of various communication protocols
CPU - Central Processing Unit
CSM - Clock Synchronization Module
C7 - Signaling System #7 (CCITT#7)
CW - Continuous Wave
dBc - Decibels below carrier
dBd - Decibels referenced to a half wave dipole
dBi - Decibels referenced to an Isotropic
dBm - Decibels referenced to a milliWatt
DDC - Duplexer with integrated Directional Coupler (SC 604)
DoD - Department of Defense
Terms and
Acronyms
Appendix
II.
Section II.: Terms and Acronyms
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Eb - Energy per Bit
Ec - Energy per Chip
EIRP - Effective Isotropic Radiated Power
EMI - Electro-Magnetic Interference
ERP - Effective Radiated Power
ETCH - Effective Traffic CHannels
FER - Frame Erasure Rate
Frame - an enclosed rack of equipment
FWT - Fixed Wireless Terminal
GHz - Giga-Hertz (10
9
Hz)
GLI - Group Line Interface
GOS - Grade of Service, the blocking probability.
GPS - Global Positioning Satellite system used to synchronize Sites around the System
GSM - Global System for Mobile communications (at 900 MHz) - Previously known as Groupe Special
Mobile (Pan-European digital cellular standard). GSM900 is used only when necessary to differentiate it
from DCS1800.
Host - The Host is the fault tolerant processor used within both the MM and OMC-R products.
HSO - High Stability Oscillator
IM - InterModulation
ISI - Inter-System Interference
ISO - International Standards Organization
Io - Total interference density
Kbps - Kilobits per second
LFR - Loran Frequency Receiver card
LMF - Local Maintenance Facility
LORAN-C - LORange Navigation Low Frequency Broadcast
LPA - Linear Power Amplifier amplifies multiple carriers generated by the XCVRs
LTMS - Laboratory Test-oriented Mobile Station
MAWI - Motorola Advanced Wideband Interface
Mbps - Megabits per second
MCC - Multiple Channel CDMA card
MF - 1. Multifrequency 2. Modulated Frequency 3. RF Modem Frame
MHz - Mega-Hertz (10
6
Hz)
MPC - Multicoupler Preselector Card
MS - Mobile Station
MSC - Mobile Switching Center
Version 2.1
12/18/98
MSF - European Low Frequency Broadcast of Standard Time
MSI/O - The physical termination card for the RF Modem Frame (similar to the BIB)
MTA - Major Trading Area
NAMPS - Narrowband Advanced Mobile Phone Service
NF - Noise Figure
OH - OverHead Channels
PA - Power Amplifier
PCM - Pulse Code Modulation
PCS - Personal Communication System
PSTN - Public Switched Telephone Network
PTCH - Physical Traffic CHannels (incl. SHO+OH)
PN - Pseudo-random Noise spreading sequence
RF - Radio Frequency
RFMF - RF MODEM Frame
RFDS - The Radio Frequency Diagnostic Sub-system monitors the performance of the BTS
RGD - Remote GPS Distribution box
RGPS - Remote Global Positioning Satellite
RL - Return Loss
Rx or RX - Receive
RXDC - Receiver Distribution card
SBN - Side Band Noise
Sector - An RF coverage area segment
Shelf - Generic name used to describe a mechanical enclosure, included in several types of BSS Frames
SHO - Soft HandOff
SIF - Site Interface Frame
Span Line - A 1.544Mbps or 2.048Mbps-HWY Link
TCH - A Traffic CHannel is a single voice or data channel. Normally considered to be on the BTS side
of the BSC and/or on the air interface.
TDMA - Time Division Multiple Access
TIB - Telco Interconnect Board
Trunk - A Trunk is a single 64 kbps voice or data channel (DS-0) on a given span line between the BSC
and MSC.
Tx or TX - Transmit
TRX - Transceiver
TTA - Tower Top Amplifier
USDC - United States Digital Cellular, based upon the IS-136 specification
Version 2.1
12/18/98
UTC - Universal Coordinated Time
VSWR - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WiLL - Wireless Local Loop
III. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Active Set
The pilots associated with the Forward Traffic Channels assigned to the mobile station. It is the
base station that assigns all active set pilots to mobile stations.
Attenuator
A device for reducing the energy level of a signal without introducing distortion. Also called a pad.
Blocking
The inability of the calling subscriber to be connected to the called subscriber because either (a) all
paths are busy, or (b) because idle paths in the calling group cannot be access idle paths in the
called group.
Candidate Set
The pilots that are not currently in the Active Set but have been received by the mobile station with
sufficient strength to indicate that the associated Forward Traffic Channels could be successfully
demodulated. As a property of the Mobile Assisted HandOff (MAHO), the mobile station
promotes a Neighbor Set or Remaining Set pilot to the Candidate Set when certain pilot strength
criteria are met and then recommends the pilot to the base station for inclusion in the Active Set.
Channel
1) A particular member of a group that is associated with a unique time slot. Each member is
associated with one port in the switch; either an RF channel, a land trunk, a three-party conference
circuit, or a tone signalling port. 2) A particular member of an RF group that has a unique
frequency. 3) For a TDMA air interface, it describes the unique frequency and time slot allocation
for a single call. 4) For a CDMA air interface, it describes the walsh code assignment allowed for
the subscriber unit.
Directional Coupler
Located in the SIF. Bi-directional coupler carrying TX and RX RF signals to and from the
antennas. It includes a switch which allows the signals to be routed to the RFDS for testing.
Additionally, a port allows direct measurement of in-band forward (TX) signals without service
interruption.
Glossary
Appendix
III.
Section III.: Glossary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Erlang
A measure of telephone traffic intensity equivalent to the average number of simultaneous calls.
Alternatively, it is the total circuit usage in an interval of time divided by that interval. Thus, 1
erlang equals 3600 call seconds per hour or 36 CCS per hour.
EAMPS
Extended Advanced Mobile Phone System - Refers to additional voice channels defined as an
extension to AMPS systems. Analogous to ETACS in TACS systems.
Neighbor Set
The pilots that are not currently in the Active Set or the Candidate Set and are likely candidates for
handoff. Neighbor Set pilots are identified by the base station via Neighbor List and Neighbor List
Update messages.
PILOT_ARRIVAL
The pilot arrival time is the time of occurrence of the earliest arriving usable multipath component
of a pilot relative to the mobile stations time reference.
PILOT_INC
The pilot PN sequence offset index increment is the interval between pilots, in increments of 64
chips. Its valid range is from 1 to 15. The mobile station uses this parameter in only one manner,
to determine which pilots to scan from among the Remaining set. Only valid pilots (i.e. those pilots
that are multiples of PILOT_INC) will be scanned. For the mobile station, PILOT_INC impacts
only the scanning rate applied to Remaining pilots. It accomplishes this by reducing the number
of Remaining pilots that need to be scanned.
For the base station, its effect is different. In the base station, it is used in properly translating pilot
phase back into pilot offset index. The consequence is that the operator may artificially increase
the separation between valid time offsets. By selecting a PILOT_INC of 2, for instance, an
operator chooses to limit the number of valid offsets to 256 (i.e. 0, 2, 4,..., 508, 510) instead of 512.
The increased separation means that the pilot arrival must be larger before adjacent offset
ambiguity is possible and consequently the likelihood of a strong adjacent interferer is reduced.
PILOT_PN
The Pilot PN sequence offset (index), in units of 64 PN chips. It ranges from 0 to 511. Every
transmit sector will have an offset assigned to it. This parameter is set for each sector in the pilotpn
field of the DBCM Sector command, EDIT SECTOR SECGEN. The range is 0 to 511.
PILOT_PN_PHASE
The mobile station reports pilot strength and phase measurements for each active and candidate
Version 2.1
12/18/98
pilot in the Pilot Strength Measurement Message when recommending a change in the handoff
status (i.e. mobile assisted handoff). The mobile station computes the reported
PILOT_PN_PHASE as a function of the PILOT_ARRIVAL and the PILOT_PN. The pilot arrival
component represents the time delay of the pilot relative to the time reference or, in other words,
how skewed the pilot is from the mobiles concept of system time. Note also that the mobile does
not identify pilots by their offset index directly, but by their phase measurement. If the pilot arrival
was larger than 32 chips (1/2 of a pilot offset or 4.8 miles), then this could undermine the ability
of the base station to properly translate pilot phase into pilot offset index (given a PILOT_INC of
1).
Remaining Set
The set of all possible pilots in the current system on the current CDMA frequency assignment,
excluding pilots in the other sets. These pilots must be integer multiples of PILOT_INC (defined
below).
Re-Use Pattern
The minimum number of cells required in a pattern before channel frequencies are re-used, to
prevent interference. Varies between cell configuration type (omni/omni, etc.) and channel type
(traffic, perch). The pattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimize interference
between cells and sectors within the pattern area. In CDMA re-use patter refers mainly to the re-
use of the pilot PN of each sector in the system.
SRCH_WIN_A
This parameter represents the search window size associated with the Active Set and Candidate Set
pilots. The mobile station centers the search window for each pilot around the earliest arriving
usable multipath component of the pilot. Note that in contrast to the neighbor or remaining set
search windows, the active/candidate search windows "float" with the desired signals. That is to
say that the center position of the search window is updated every scan to track the new location
of the earliest arriving multipath component. This parameter is set via the srchwina field in the
DBCM Sector command, EDIT SECTOR MAHO. The range is 0 to 15 (defaults to 6).
In general, a neighbor search window, SRCH_WIN_N, will be sized so as to encompass the
geographic area in which the neighbor may be added (a soft handoff add zone or initial
detection area). The largest a neighbor search window need be is sufficient to cover the distance
between the neighbors, , plus an accommodation of the time-of-flight delay (approx. 3 chips).
Please refer to an attached white paper that provides some further detail and insight into search
windows (see section 10).
To illustrate these relationships better, consider the following scenario. A mobile station monitors
a neighbor pilot. The neighbor search window is centered on the neighbor pilot offset. This
centering is relative based on timing derived from the time reference. When the pilot strength of
a neighbor pilot recommends promotion to the candidate set, then the search window will be
tightened to the active search window size. The active search window is sized to compensate for
delay spread only and is therefore smaller than the neighbor search window. In addition, the active
3R
Version 2.1
12/18/98
search window locks onto and tracks the candidate pilot.
SRCH_WIN_N, SRCH_WIN_R
These parameters represent the search window sizes associated with Neighbor Set and Remaining
Set pilots. The mobile station centers the search window for each pilot around the pilots PN
sequence offset using timing defined by the mobile stations time reference. These parameters are
set via srchwinn and srchwinr fields in the DBCM Sector command, EDIT SECTOR MAHO. The
range is 0 to 15 (defaults to 6).
System Time
All base station digital transmissions are referenced to a common CDMA system-wide time scale
that uses the Global Positioning System (GPS) time scale, which is traceable to and synchronous
with Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).
Time Reference
The mobile station shall establish a time reference which is used to derive system time. This time
reference will be the earliest arriving multipath component being used for demodulation. This
reflects the assumption that the mobile stations fix on system time is always skewed by delay
associated with the shortest active link.
IV. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Erlang B Table
(Offered Load)
N: Number of Elements
Column Headings (numerical): Grade of Service
N 0.002 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.05 0.1
1 0.002 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.026 0.031 0.053 0.111
2 0.065 0.105 0.135 0.153 0.190 0.223 0.254 0.282 0.381 0.595
3 0.249 0.349 0.418 0.455 0.535 0.602 0.661 0.715 0.899 1.271
4 0.535 0.701 0.810 0.869 0.992 1.092 1.180 1.259 1.525 2.045
5 0.900 1.132 1.281 1.361 1.524 1.657 1.772 1.875 2.218 2.881
6 1.325 1.622 1.809 1.909 2.112 2.276 2.417 2.543 2.960 3.758
7 1.798 2.157 2.382 2.501 2.742 2.935 3.102 3.250 3.738 4.666
8 2.311 2.730 2.990 3.128 3.405 3.627 3.817 3.987 4.543 5.597
9 2.855 3.333 3.627 3.783 4.095 4.345 4.558 4.748 5.370 6.546
10 3.427 3.961 4.289 4.461 4.807 5.084 5.320 5.529 6.216 7.511
11 4.022 4.610 4.971 5.160 5.539 5.842 6.099 6.328 7.076 8.487
12 4.637 5.279 5.671 5.876 6.287 6.615 6.894 7.141 7.950 9.474
13 5.270 5.964 6.386 6.607 7.049 7.402 7.701 7.967 8.835 10.470
14 5.919 6.663 7.115 7.352 7.824 8.200 8.520 8.803 9.730 11.473
15 6.582 7.376 7.857 8.108 8.610 9.010 9.349 9.650 10.633 12.484
16 7.258 8.100 8.609 8.875 9.406 9.828 10.188 10.505 11.544 13.500
17 7.946 8.834 9.371 9.652 10.211 10.656 11.034 11.368 12.461 14.522
18 8.644 9.578 10.143 10.437 11.024 11.491 11.888 12.238 13.385 15.548
19 9.351 10.331 10.922 11.230 11.845 12.333 12.748 13.115 14.315 16.579
20 10.068 11.092 11.709 12.031 12.672 13.182 13.615 13.997 15.249 17.613
21 10.793 11.860 12.503 12.838 13.506 14.036 14.487 14.885 16.189 18.651
Erlang B
Table
Appendix
IV.
Section IV.: Erlang B Table
Version 2.1
12/18/98
22 11.525 12.635 13.303 13.651 14.345 14.896 15.364 15.778 17.132 19.692
23 12.265 13.416 14.110 14.470 15.190 15.761 16.246 16.675 18.080 20.737
24 13.011 14.204 14.922 15.295 16.040 16.631 17.133 17.577 19.031 21.784
25 13.763 14.997 15.739 16.125 16.894 17.505 18.024 18.483 19.985 22.833
26 14.522 15.795 16.561 16.959 17.753 18.383 18.918 19.392 20.943 23.885
27 15.285 16.598 17.387 17.797 18.616 19.265 19.817 20.305 21.904 24.939
28 16.054 17.406 18.218 18.640 19.482 20.150 20.719 21.221 22.867 25.995
29 16.828 18.218 19.053 19.487 20.352 21.039 21.623 22.140 23.833 27.053
30 17.606 19.034 19.891 20.337 21.226 21.932 22.531 23.062 24.802 28.113
31 18.389 19.854 20.734 21.191 22.103 22.827 23.442 23.987 25.773 29.174
32 19.176 20.678 21.580 22.048 22.983 23.725 24.356 24.914 26.746 30.237
33 19.966 21.505 22.429 22.909 23.866 24.626 25.272 25.844 27.721 31.301
34 20.761 22.336 23.281 23.772 24.751 25.529 26.191 26.776 28.698 32.367
35 21.559 23.169 24.136 24.638 25.640 26.435 27.112 27.711 29.677 33.434
36 22.361 24.006 24.994 25.507 26.530 27.343 28.035 28.647 30.657 34.503
37 23.166 24.846 25.854 26.378 27.424 28.254 28.960 29.585 31.640 35.572
38 23.974 25.689 26.718 27.252 28.319 29.166 29.887 30.526 32.624 36.643
39 24.785 26.534 27.583 28.129 29.217 30.081 30.816 31.468 33.609 37.715
40 25.599 27.382 28.451 29.007 30.116 30.997 31.747 32.412 34.596 38.787
41 26.416 28.232 29.322 29.888 31.018 31.916 32.680 33.357 35.584 39.861
42 27.235 29.085 30.194 30.771 31.922 32.836 33.615 34.305 36.574 40.936
43 28.057 29.940 31.069 31.656 32.827 33.758 34.551 35.253 37.565 42.011
44 28.882 30.797 31.946 32.543 33.735 34.682 35.488 36.203 38.557 43.088
45 29.708 31.656 32.824 33.432 34.644 35.607 36.428 37.155 39.550 44.165
46 30.538 32.517 33.705 34.322 35.554 36.534 37.368 38.108 40.545 45.243
47 31.369 33.381 34.587 35.215 36.466 37.462 38.310 39.062 41.540 46.322
Erlang B Table
(Offered Load)
N 0.002 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.05 0.1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
48 32.203 34.246 35.471 36.109 37.380 38.392 39.254 40.018 42.537 47.401
49 33.039 35.113 36.357 37.004 38.296 39.323 40.198 40.975 43.534 48.481
50 33.876 35.982 37.245 37.901 39.212 40.255 41.144 41.933 44.533 49.562
51 34.716 36.852 38.134 38.800 40.130 41.189 42.091 42.892 45.533 50.644
52 35.558 37.724 39.024 39.700 41.050 42.124 43.040 43.852 46.533 51.726
53 36.401 38.598 39.916 40.602 41.971 43.060 43.989 44.813 47.534 52.808
54 37.247 39.474 40.810 41.505 42.893 43.997 44.940 45.776 48.536 53.891
55 38.094 40.351 41.705 42.409 43.816 44.936 45.891 46.739 49.539 54.975
56 38.942 41.229 42.601 43.315 44.740 45.875 46.844 47.703 50.543 56.059
57 39.793 42.109 43.499 44.222 45.666 46.816 47.797 48.669 51.548 57.144
58 40.645 42.990 44.398 45.130 46.593 47.758 48.752 49.635 52.553 58.229
59 41.498 43.873 45.298 46.039 47.521 48.700 49.707 50.602 53.559 59.315
60 42.353 44.757 46.199 46.950 48.449 49.644 50.664 51.570 54.566 60.401
61 43.210 45.642 47.102 47.861 49.379 50.589 51.621 52.539 55.573 61.488
62 44.068 46.528 48.005 48.774 50.310 51.534 52.579 53.508 56.581 62.575
63 44.927 47.416 48.910 49.688 51.242 52.481 53.538 54.478 57.590 63.663
64 45.788 48.305 49.816 50.603 52.175 53.428 54.498 55.450 58.599 64.750
65 46.650 49.195 50.723 51.518 53.109 54.376 55.459 56.421 59.609 65.839
66 47.513 50.086 51.631 52.435 54.043 55.325 56.420 57.394 60.619 66.927
67 48.378 50.978 52.540 53.353 54.979 56.275 57.383 58.367 61.630 68.016
68 49.243 51.872 53.450 54.272 55.915 57.226 58.346 59.341 62.642 69.106
69 50.110 52.766 54.361 55.191 56.852 58.177 59.309 60.316 63.654 70.196
70 50.979 53.662 55.273 56.112 57.790 59.129 60.274 61.291 64.667 71.286
71 51.848 54.558 56.186 57.033 58.729 60.082 61.239 62.267 65.680 72.376
72 52.718 55.455 57.099 57.956 59.669 61.036 62.204 63.244 66.694 73.467
73 53.590 56.354 58.014 58.879 60.609 61.990 63.171 64.221 67.708 74.558
Erlang B Table
(Offered Load)
N 0.002 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.05 0.1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
74 54.463 57.253 58.929 59.803 61.550 62.945 64.138 65.199 68.723 75.649
75 55.337 58.153 59.846 60.728 62.492 63.900 65.105 66.177 69.738 76.741
76 56.211 59.054 60.763 61.653 63.434 64.857 66.073 67.156 70.753 77.833
77 57.087 59.956 61.681 62.579 64.378 65.814 67.042 68.136 71.769 78.925
78 57.964 60.859 62.600 63.506 65.322 66.771 68.012 69.116 72.786 80.018
79 58.842 61.763 63.519 64.434 66.266 67.729 68.982 70.096 73.803 81.110
80 59.720 62.668 64.439 65.363 67.211 68.688 69.952 71.077 74.820 82.203
81 60.600 63.573 65.360 66.292 68.157 69.647 70.923 72.059 75.838 83.297
82 61.480 64.479 66.282 67.222 69.104 70.607 71.895 73.041 76.856 84.390
83 62.362 65.386 67.204 68.152 70.051 71.568 72.867 74.024 77.874 85.484
84 63.244 66.294 68.128 69.084 70.998 72.529 73.839 75.007 78.893 86.578
85 64.127 67.202 69.051 70.016 71.947 73.490 74.813 75.990 79.912 87.672
86 65.011 68.111 69.976 70.948 72.896 74.452 75.786 76.974 80.932 88.767
87 65.896 69.021 70.901 71.881 73.845 75.415 76.760 77.959 81.952 89.861
88 66.782 69.932 71.827 72.815 74.795 76.378 77.735 78.944 82.972 90.956
89 67.669 70.843 72.753 73.749 75.745 77.342 78.710 79.929 83.993 92.051
90 68.556 71.755 73.680 74.684 76.696 78.306 79.685 80.915 85.014 93.146
91 69.444 72.668 74.608 75.620 77.648 79.271 80.661 81.901 86.035 94.242
92 70.333 73.581 75.536 76.556 78.600 80.236 81.638 82.888 87.057 95.338
93 71.222 74.495 76.465 77.493 79.553 81.201 82.614 83.875 88.079 96.434
94 72.113 75.410 77.394 78.430 80.506 82.167 83.592 84.862 89.101 97.530
95 73.004 76.325 78.324 79.368 81.459 83.133 84.569 85.850 90.123 98.626
96 73.895 77.241 79.255 80.306 82.413 84.100 85.547 86.838 91.146 99.722
97 74.788 78.157 80.186 81.245 83.368 85.068 86.526 87.826 92.169 100.81
9
98 75.681 79.074 81.117 82.184 84.323 86.035 87.504 88.815 93.193 101.91
6
Erlang B Table
(Offered Load)
N 0.002 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.05 0.1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
99 76.575 79.992 82.050 83.124 85.278 87.003 88.484 89.804 94.216 103.01
3
100 77.469 80.910 82.982 84.064 86.234 87.972 89.463 90.794 95.240 104.11
0
Erlang B Table
(Offered Load)
N 0.002 0.005 0.008 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.05 0.1
Version 2.1
12/18/98
V. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table V.1: Watts to dBm Conversion Table
Watts to dBm Conversion Table
Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm
200 53.010 150 51.761 100 50.000 50 46.990 0.98 29.912
199 52.989 149 51.732 99 49.956 49 46.902 0.96 29.823
198 52.967 148 51.703 98 49.912 48 46.812 0.94 29.731
197 52.945 147 51.673 97 49.868 47 46.721 0.92 29.638
196 52.923 146 51.644 96 49.823 46 46.628 0.90 29.542
195 52.900 145 51.614 95 49.777 45 46.532 0.88 29.445
194 52.878 144 51.584 94 49.731 44 46.435 0.86 29.345
193 52.856 143 51.553 93 49.685 43 46.335 0.84 29.243
192 52.833 142 51.523 92 49.638 42 46.232 0.82 29.138
191 52.810 141 51.492 91 49.590 41 46.128 0.80 29.031
190 52.788 140 51.461 90 49.542 40 46.021 0.78 28.921
189 52.765 139 51.430 89 49.494 39 45.911 0.76 28.808
188 52.742 138 51.399 88 49.445 38 45.798 0.74 28.692
187 52.718 137 51.367 87 49.395 37 45.682 0.72 28.573
186 52.695 136 51.335 86 49.345 36 45.563 0.70 28.451
185 52.672 135 51.303 85 49.294 35 45.441 0.68 28.325
184 52.648 134 51.271 84 49.243 34 45.315 0.66 28.195
183 52.625 133 51.239 83 49.191 33 45.185 0.64 28.062
182 52.601 132 51.206 82 49.138 32 45.051 0.62 27.924
181 52.577 131 51.173 81 49.085 31 44.914 0.60 27.782
180 52.553 130 51.139 80 49.031 30 44.771 0.58 27.634
Watts to dBm
Conversion Table
Appendix
V.
Section V.: Watts to dBm Conversion Table
Version 2.1
12/18/98
179 52.529 129 51.106 79 48.976 29 44.624 0.56 27.482
178 52.504 128 51.072 78 48.921 28 44.472 0.54 27.324
177 52.480 127 51.038 77 48.865 27 44.314 0.52 27.160
176 52.455 126 51.004 76 48.808 26 44.150 0.50 26.990
175 52.430 125 50.969 75 48.751 25 43.979 0.48 26.812
174 52.405 124 50.934 74 48.692 24 43.802 0.46 26.628
173 52.380 123 50.899 73 48.633 23 43.617 0.44 26.435
172 52.355 122 50.864 72 48.573 22 43.424 0.42 26.232
171 52.330 121 50.828 71 48.513 21 43.222 0.40 26.021
170 52.304 120 50.792 70 48.451 20 43.010 0.38 25.798
169 52.279 119 50.755 69 48.388 19 42.788 0.36 25.563
168 52.253 118 50.719 68 48.325 18 42.553 0.34 25.315
167 52.227 117 50.682 67 48.261 17 42.304 0.32 25.051
166 52.201 116 50.645 66 48.195 16 42.041 0.30 24.771
165 52.175 115 50.607 65 48.129 15 41.761 0.28 24.472
164 52.148 114 50.569 64 48.062 14 41.461 0.26 24.150
163 52.122 113 50.531 63 47.993 13 41.139 0.24 23.802
162 52.095 112 50.492 62 47.924 12 40.792 0.22 23.424
161 52.068 111 50.453 61 47.853 11 40.414 0.20 23.010
160 52.041 110 50.414 60 47.782 10 40.000 0.18 22.553
159 52.014 109 50.374 59 47.709 9 39.542 0.16 22.041
158 51.987 108 50.334 58 47.634 8 39.031 0.14 21.461
157 51.959 107 50.294 57 47.559 7 38.451 0.12 20.792
156 51.931 106 50.253 56 47.482 6 37.782 0.10 20.000
155 51.903 105 50.212 55 47.404 5 36.990 0.08 19.031
154 51.875 104 50.170 54 47.324 4 36.021 0.06 17.782
153 51.847 103 50.128 53 47.243 3 34.771 0.04 16.021
152 51.818 102 50.086 52 47.160 2 33.010 0.02 13.010
Version 2.1
12/18/98
151 51.790 101 50.043 51 47.076 1 30.000 0.01 10.000
Power (in Watts) = [10^(dBm/10)] / 1000
Power (in dBm) = 10 Log(Watts * 1000)
dBm = dB + 30
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VI. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VI.1 Expected Value and Standard Deviation of for a Single Cell System
Since Z is the sum of k random variables and k is a Poisson random variable
Let =
E( )= E(k) E( ) = [EQ VI.1-1]
VAR( )
= E(k) VAR ( ) + VAR(k) [E( )]
2
= VAR(k) [E( )]
2
= E(k) [E( )]
2
= [E( )] E[ ]
= [EQ VI.1-2]
STD( ) = [EQ VI.1-3]
Z

exp m ( )
---------------------------
Z

---
,
_
exp
( )
2
2
--------------
,
_

Z

---

2
---
,
_
exp 2 ( )
2
[ ]
Z

---
,
_
exp 2 ( )
2
[ ]
Appendix
Section 3 - Further
Reference
VI.
Section VI.: Section 3 - Further Reference
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VI.2 Path Loss Model and the Chicago Path Loss Measurement Results
In Mathematical form, the path loss between the mobile and the cell site is proportional to
[EQ VI.2-1]
where
r is distance from mobile to cell site
is a Gaussian random variable with standard deviation and zero mean.
The path loss can be expressed as
[EQ VI.2-2]
where
r and are the base-mobile distance and the reference distance respectively
Measurements were made in several locations in downtown Chicago for the purpose of verifying
the above mentioned path loss model. Statistical analyses were performed on this data to determine
the previously defined path loss characteristics such as path loss slope (dB/dec) and standard devi-
ation. They showed that the standard deviation is reasonably close to 8 dB. The results are summa-
rized as follows:
Table VI.2-1: Statistics of Downtown Chicago Path Loss Data
Site
Name
Path Loss Slope
(dB/dec)
Intercept
at
Standard
Deviation
Federal Reserve
Building
29.5 90.0 8.2
De Paul
University
32.8 85.3 7.1
LaSalle
Center
39.0 72.0 6.8
10
10
------
,
_
r

PL
r
r
0
----
,
_
log =
r
0
d
0
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Three transmit locations in the Chicago area were selected. The center part of Chicago can be typ-
ified by very tall skyscraper type buildings (30 stories or higher). The south side of Chicago is sur-
rounded by a less dense urban area consisting of buildings which are much smaller, approximately
5 to 10 stories high. These two types of urban environment are very typical in the United States.
The Federal Reserve site and the DePaul University site were located very close to the city bound-
ary separating the two types of urban environments. In fact, the radio paths from the Federal Re-
serve site are fairly obstructed in most directions, while the radio paths from the DePaul University
site are completely unobstructed in all directions. The LaSalle Center was located in a fairly ho-
mogenous urban area. By this it is meant that the radio path was similar in all directions out to a
distance of about 500 m. Buildings were of the order of 5 to 10 stories tall and streets were more
widely spaced. Figure 2-1: Downtown Chicago Path Loss Measurement Data, Page 292 of this sec-
tion shows the scatter plots for the data collected using the DePaul University transmitter and the
LaSalle Center transmitter.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure VI.2-1: Downtown Chicago Path Loss Measurement Data
DePaul
University
LaSalle
Center
PL Slope = 39.0 dB/dec
Std. Dev. = 7.1 dB
PL Slope = 32.8 dB/dec
Std. Dev. = 6.8 dB
Path Loss (dB)
Path Loss (dB)
Mobile-Base Distance (m)
Mobile-Base Distance (m)
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VI.3 Expected Value and Standard Deviation of for a Multiple Cell System
E(J
0
)
=
= [EQ VI.3-1]
VAR(J
0
)
=
= [EQ VI.3-2]
Figure VI.3-2: Values of the Integral and with various path loss slope
Z
E ( )

---
,
_
r
m
r
0
-----
,
_
exp ( )
2
[ ] 1 Q
10
2
2
-------------
r
0
r
m
-----
,
_
2
2
,
_
log

' ;

dA
allcell

E ( )

---
,
_
I , ( ) [ ]
E
2
( )

---
,
_
r
m
r
0
-----
,
_
2
exp ( )
2
[ ] 1 Q
20
2
2
-------------
r
0
r
m
-----
,
_
2
2
,
_
log

' ;

dA
allcell

E
2
( )

---
,
_
I 2 , ( ) [ ]
I , ( ) I 2 , ( )
50 45 40 35 30
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
I(alpha,sigma=8dB)
I(2alpha,sigma=8dB)
Path Loss (dB/dec)
V
a
l
u
e
s

o
f

t
h
e

I
n
t
e
g
r
a
l
s
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Combining [EQ VI.3-1]and [EQ VI.3-2] with [EQ VI.1-1] and [EQ VI.1-2], we obtain the mo-
ments of the total normalized interference variable including the interference from outer cells
[EQ VI.3-3]
[EQ VI.3-4]
P
blocking
with outer cell interference = [EQ VI.3-5]
where
[EQ VI.3-6]
[EQ VI.3-7]
Probability of Blocking = [EQ VI.3-8]
The Complementary Error Function Table on the following page is supplied for the readers refer-
ence. Note that the value of x within Q(x) is the sum of value in the first column of a specific row
plus the value given in the top row. For example, Q(0.76) corresponds to 0.2236 and Q(2.42) cor-
responds to 0.0078.
Z
E Z ( )

---
,
_
exp
( )
2
2
--------------
,
_
1 I r , , ( ) + [ ] =
STD Z ( )

---
,
_
exp 2 ( )
2
[ ] 1 I 2 r , , ( ) + [ ] =
Q
A E Z ( )
STD Z ( )
----------------------
A
W R
exp m ( )
---------------------- = 1 ( )
Q x ( )
1
2
---------- = e
x
xp

2
2
--------
,
_
d
Q
W R
exp m ( )
---------------------- 1 ( )

---
,
_
exp
( )
2
2
--------------
,
_
1 I r , , ( ) + [ ]
,
_
---
,
_
exp 2 ( )
2
[ ] 1 I 2 r , , ( ) + [ ]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
,

_
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table VI.3-2: Complementary Error Function Q(x)
Q(x)
x 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
0.0 0.5000 0.4960 0.4920 0.4880 0.4840 0.4801 0.4761 0.4721 0.4681 0.4641
0.1 0.4602 0.4562 0.4522 0.4483 0.4443 0.4404 0.4364 0.4325 0.4286 0.4246
0.2 0.4207 0.4168 0.4129 0.4090 0.4052 0.4013 0.3974 0.3936 0.3897 0.3859
0.3 0.3821 0.3783 0.3745 0.3707 0.3669 0.3632 0.3594 0.3557 0.3520 0.3483
0.4 0.3446 0.3409 0.3372 0.3336 0.3300 0.3264 0.3228 0.3192 0.3156 0.3121
0.5 0.3085 0.3050 0.3015 0.2981 0.2946 0.2912 0.2877 0.2843 0.2810 0.2776
0.6 0.2743 0.2709 0.2676 0.2644 0.2611 0.2579 0.2546 0.2514 0.2483 0.2451
0.7 0.2420 0.2389 0.2358 0.2327 0.2297 0.2266 0.2236 0.2207 0.2177 0.2148
0.8 0.2119 0.2090 0.2061 0.2033 0.2005 0.1977 0.1949 0.1921 0.1894 0.1867
0.9 0.1841 0.1814 0.1788 0.1762 0.1736 0.1710 0.1685 0.1660 0.1635 0.1611
1.0 0.1586 0.1562 0.1539 0.1515 0.1492 0.1468 0.1446 0.1423 0.1401 0.1378
1.1 0.1357 0.1335 0.1313 0.1292 0.1271 0.1251 0.1230 0.1210 0.1190 0.1170
1.2 0.1151 0.1131 0.1112 0.1093 0.1075 0.1056 0.1038 0.1020 0.1003 0.0985
1.3 0.0968 0.0951 0.0934 0.0917 0.0901 0.0885 0.0869 0.0853 0.0838 0.0823
1.4 0.0807 0.0793 0.0778 0.0764 0.0749 0.0735 0.0721 0.0708 0.0694 0.0681
1.5 0.0668 0.0655 0.0643 0.0630 0.0618 0.0606 0.0594 0.0582 0.0570 0.0559
1.6 0.0548 0.0537 0.0526 0.0515 0.0505 0.0495 0.0485 0.0475 0.0465 0.0455
1.7 0.0446 0.0436 0.0427 0.0418 0.0409 0.0401 0.0392 0.0384 0.0375 0.0367
1.8 0.0359 0.0352 0.0344 0.0336 0.0329 0.0322 0.0314 0.0307 0.0301 0.0294
1.9 0.0287 0.0281 0.0274 0.0268 0.0262 0.0256 0.0250 0.0244 0.0239 0.0233
2.0 0.0228 0.0222 0.0217 0.0212 0.0207 0.0202 0.0197 0.0192 0.0188 0.0183
2.1 0.0179 0.0174 0.0170 0.0166 0.0162 0.0158 0.0154 0.0150 0.0146 0.0143
2.2 0.0139 0.0136 0.0132 0.0129 0.0126 0.0122 0.0119 0.0116 0.0113 0.0110
2.3 0.0107 0.0105 0.0102 0.0099 0.0097 0.0094 0.0091 0.0089 0.0087 0.0084
2.4 0.0082 0.0080 0.0078 0.0076 0.0074 0.0072 0.0070 0.0068 0.0066 0.0064
2.5 0.0062 0.0060 0.0059 0.0057 0.0056 0.0054 0.0052 0.0051 0.0049 0.0048
2.6 0.0047 0.0045 0.0044 0.0043 0.0042 0.0040 0.0039 0.0038 0.0037 0.0036
2.7 0.0035 0.0034 0.0033 0.0032 0.0031 0.0030 0.0029 0.0028 0.0027 0.0026
2.8 0.0026 0.0025 0.0024 0.0023 0.0023 0.0022 0.0021 0.0021 0.0020 0.0019
Version 2.1
12/18/98
2.9 0.0019 0.0018 0.0018 0.0017 0.0016 0.0016 0.0015 0.0015 0.0014 0.0014
3.0 0.0014 0.0013 0.0013 0.0012 0.0012 0.0011 0.0011 0.0011 0.0010 0.0010
3.1 0.0010 0.0009 0.0009 0.0009 0.0008 0.0008 0.0008 0.0008 0.0007 0.0007
3.2 0.0007 0.0007 0.0006 0.0006 0.0006 0.0006 0.0006 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005
3.3 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004
3.4 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0003 0.0002
3.5 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 0.0002
3.6 0.0002 0.0002 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001
3.7 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001
3.8 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001
3.9 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Q(x)
x 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
VII. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VII.1 Reverse Link Equation
Note: The analysis presented in this appendix is that for an omni-directional cell and can be easily
augmented for sectored cells.
Assuming a CDMA system with mobiles in the cell of interest and perfect reverse link power
control such that the power received at the base site due to each mobile,
, we define the signal to noise plus total (in-cell and out of cell) in-
bound interference ratio on the traffic channel as
[EQ VII.1-1]
and
[EQ VII.1-2]
Where:
is the signal to noise plus total interference ratio,
(Watts), is the power received at the base site from each individual in-cell mobile. Note that,
although the power received at the base site from a particular mobile is a function of mobiles trans-
mit power, mobile antenna gain, base site antenna gain, individual pathloss and fading, the reverse
link power control ensures that the received power from any mobile in the cell is approximately at
the same level ,
(Hz), is the spread bandwidth of the CDMA system,
(Watts/Hz), is the thermal noise power spectral density at the input to the receiver Low Noise
Amplifier (LNA),
(Watts/Hz) , is the interference power spectral density from mobiles within
the cell at the input to the receiver LNA. Note that, in the cell of interest, out of a total of mobiles
N
P
r
1
P
r
2
.... P
r
N
P
r
= = =
SNR
P
r
N
o
W I
o
W I
oc
W + + ( )
--------------------------------------------------- =
E
b
N
t
------ SNR PG SNR
W
R
b
------ = =
SNR
P
r
P
r
W
N
o
I
o
N 1 ( )P
r
W
---------------------------- =
N
Section 5 - Further
Reference
Appendix
VII.
Section VII.: Section 5 - Further Reference
Version 2.1
12/18/98
only one mobile is the mobile of interest hence there are interfering mobiles,
is the voice activity factor or the fraction of time voice is transmitted during a call,
(Watts/Hz), is the interference power spectral density from mobiles in other cells at the input
to the receiver LNA and is the function of their respective pathloss characteristics, load, size and
power control.
is the figure of merit for digital systems and is defined as energy per bit to noise plus total
interference power spectral density ratio,
, is the Processing Gain of the CDMA system, and
is the bit rate of the traffic channel.
Note: For IS-95 and J-STD-008 CDMA system, MHz, thus for 9.6 kbps traffic chan-
nel (21.1 dB) and for 14.4 kbps traffic channel (19.3 dB).
VII.1.1 F - factor and System Rise determination
The frequency reuse factor or the F-factor of an omni-directional cell is defined as the ratio of in-
bound interference from mobiles within the cell (intra-cell) to the total inbound interference from
mobiles in all the cells (including the cell of interest). Since each mobile is a potential interferer,
F-factor is given by
[EQ VII.1-1]
Some references to the frequency reuse factor may be in terms of out of cell interference to in cell
interference (f = OutCell/InCell). The frequency reuse factors F and f can be equated with the fol-
lowing equation:
[EQ VII.1-2]
Substituting the value of in Equation 1-1 results in:
[EQ VII.1-3]
Substituting the value of in Equation 1-1 and dividing both numerator and denominator by
N 1
I
oc
E
b
N
t
PG W R
b
=
R
b
W 1.2288 =
PG 128 = PG 85.33 =
F
InCell
InCell OutCell +
--------------------------------------------
I
o
P
r
W ( ) +
I
o
P
r
W ( ) I
oc
+ +
----------------------------------------------- = =
F
1
1 f +
----------- =
I
o
F
NP
r
NP
r
I
oc
W +
-------------------------------- =
I
o
Version 2.1
12/18/98
, we can be rewrite as
[EQ VII.1-4]
[EQ VII.1-5]
Substituting the value of F-factor from Equation 1-3 in Equation 1-5 we get,
[EQ VII.1-6]
or,
[EQ VII.1-7]
and from Equation 1-2,
[EQ VII.1-8]
where, .
From Equation 1-7,
[EQ VII.1-9]
where is defined as the loading factor of the system and is given by
[EQ VII.1-10]
N
o
W SNR
SNR
P
r
N
o
W N 1 ( )P
r
I
oc
W + +
----------------------------------------------------------------
P
r
N
o
W
1
N 1 ( )P
r
N
o
W
----------------------------
I
oc
W
N
o
W
------------ + +
-------------------------------------------------------- = =
SNR
P
r
N
o
W
1
NP
r
I
oc
W + ( )
N
o
W
-------------------------------------
P
r
N
o
W
----------- +
----------------------------------------------------------------- =
SNR
P
r
N
o
W
1
1
N
o
W
-----------
NP
r
F
--------------
P
r
N
o
W
----------- +
----------------------------------------------------------
P
r
N
o
W
1
P
r
N
o
W
-----------
,
_
N
F
---- 1
,
_
+
-------------------------------------------------- = =
SNR
s
1 s
N
F
---- 1
,
_
+
---------------------------------- =
E
b
N
t
------
s
1 s
N
F
---- 1
,
_
+
----------------------------------
W
R
b
------ =
s P
r
N
o
W =
s
SNR
1
N
F
---- 1
,
_
SNR
-----------------------------------------------
SNR
1 X
------------ = =
X
X
N
F
---- 1
,
_
SNR =
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Thus, we can define in terms of as
[EQ VII.1-11]
and
[EQ VII.1-12]
We can also determine the upper bound on the number of mobiles or the pole capacity of the cell
of interest by substituting in Equation 1-10 to yield:
[EQ VII.1-13]
The system rise is defined as the ratio of thermal noise plus total inbound interference to thermal
noise and is given by
[EQ VII.1-14]
From Equation 1-1 and Equation 1-14 we get
[EQ VII.1-15]
Substituting the value of from Equation 1-9 in Equation 1-15 results in:
or . [EQ VII.1-16]
R (dB) is the median rise. In other words, noise rise is above (or below) this level 50% of the time. This is due to the
voice activity ( ) term used in the SNR calculation.
Table 1-1, s (dB) versus X (% Load), is a graphical representation of Equation 1-9 and plots s
versus percentage loading X for a fixed Eb/No (SNR) for 9.6 kbps and 14.4 kbps. The minimum
value of s desired for a particular loading of the system can be computed from the plot. The rise at
a particular loading factor can also be computed from the plot by subtracting the value of s at X=0
from the value of s at the loading factor where the rise is to be determined.
Table 1-2, Theoretical number of mobiles, N in the cell of interest versus F-factor at the cell site,
is a graphical representation of Equation 1-10. It plots the theoretical number of mobiles that can
be accommodated in the cell of interest as a function of F factor, for X=75% and =0.40.
SNR and E
b
N
0
( ) X
SNR s 1 X ( ) =
E
b
N
0
------ s 1 X ( )
W
R
b
------ =
X 1 =
N
pole
F 1
1
SNR
------------------- +
,
_
F 1
W R
b
E
b
N
0
( )
----------------------------- +
,
_
= =
R
N
o
W I +
o
W I
oc
W +
N
o
W
---------------------------------------------- =
R
P
r
N
o
W
SNR
---------------------
s
SNR
----------- = =
s
R
1
1 X
------------ = R (dB) 10 1 X ( ) log =

Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table 1-3, Rise (dB) at the cell of interest versus X (% load) at the cell of interest, is a graphical
representation of Equation 1-16 and plots rise versus the loading factor X. From the plot, 50% load-
ing corresponds to a rise of 3 dB and 75% loading corresponds to a 6 dB rise.
Figure VII.1-1: s (dB) versus X (% Load)
Assumptions
9.6 kbps 14.4 kbps
Eb/No 7 dB 7.3 dB
SNR -14 dB -12 dB
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure VII.1-2: Theoretical number of mobiles, N in the cell of interest
versus F-factor at the cell site
Assumptions
9.6 kbps 14.4 kbps
Eb/No 7 dB 7.3 dB
SNR -14 dB -12 dB
(Voice Activity Factor) 0.40 0.40
X (Loading) 75% 75%
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure VII.1-3: Rise (dB) at the cell of interest versus X (% load) at the cell of interest
VII.2 Example of Forward Link Analysis
A parameter that is readily available in the field is the pilot strength or Pilot E
c
/I
o
. Each mobile
station measures the pilot strengths from its server and neighboring cells and reports these values
to the serving site. The reported values are those that cross a given threshold, T_ADD, typically set
in the range from -16 dB to -14 dB. Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 illustrate the distribution functions
of the Pilot E
c
/I
o
for 4-rings of omni and sectored cells, respectively. The cells are arranged on a
hexagonal grid pattern. The sectored cells use three sectors of 92-degree beamwidth antenna. The
propagation model is assumed to have a path loss slope of 4 with a lognormal shadow fading stan-
dard deviation of 8 dB. Also, a site-to-site correlation of 50% is applied. There are two main factors
assumed in these simulations:
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Pilot power is set to 20% (or -7 dB) of the total power. With a 13 Watts PA (required at
full power), the pilot power is 2.6 Watts.
All cells are assumed to be operating at full power. In reality, due to the variations in
load, some cells will operate at lower power than the full load. Also, an operator may
decide to run a given cell (sector) at lower than the full load, e.g. this may be done in
order to provide higher quality/coverage. In this case, the Pilot E
c
/I
o
values improve as
the load in the interfering cells are decreased. For example, if all cells are operating at
half load, the Pilot E
c
/I
o
is improved by about 2 dB. (Note that the improvement at half
load is not 3 dB, because the overhead channels, i.e. pilot, page, and sync, do not scale
with load.)
In this section, it is assumed that the mobile is moving at about 30 m.p.h. (This is an average speed
chosen for the following discussions. The quality/coverage improves at higher speeds and degrades
at lower speeds). Table 2-1 shows the modem performance, Traffic E
b
/I
oc
, in Rayleigh fading
based on simulations at 1960 MHz for a target FER of 1%
1
. For these simulations, the fraction of
power allocated to the traffic channel, at full rate, is -13 dB (or 650 mW). Note that the traffic chan-
nel allocation is allowed to vary between -16 dB and -7 dB relative to the full transmit power, i.e.
0.33 W to 2.6 W. Also, note that the E
b
/I
oc
values in Table 2-1 are for the strongest path, e.g. for
two path situations, such as 2-way soft handoff, only the strongest path is reported.
Table VII.2-1: Pilot E
c
/I
o
thresholds at 30 m.p.h. (All tabulated values are in dB)
The Traffic E
b
/I
oc
values in Table 2-1 are related to the Pilot E
c
/I
o
as follows: E
b
/I
oc
can be written
as
[EQ VII.2-1]
where W/R is the processing gain, F
tch
is the fraction of power allocated to the traffic channel, I
or
is the total desired received power (including all soft handoff cells), and is the fraction of the total
received power from the strongest path, i.e. = 1, 1/2, 1/3 for 1-path, 2 equal-paths, and 3 equal-
paths, respectively. Given the E
b
/I
oc
, one can compute the I
or
/I
oc
from [EQ VII.2-1], and then com-
pute Pilot E
c
/I
o
as follows
1. T. Chen and J. Odenwalder, Forward Link Simulation Results, Qualcomm Inc., TR45.5.1.3, March 13,
1995.
Number
of Paths
Eb/Ioc
(FER=1%)
a Ior/Ioc
F
tch
=-13
Pilot Ec/Io
F
tch
=-13
Pilot Ec/Io
Ftch=-10
Pilot Ec/Io
F
tch
=-7
1-Path 15.0 8.7 -7.5 -8.0 -8.9
2-Path 7.7 1.4 -11.4 -12.4 -13.9
3-Path 5.0 -1.3 -13.4 -14.5 -16.2
E
b
I
oc
------
W
R
-----
,
_
F
tch
I
or
I
oc
----------
=
Version 2.1
12/18/98
[EQ VII.2-2]
where F
pilot
is the fraction of power allocated to the pilot, i.e. -7 dB. Note that from Table 2-1, the
required Pilot E
c
/I
o
decreases as the F
tch
is increased. The minimum required Pilot E
c
/I
o
are listed
on the last column with F
tch
= -7 dB.
In this document a covered location is one that satisfies the target FER = 1%. Figure 2-4 and
Figure 2-5 show that the mobiles in 2-way and 3-way handoff have sufficient power all the time,
i.e. they are always covered. However, for the omni case, about 4% of the 1-way mobiles are not
covered. Similarly, for the sectored case, about 12% of the 1-way mobiles are not covered. In terms
of computing total coverage, for the omni case, only about 60% of mobiles are in 1-way. Thus, ap-
proximately 0.6*0.04=3% of the locations (or mobiles assuming uniform distribution) are not cov-
ered. Also, for the sectored case, about 40% of the mobiles are in 1-way handoff. Therefore, about
5% of the locations are not covered.
Remark: For digital cellular systems, the value of the outage FER is set higher than the target value.
A reasonable outage FER for CDMA (given the quality of the vocoders) is around 3%. For the ex-
ample design given here, with this higher outage setting, it is possible to achieve close to 99% cov-
erage. Also, as it was mentioned earlier, this method of computing coverage is pessimistic, because
it assumes that all cell sites are transmitting at full power. An operator may decide to trade off ca-
pacity for coverage/quality, if desired.
At this point it is necessary to mention a few additional issues:
For the simulated Pilot E
c
/I
o
shown in Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5, low antenna backlobes
(greater than 20 dB) were assumed. Using simulations, it has been determined that with
higher antenna backlobes (e.g. 15 dB due to scattering) the cell/sector Pilot E
c
/I
o
is
reduced by about 0.5 dB. This slightly decreases the coverage reliability.
The E
b
/I
oc
given in Table 2-1 are for Rayleigh fading. Some field measurements indi-
cate that the fast fading observed in the field may not be as severe as Rayleigh fading.
The collected data suggests that the fast fading in the field may be Rician with an aver-
age K~4 dB which implies that the E
b
/I
oc
should be about 1-2 dB lower. Also, note that
for the purpose of this discussion, flat fading was assumed. The results improve with
multipath.
The E
b
/I
oc
given in Table 2-1 are for equal paths. In reality, there is an imbalance
between the signals received from different cell sites. This degrades the E
b
/I
oc
. How-
ever, the impact of this degradation is small. Another source of degradation is fractional
power loss. This occurs due to having an insufficient number of Rake fingers in severe
multipath conditions. This effect is somewhat mitigated by the multipath diversity
effects. However, in general it is difficult to quantify its effects.
Note that the Pilot E
c
/I
o
values computed by the mobile are "instantaneous, i.e. they are
measured over about 0.5 ms, which implies that they include the variations due to fast
Pilot
E
c
I
o
----- F
pilot
I
or
I
or
I +
oc
------------------- F
pilot
1 I
oc
I +
or
-------------------------- = =
Version 2.1
12/18/98
fading. This variation is somewhat mitigated by the fast AGC used in the mobiles. Also,
averaging several Pilot E
c
/I
o
values over 1-2 seconds reduces the variations caused by
fast fading.
Balancing uplink and downlink soft handoff regions is an important issue in the field.
Essentially, as a general guideline, systems should be designed such that they are limited
by the downlink range. In other words, the soft handoff regions should be dictated by the
downlink pilot signals. On uplink, due to the variations in noise rise, cell range varies
with time. One may take advantage of this fact by measuring the uplink rise and setting
the downlink pilot powers accordingly (cell breathing). However, the initial deployment
will be with fixed pilot settings, i.e. a fixed range. This implies that the uplink noise rise
should not exceed the designed values. Otherwise, coverage holes are created at the
desired cell boundaries.
List of Symbols
I
oc
: other cell interference power density (cells not in soft handoff).
I
or
: total desired received power density (includes all cells in soft handoff).
I
o
: total received power density (I
or
+I
oc
)
N
o
: one-sided thermal noise power spectral density
Pilot E
c
/I
o
: pilot strength.
E
b
/I
oc
: traffic channel receive bit energy-to-interference plus noise density ratio.
: ratio of the mean power in strongest path relative to total received desired power.
F
tch
: fraction of total (mean) power allocated to a Traffic channel.
F
pilot
: fraction of total (mean) power allocated to the Pilot channel.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure VII.2-4: CDF of Pilot Strength using Omni Cells
Figure VII.2-5: CDF of Pilot Strength using Sector Cells
0.01
0.1
1
-14 -13.5 -13 -12.5 -12 -11.5 -11 -10.5 -10 -9.5 -9 -8.5 -8 -7.5 -7 -6.5 -6
C
D
F
Strongest Pilot Ec/Io (dB)
CDF of Ec/Io: 4-Ring Omni (4,8,0.5) T_DROP=-16 dB Pilot = 20% med-Isc/No=inf
1-Way=58.5%
2-Way=31.7%
3-Way=9.8%
0.01
0.1
1
-14 -13.5 -13 -12.5 -12 -11.5 -11 -10.5 -10 -9.5 -9 -8.5 -8 -7.5 -7 -6.5 -6
C
D
F
Strongest Pilot Ec/Io (dB)
CDF of Ec/Io: 4-Ring 3-Sectors (4,8,0.5) T_DROP=-16 dB Pilot= 20% med-Isc/No=inf
1-Way=40.0%
2-Way=45.7%
3-Way=14.3%
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VII.3 Jakes Single Cell Equation
2
[EQ VII.3-1]
where:
P
xo
(R) = Edge reliability
x
o
= Signal threshold level
x = Signal mean at edge of the cell
= Log normal standard deviation
[EQ VII.3-2]
[EQ VII.3-3]
[EQ VII.3-4]
where:
F
u
is the fraction of the total cell area where the signal exceeds a threshold determined by
P
xo
= Signal mean at edge of the cell
n = propagation exponent value
A composite standard deviation can be obtained by the following:
[EQ VII.3-5]
This composite standard deviation may sometimes be used if there are two regions (for instance,
2. Jakes, W.C.,Microwave Mobile Communications, IEEE Press Reissue 1993, (Wiley, New York, 1974),
pp. 125-127
P
xo
R ( )
1
2
---
1
2
---erf
x
o
x
2
-------------
,

_
=
F
u
1
2
--- 1 erf a ( )
1 2ab
b
2
------------------
,
_
1 erf
ab 1
b
---------------
,
_
+ exp +

' ;

=
a
x
o

2
-------------- =
b
10nLog
10
e ( )
2
-------------------------------- =
c

1
( )
2
2
( )
2
+ =
Version 2.1
12/18/98
outdoors and in-building) which have their own standard deviation. For example if the standard
deviation is 7 dB for outdoors and 8 dB for in-building, the composite standard deviation to use in
Jakes equation would be 11 dB.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VIII. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VIII.1 Notes for Table 6-3 Antenna Isolation Matrix
FOR REFERENCEDuplicate Table 6-3 Antenna Isolation Matrix
800 MHz TX-TX ANTENNA ISOLATION
CDMA Tx - CDMA Tx
The maximum TX reverse signal that can be applied to a BTS TX port is +30 dBm (1 Watt). A
typical high power LPA can deliver +50 dBm (100 Watts) to the antenna system. Taking into con-
sideration the coupling from the adjacent sectors, the minimum antenna-to-antenna isolation
should be:
50 dBm + 3 dB - 30 dBm = 23 dB
Since the minimum AMPS transmit antenna-to-antenna isolation is typically 20 dB, the worse
case antenna isolation required between any AMPS and CDMA transmit antenna combination
will be chosen to be 23 dB. (This applies to both 800 and 1900 MHz transmit antennas.)
800 MHz RX-RX ANTENNA ISOLATION
A minimum isolation of 20 dB is desired between any two antennas. This would apply to separate
AMPS and CDMA receive antennas mounted in close proximity to each other. When evaluating
two receive antennas connected to the same BTS for diversity reception, a more important factor
is the spatial separation of the two antennas. If their responses are uncorrelated to fading, good
diversity reception is assured. (According to Lee, William C.Y. in Mobile Cellular Telecommu-
nications Systems, uncorrelated antennas require from 8 to 14 wavelengths of horizontal separa-
tion. This equates to about 3 to 5 meters at 800 MHz or about half that much at 1900 MHz.) The
internal requirement of the BTS is 20 dB isolation, so the antenna system need only be 20 dB also.
The physical spacing required for spatial separation greatly exceeds 20 dB of isolation between
the two receive antennas.
Cellular Band (824-894 MHz) PCS Band (1.7-2.0 GHz)
TX-TX RX-RX TX-RX TX-TX RX-RX TX-RX
Cellular 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB
PCS 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB 23 dB 20 dB 34 dB
Appendix
Section 6 - Further
Reference
VIII.
Section VIII.: Section 6 - Further Reference
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Table VIII-1 Degradation to Sensitivity Based on Noise Level Below kTBF
800 MHz TX-RX ANTENNA ISOLATION
In Cases 1 through 3 below, Transmit to Receive Antenna Isolation requirements are estimated
based on reducing transmitter noise and spurs in the receive band to the point where only 0.5 dB
of receiver noise floor rise or receiver threshold sensitivity is produced. If either more or less deg-
radation is tolerable, the information given in Table VIII-1 can be used to modify them as desired.
Similarly, if specific information as to the transmitter noise and spurious signal levels for a partic-
ular Base Station model of interest is known, Cases 1 through 3 can be used as a guide.
Case 1: CDMA Tx - CDMA Rx
From Table VIII-1, "Degradation to Sensitivity Based on Noise Level Below kTBF", a 0.5dB
sensitivity degradation occurs when the Transmitter noise is 9 dB below kTBF. For a CDMA
receiver with a Noise Figure of 4 dB, kTBF is 109 dBm. This results in an maximum accept-
able interference power of 118 dBm.
Typical CDMA Tx noise level due to CDMA spurs (CDMA Tx IM) in the receive band is less
than 85 dBm in a 1 MHz bandwidth. In the CDMA receiver bandwidth of 1.2288 MHz this is
84 dBm. The resulting antenna-to-antenna isolation requirement for 0.5 dB sensitivity degra-
dation is:
-84 dBm - (-118 dBm) = 34 dB
Case 2: AMPS Tx - CDMA Rx
The specification for an AMPS Tx gives AMPS Rx band spurs at a maximum level of -90
dBm/30 kHz. The total TX SBN and spurs in the CDMA RX band is maintained at -85 dBm/
1 Mhz with proper frequency planning (no 3rd order IM inside CDMA RX). The resulting
antenna-to-antenna isolation requirement for 0.5dB sensitivity degradation is:
-84 dBm - (-118 dBm) = 34 dB
Noise level below kTBF Degradation to sensitivity
16 dB 0.1dB (essentially no deg.)
13 0.2
9.14 0.5
6 1.0
3 1.8
0 (added noise=kTBF) 3.0
Version 2.1
12/18/98
For multitone LPA application, the worst case TX SBN measured in the RX band is -85 dBm/
1 Mhz.
Case 3: CDMA Tx - AMPS Rx
Typical CDMA Tx noise level due to CDMA spurs (CDMA Tx IM) in the receive band is less
than -85 dBm in a bandwidth of 1 MHz. This is -100 dBm in the AMPS receiver bandwidth of
30 kHz. kTBF for a typical AMPS receiver is -123 dBm. From Table VIII-1, 0.5 dB sensitiv-
ity degradation occurs when the Transmitter noise is 9 dB below kTBF, which is -132 dBm in
this case. The resulting antenna-to-antenna isolation requirement for 0.5 dB sensitivity degra-
dation is:
-100 dBm - (-132 dBm) = 32 dB
The worse case AMPS or CDMA transmit antenna to AMPS or CDMA receive antenna iso-
lation will be chosen to be 34 dB. (This also holds for any combination of 800 and 1900 MHz
antennas.)
1900 MHz TX-TX ANTENNA ISOLATION
The maximum TX reverse signal that can be applied to a BTS TX port is +30 dBm. A typical 4-
carrier BTS can deliver 50dBm to the antenna system. Taking into consideration the coupling
from the adjacent sectors, the minimum antenna-to-antenna isolation should be:
50 dBm + 3 dB - 30 dBm = 23 dB
1900 MHz RX-RX ANTENNA ISOLATION
Same considerations as 800 MHz RX-RX antenna isolation.
1900 MHz TX-RX ANTENNA ISOLATION
Same numbers as 800 MHz TX-RX antenna isolation calculations.
1900 MHz TX-800 MHz TX ANTENNA ISOLATION
Same numbers as 800 MHz and 1900 MHz TX-TX antenna isolation calculations.
1900 MHz/800 MHz TX-RX ANTENNA ISOLATION
Same numbers as 800 MHz TX-RX antenna isolation calculations, cases 1 & 3.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
1900 MHz/800 MHz RX-RX ANTENNA ISOLATION
Same 20 dB minimum antenna isolation as discussed in 800 MHz RX-RX antenna isolation.
The antenna isolation requirement for AMPS/CDMA Cellular/PCS bands is shown in Table 6-3.
Unlike TX-TX isolation, the TX-RX isolation is a soft requirement. In other words, BTS receiver
performance degrades gradually if the actual isolation is lower than the recommended value. Fig-
ure VIII-1 Effective Noise Figure vs. TX-RX Isolation, illustrates the effective BTS noise figure
performance with respect to the TX-RX antenna isolation, assuming no other contribution besides
the BTS TX sideband noise and spurs.
Figure VIII-1 Effective Noise Figure vs. TX-RX Isolation
Version 2.1
12/18/98
VIII.2 Derivation of the Table VIII-1: Degradation to Sensitivity Based on Noise Level Below kTBF
The diagram above shows a model of a simple amplifier, but it could represent the receiver front
end. In this model, all internal noise is shown as a noise generator that is summed with the input
signal (S
i
) and input noise (N
i
) in an ideal summer. An ideal amplifier follows the summer and am-
plifies both the noise and the signal. Although not explicitly shown below, it can easily be seen that
if N
i
equals kTB, the output-to-input signal to noise ratios equal F, the noise figure (classic defini-
tion of noise figure).
Since the signal at the output, S
o
, equals the signal at the input times gain, it can be represented by:
So= S
i
*g [EQ VIII.2-1]
The noise at the output is the sum of the internal noise and the input noise, times the gain, or in
equation form:
No= (N
i
+(F-1)*kTB)*g [EQ VIII.2-2]
The sensitivity of this system, if it were a receiver front end, would be the input signal level re-
quired to get a given output signal to noise ratio. For CDMA, the required output S/N ratio is E
b
/
N
o
- Processing gain. Numerically this works out to a factor of 0.0631 (or -12dB for an E
b
/N
o
of
9dB and a processing gain of 21dB). Since we know what output S/N we need, we can solve for
the input signal required:
0.0631= S
o
/N
o
[EQ VIII.2-3]
Now substitute [EQ VIII.2-1] and [EQ VIII.2-2] into [EQ VIII.2-3]:
0.0631= Si*g/(Ni+(F-1)*kTB)*g [EQ VIII.2-4]
Now cancel the g's:
0.0631= Si/(Ni+(F-1)*kTB) [EQ VIII.2-5]
and solve for S
i
:
Ideal (noiseless)
amplifier
gain = g
S
o
N
o
S
i
N
i
Internal noise = (F -1)kTBF
Total noise = N
i
+ (F -1)kTBF
Version 2.1
12/18/98
S
i
= 0.0631*(Ni+(F-1)*kTB) [EQ VIII.2-6]
multiply out:
S
i
= 0.0631*(N
i
+kTBF-kTB) [EQ VIII.2-7]
By inspection, we can see that if the N
i
is just kTB, the formula reduces to:
S
i
= 0.0631*(kTBF) [EQ VIII.2-8]
If the N
i
is not kTB, but is higher, say kTB plus a jammer signal of power P
j
, the required input
signal is (from [EQ VIII.2-7]):
S
i
=0.0631*(kTB+P
j
+kTBF-kTB) = 0.0631*(P
j
+kTBF) [EQ VIII.2-9]
The diagram above shows the total noise level within the amp model to be:
Total noise level = kTB+P
j
+(F-1)*kTB [EQ VIII.2-10]
We can define an effective noise figure (F
e
) for this situation, taking into account the effect of add-
ed noise (P
j
) at the input.
To get the same level of total noise, but have kTB as the input noise we want:
kTB+(F
e
-1)*kTB= kTB+P
j
+(F-1)*kTB [EQ VIII.2-11]
multiply out, and solve for Fe:
Fe= (P
j
+kTBF)/kTB or F
e
= F+ P
j
/kTB [EQ VIII.2-12]
If this F
e
is used in the following sensitivity equation, it gives the same results as equation [EQ
VIII.2-9]:
Ideal (noiseless)
amplifier
gain = g
S
o
N
o
S
i
kTB + P
j
Internal noise = (F -1)kTBF
Total noise = kTB + P
j
+ (F -1)kTBF
Version 2.1
12/18/98
S
i
= kTB + F
e
+ S
o
/N
o
(classic sensitivity equation in dBm) [EQ VIII.2-13]
let F=5db (3.16), Pj=0, So/No= -12dB (0.0631)
From [EQ VIII.2-9]:
S
i
= 0.0631*(0+kTBF) = 0.0631 * 1.548x10^
-11
W = -120.1dBm [EQ VIII.2-14]
From [EQ VIII.2-13]:
S
i
= -113.1 + 5 - 12 dB = -120.1 dBm [EQ VIII.2-15]
Now let Pj= kTBF, or 5dB above kTB, or -108.1 dBm (1.55x10^
-11
W)
From [EQ VIII.2-9]:
S
i
= 0.0631* (1.55x10^
-11
W + 1.55x10^
-11
W) = -117.1 dBm [EQ VIII.2-16]
From [EQ VIII.2-13], using an F
e
= 3.16+ kTBF/kTB= 3.16+3.16= 6.32 or 8.0dB
S
i
= -113.1 + 8 - 12 = -117.1 dBm [EQ VIII.2-17]
In either case, using equation 5 or 6, the degradation to sensitivity is 3dB if the power of the jammer
is equal to kTBF. Other values of degradation are shown in Figure VIII-1, with a degradation of
0.5dB being chosen as the maximum allowable degradation.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
IX. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
IX.1 Equipment RF Flow Diagrams
Section IX.1 consists of RF Flow diagrams for the SC infrastructure. Please note that all diagrams
are in a preliminary stage (subject to change without prior notification) and should be used for in-
formation purposes only.
While the diagrams show the functional RF flow of the equipment, the system engineer should note
that not all boards or equipment/redundancy options are presented. For example, note that the sin-
gle CCP shelf graphic represents both CCP shelves in the SC 4850/E diagrams. The RFDS is also
not shown.
For further information relating to the actual functionality and configuration of the board modules
presented within this appendix, the system engineer should consult the B1 specification and/or Mo-
torola equipment planning guide.
Section
Section 7 - Further
Reference
IX.
Section IX.: Section 7 - Further Reference
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure IX.1-1: SC
TM
4850 RF Cabling Diagram
This diagram shows the RF flow for a single SC
TM
4850 cabinet equipped with 2 carriers. Note
that the duplexers and directional couplers etc. are mounted externally within a 19" rack. If desired
this equipment could also be wall mounted.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure IX.1-2: Multiple SC
TM
An RF flow diagram for three SC
TM
4850 cabinets and 6 carriers utilizing cavity combining.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure IX.1-3: SC
TM
4850 (E) RF Cabling Diagram
As per Figure 1-1 except for the outdoor enclosure (E) for the SC
TM
4850. Note that the duplexers,
directional couplers and lightning surge protectors are mounted within the enclosure.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure IX.1-4: Multiple SC
TM
4850 (E) RF Cabling Diagram
As per Figure 1-2 except for the outdoor enclosure (E). Note the location of the cavity combiners
and duplexers/directional couplers in separate enclosures.
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure IX.1-5: SC
TM
This diagram shows the RF flow for a single SC
TM
604 cabinet equipped with 1 carrier. Note that
all modules shown are considered internal to the SC
TM
604.
X. - 1 Motorola Confidential Proprietary
Version 2.1
12/18/98
X.1 Radio Equipment Interference Overview
Inter-system interference scenarios like the ones addressed in Section 10 are the result of several
common interference phenomena that can occur either in the transmitter or receiver of a radio com-
munications system. These are discussed below.
X.1.1 Transmitter Sideband Emissions
Transmitter sideband emissions occur primarily in either the speech amplifier, oscillator and/or
modulator of the transmitter. Sideband emissions are created by the infinite bandwidth character-
istics of white noise modulating the Tx carrier. Most transmitter equipment specifications require
a minimum of 60 dB attenuation of sideband emissions with respect the mean power level of the
transmitter (Figure X-1).
Figure X-1: Transmitter Spectral Mask
When sideband emissions fall within the passband of a sensitive communications receiver, it cre-
ates interference. This can happen when transmitters operate near receivers with adjacent pass-
bands. With this type of interference, no particular sound is created at the receiver, just receiver
noise.
-10
-70
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
0
f
60 dB
Section 10 - Further
Reference
Appendix
X.
X
Section X: Section 10 - Further Reference
Version 2.1
12/18/98
X.1.2 Intermodulation
Intermodulation, or IM, can occur anywhere in the transmission path from transmitter to receiver.
IM is caused by non-linearities in transmitter circuitry, receiver circuitry and/or along the RF path
from the transmitter to receiver. Severity of the IM process will depend on the number of IM prod-
ucts involved, their signal strengths and bandwidths.
IM can be detected as either a distinctive sound or as noise. For example, with 3rd-order, FM-mod-
ulated IM, an analog receiver hears two voices, one loud and distorted and the other normal. On
the other hand, IM produced by two or more signals, where at least one of them is a CDMA signal,
would be detected by the user of analog receiver as noise. For this discussion, we will divide IM
types into three categories: 1) Transmitter IM, 2) Receiver IM and 3) External IM.
X.1.2.1 Transmitter Intermodulation
There are at least two distinctive types of Transmitter IM: 1) Transmitter-to-Transmitter IM and 2)
Multicarrier LPA IM.
Transmitter-to-Transmitter IM can occur inside the transmitter circuitry if two or more transmitters
are installed closely together (and thus offering low isolation). Power radiated from one transmitter
can enter into another transmitter. The non-linear final amplifier circuit generates the IM and the
antenna radiates it (Figure X-2).
Figure X-2: Transmitter IM
Re-radiated signals are subject to a mixing loss in the IM-producing transmitter, which can be de-
fined by the dB difference between the power of the incoming signal and outgoing intermodula-
tion. A typical value for this loss is 60 dB. Most transmitter equipment specifications require a
minimum of 60 dB attenuation of IM signals with respect the mean power level of either transmit-
ter, equivalent to this mixing loss.
Tx A
Freq
870.57
MHz
Tx B
Freq
892.89
MHz
8
7
0
.5
7
a
n
d
a
lso
8
4
8
.2
5

8
9
2
.8
9
a
n
d
a
lso
9
1
5
.2
1
M
H
z
r
a
d
ia
te
d
* IM Products are formed in
transmitter final amplifier and
* Receiver
Freq. = 848.25
or 915.21 MHz
M
H
z
r
a
d
ia
ted
are radiated.
LOW
ISOLATION
X
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Multicarrier LPA IM can occur as a result of the amplification of different RF carriers by a com-
mon linear power amplifier. In this case, any resulting transmitter IM products that fall inside of
the Tx frequency band or close to it cannot be attenuated by RF filtering, and thus tend to all be of
approximately the same power level. Any transmitter IM products that fall well outside of the Tx
frequency band could be attenuated by RF filtering.
X.1.2.2 Receiver Intermodulation
Receiver IM occurs when two or more off-channel signals enter and drive a receivers RF amplifier
or 1
st
mixer stage and produce IM products (Figure X-3). The closer to saturation that an amplifier
or stage is driven, the worse (higher in level) the IM products become.
Figure X-3: Receiver IM
A given receivers ability to combat receiver IM, is quantified by its intermodulation rejection
specification, or IMR. To prevent receiver IM, interfering signal(s) must be received at a signal
strength lower than a level as determined by the receivers reference sensitivity and IMR specifi-
cations:
Rx Signal Strength < (Rx Sens + Rx IMR)
X.1.2.3 External Intermodulation
External IM is created by passive, non-linear elements in the transmission path from transmitter to
receiver such as antennas, combiners, duplexers, cables and connectors, etc. and other elements in
the immediate vicinity of the transmission line such as guy wires, tower joints, anchor rods, etc.
Here, signals are picked up by these elements and re-radiated as IM products (Figure X-4).
Tx A
Freq
870.57
MHz
Tx B
Freq
892.89
MHz
8
7
0
.5
7
M
H
z

8
9
2
.8
9
M
H
z
o
n
ly
r
a
d
ia
te
d
* IM Products are formed in
receiver amplifier or mixer.
* Receiver
Freq. = 848.25
or 915.21 MHz
o
n
ly
ra
d
ia
ted
HIGH
ISOLATION
X
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Figure X-4: External IM
Locating the actual source of external IM may be very difficult. There are really no preventative
measures with respect to external IM other than to conduct thorough periodic maintenance of ele-
ments in and around the transmission path. However, while low-order external IM created in the
antenna path system can easily cause interference to base station receivers that share the same an-
tenna, resulting IM signal levels are usually low enough that they wont create interference to mo-
biles or other base stations.
X.1.2.4 Intermodulation Product Frequencies
While the aforementioned cases of IM are distinctly separate matters, which are subject to different
engineering considerations, the frequency relationships applying to IM products are common. Fre-
quencies of IM products can be defined in the following manner:
1) Fundamental Frequencies - referring to the center frequencies of the signals from which IM
products are derived.
2) Harmonics - corresponding to the whole number multiples of a fundamental frequency.
3) Order - corresponding to the classification of IM products according to the sum of the harmon-
ics of the constituent frequencies (e.g. 2
nd
, 3
rd
, 4
th
,... N
th
).
For example, a 3
rd
order IM signal centered at frequency C could result from the combination of
the 2
nd
harmonic of a signal whose fundamental center frequency is A and a second signal whose
fundamental center frequency is B:
C = 2A + (1)B (where order = 2 + 1 = 3)
AN
ELECTRICALLY
NON-LINEAR
OBJECT
RX
TX1
TX2
IM
INTERFERENCE
X
Version 2.1
12/18/98
Some examples of 2
nd
through 5
th
order intermodulation products are provided in Table X-1.
Some generalizations can be made concerning IM products. First, the signal strength level of har-
monic decreases rapidly with its order (e.g. 3A would be weaker than 2A). Second, higher order
IM products may require too many different transmitters to be keyed simultaneously (e.g.
A+B+C+2D+2E) for the IM to occur. Lastly, even order IM products almost always fall out of the
local systems operating bands. For these reasons, the third and fifth order intermodulation prod-
ucts are the more prevalent and therefore more prone to cause IM interference.
X.1.3 Receiver Desensitization
Receiver desensitization, also known as receiver blocking, is usually caused by interference that
falls within or just outside the often wide passband of the receiver. If the interference is strong
enough, bias conditions can be changed on certain receiver stages, causing them to lose gain. This
makes the receiver less sensitive to any desired signals. While its negative effects might not be im-
mediately noticeable in a desired received signal, receiver desensitization could result in an in-
creased susceptibility to fading and a reduction in channel capacity. Example causes of receiver
desensitization are interfering Tx carrier power level, transmitter sideband emissions and transmit-
ter IM products.
Table X-1: Example IM Products
Order Intermodulation Products
2
nd
A+B, A-B
3
rd
2A+B, 2A-B, 2B+A, 2B-
A, A+B+C
4
th
2A+2B, 2A-2B, 3A+B,
3A-B
5
th
A+4B, A-4B, 4A+B, 4A-
B, 2A+3B, 2A-3B...
X
Version 2.1
12/18/98
END OF DOCUMENT

RF Planning Guide PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

RF Planning Guide PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MOTOROLA CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY

Copyright Motorola, Inc. 1993 -1998

CDMA RF Planning Guide

Вам также может понравиться